A330 FCOM 07feb18 GENDSC TOMEIII

A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL
The content of this document is the property of Airbus. It is supplied in confidence and commercial
security on its contents must be maintained. It must not be used for any purpose other than that for
which it is supplied, nor may information contained in it be disclosed to unauthorized persons. It must
not be reproduced in whole or in part without permission in writing from the owners of the copyright.
© AIRBUS 2005. All rights reserved.
REFERENCE: JAI A330/A340 FLEET FCOM ISSUE DATE: 07 FEB 18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
Intentionally left blank
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PRELIMINARY PAGES - TABLE OF CONTENTS
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-32-10 Gears and Doors

DSC-32-10-10 Description
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Main Landing Gear (MLG)...................................................................................................................................... B
Nose Landing Gear (NLG)...................................................................................................................................... C
Landing Gear Extension and Retraction Equipment...............................................................................................D
Landing Gears and Doors Operation...................................................................................................................... E
Landing Gear Indication and Warning Architecture.................................................................................................F
DSC-32-10-20 Landing Gear System Interface

Landing Gear Control Interface Unit (LGCIU).........................................................................................................A
Landing Gear - Aircraft System Interface............................................................................................................... B
DSC-32-10-30 Controls and Indicators

Landing Gear Indicator Panel..................................................................................................................................A
Landing Gear Selector Lever.................................................................................................................................. B
Landing Gear Gravity Extension............................................................................................................................. C
Wheel SD Page.......................................................................................................................................................D
DSC-32-20 Nose Wheel Steering

Description............................................................................................................................................................... A

Rudder Pedals......................................................................................................................................................... A
Side Consoles..........................................................................................................................................................B
Center Instrument Panel......................................................................................................................................... C
Wheel SD Page.......................................................................................................................................................D
Maintenance panel...................................................................................................................................................E
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... F
DSC-32-30 Brakes and Antiskid

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Antiskid System....................................................................................................................................................... B
Autobrake.................................................................................................................................................................C
Operation................................................................................................................................................................. D
Continued on the following page
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-PLP-TOC P 1/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Continued from the previous page

Center Instrument Panel..........................................................................................................................................A
Pedestal................................................................................................................................................................... B
Wheel SD Page.......................................................................................................................................................C
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... D
DSC-32-40 Tire Pressure Indicating System

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A

Wheel SD Page....................................................................................................................................................... A

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GEARS AND DOORS - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-32-10-10-00018883.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The landing gear consists of :

‐ Two inboard retracting main gears
‐ One forward retracting nose gear
‐ One forward retracting center gear (for A340 only).
Gear doors enclose the landing gear bays. Gears and doors are electrically-controlled and
hydraulically-operated.
The doors which are fitted to the landing struts are mechanically-operated by the gear, and close at
the end of gear retraction.
All gear doors open during landing gear transit. The hydraulically operated doors close at the end of
each retraction and extension sequence.
Gears and doors’ actuation are electrically-signalled by two Landing Gear Control and Interface Units
(LGCIUs).
The LGCIUs process gears and doors positions, sequencing control and gear lever selection. They
also provide landing gear information on the ECAM, and ground/flight signals for other aircraft
systems.
MAIN LANDING GEAR (MLG)

Ident.: DSC-32-10-10-00018884.0004001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Each main gear is a four wheel, twin tandem bogie assembly having an oleopneumatic shock
absorber.
Each main wheel is fitted with an antiskid brake.
A shortening mechanism, attached to the wing, reduces main gear length by retracting the shock
absorber into the main leg during retraction.
An hydraulically-operated pitch trimmer on each bogie beam damps the movement and ensures
return to normal position after liftoff.
NOSE LANDING GEAR (NLG)

Ident.: DSC-32-10-10-00018886.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The two-wheel nose gear comprises an oleopneumatic shock strut and a nosewheel steering system.
It retracts forward into the fuselage.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-10 P 1/6

FCOM A to C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LANDING GEAR EXTENSION AND RETRACTION EQUIPMENT

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-32-10-10-A-00018891.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
MAIN LANDING GEAR
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-10 P 2/6

FCOM D→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-32-10-10-A-00018892.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
NOSE LANDING GEAR
LANDING GEARS AND DOORS OPERATION

Ident.: DSC-32-10-10-00018889.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
NORMAL OPERATION
Landing gear normal operation is controlled by the lever located on the center instrument panel.
Gear and door sequencing is electrically-controlled by the LGCIUs. Each LGCIU controls one
complete gear cycle and switches over automatically at each landing gear retraction cycle or in
case of failure.
All gears and doors are hydraulically-actuated by the green hydraulic system. Hydraulic supply
is automatically isolated by closing a safety valve above 280 kt. It is maintained closed until the
landing gear lever is moved to the DOWN position and the aircraft speed decreases below 280 kt.
For A340-200/300 aircraft, the center landing gear may be inhibited by ground maintenance
action. Therefore, it will be mechanically-fixed in the uplock position while doors will continue to
operate during the landing gear retract/extend sequence.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-10 P 3/6

FCOM ← D to E → 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-10 P 4/6

FCOM ←E 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LANDING GEAR INDICATION AND WARNING ARCHITECTURE

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-32-10-10-B-00018887.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
ARCHITECTURE
Note: The landing gear position indications on center instrument panel are still provided by
LGCIU 1 even when LGCIU 2 is controlling gear cycle.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-10 P 5/6

FCOM F→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-32-10-10-B-00018890.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
LANDING GEAR GRAVITY EXTENSION

The gravity extension system is an electro-mechanical system, controlled through two selectors
located on the center instrument panel. It permits main and nose landing gear extension in case
the normal system fails.
When the related electrical selectors are set to down, the :
‐ Landing gear hydraulic system is isolated from the green hydraulic system
‐ Main and nose landing gear doors, and gears unlock
‐ Main and nose landing gears extend by gravity
‐ Locking springs assist the downlocking
‐ Main and nose landing gear doors remain open.
After a free fall extension, it is possible to restore normal operation, provided green hydraulic
pressure is available.
The cockpit indications are the same as those for normal extension and retraction.
Note: In case of landing gear gravity extension, the nose wheel steering is lost.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-10 P 6/6

FCOM ←F 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GEARS AND DOORS - LANDING GEAR SYSTEM INTERFACE
OPERATING MANUAL
LANDING GEAR CONTROL INTERFACE UNIT (LGCIU)

Ident.: DSC-32-10-20-00018894.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Two LGCIUs receive landing gear position information from the proximity sensors when:
‐ The landing gears are locked down or up, or
‐ The shock absorbers are compressed or extended, or
‐ The landing gear doors are open, or closed.
The LGCIUs send the landing gear position data to other aircraft systems.
In case of a LGCIU failure, the landing gear is controlled by the remaining healthy LGCIU.
LANDING GEAR - AIRCRAFT SYSTEM INTERFACE

Ident.: DSC-32-10-20-00018895.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The two LGCIUs provide following discrete logic signals to various aircraft systems.
A semicolon (;) separates different signals send to the same system.

Two additional discretes are provided by the LGCIUs.
OP : Applicable LGCIU is signalled operative as long as system is supplied by power.
E : External power connected.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-20 P 1/4

FCOM A to B → 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEM LGCIU 1 LGCIU 2

OUTPUT OUTPUT
AIR COND Packs bay ventilation L-F R-G
Avionics equipment ventilation R-G L-G ; OP
Fwd and aft cargo compartment vent. R-F
Pressure control and monitoring R-G R-G
Pack control and indicating L/R-G
Cockpit and cabin temperature control R-G
FM FMGS N-C N-C
COMMUNICATIONS HF System L-F R-F
VHF System L-F L/R-F
Satellite communication R-F
Cockpit to ground crew call system N-NC
Audio management L-F
CVR N-C/NC
CIDS N-C/D ; E N-C/D ; E
Radio management L-F L/R-F
ELEC AC main generation N-C
AC emergency generation N-NC
ECMS N-C
DC essential normal generation switching N-NC
Battery DC generation N-C
GPCU N-C
Circuit breaker monitoring N-C
APU Control and monitoring L-G
APU generator (GCU) N-C
FIRE Engine fire and overheat protection L/R-G L/R-G
APU fire and cargo compartment overheat detector M-G M-G
Cargo compartment smoke detector N-C ; E N-C ; E
APU fire extinguishing M-G
FLT CTL Flaps control and monitoring M-G M-G
Slats control and monitoring M-G M-G
EFCS L/R-D ; N-C L/R-D ; N-C
FUEL APU fuel pump system M-G
FCMS L-D ; N-C L-D ; N-C
HYD Green main hydraulic power M-G M-G
ICE Wing ice-protection M-F M-F
Probe ice-protection L/R-G ; E L/R-G ; E
N-C ; OP N-C ; OP
Windscreen anti-icing and defogging L/R-G L/R-G
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-20 P 2/4

FCOM ←B→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

SYSTEM LGCIU 1 LGCIU 2
OUTPUT OUTPUT
EIS FWC - acquisition interface R-G L-G
SDAC - acquisition interface R-G L-G
DMC - acquisition interface R-G L-G
GEAR Normal extension and retraction R-G ; E R-G ; E
Normal braking L/R-G ; N-C/D R-G ; N-D
Brake cooling L-D
LIGHTS Runway turn off lights N-D N-D
Taxi and take off lights N-D N-D
Logo lights M-G
Toilet system N-C
NAVIGATION Sensors N-C
Altitude and airspeed standby data L-G
ILS L-F R-F
Weather radar system L-F R-F
Radio altimeter L-F L-F
TCAS L-G/D
GPWS L-D
DME L-F R-F
ATC/MODE S L-G R-G
ADF L-F R-F
VOR/MARKER L-F R-F
MAIN CMS acquisition interface N-C ; E
Up and down data loading system R-G
DOOR Doors and escape slide control system N-C ; E N-C ; E
ENG FADEC L/R-G ; DP L/R-G ; DP
N-C N-C
The following systems get landing gear position selection data from the landing gear lever
SYSTEM L/G lever position
Refuel on battery DOWN
FCMS DOWN
Normal braking UP
Cabin emergency lighting UP
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-20 P 3/4

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-20 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GEARS AND DOORS - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
LANDING GEAR INDICATOR PANEL

Ident.: DSC-32-10-30-00018897.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
A340 Landing Gear Indicator Panel
A330 Landing Gear Indicator Panel
Connected to LGCIU 1 which receives signals from proximity sensors.

No light : Indicate landing gear is retracted and locked up with landing gear lever selected up.
▿ light : Illuminate green if the landing gear is locked down.
UNLK light : Illuminate red if the landing gear is not locked in selected position.
Note: The green▿ lights on the LANDING GEAR indicator panel come on as long as the LGCIU
1 is electrically supplied. For A340 aircraft, the center landing gear may not light up,
depending on the LGCIU failure.
Note: If one UNLK indication remains on at gear extension, the landing gear position can be
confirmed using the WHEEL SD page (information from LGCIU 1 & 2) : only one green
triangle on each landing gear is sufficient to confirm that the landing gear is downlocked.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-30 P 1/6

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LANDING GEAR SELECTOR LEVER

Ident.: DSC-32-10-30-00018898.0001001 / 20 MAY 16
Applicable to: ALL
A two-position selector lever provides electrical signals to the two LGCIUs, which control green
hydraulic supply by means of selector valves.
The flight crew must always move the L/G lever in one continuous movement (i.e. with no stop
between both positions).
Upon selection of UP or DOWN, and provided the airspeed is below 280 kt :
‐ All landing gear doors open
‐ Landing gears move to the new selected position
‐ All doors close.
(1) L/G LEVER

UP : Landing gear retraction is selected.
During gear door opening, main and center (for A340-500/600 only) landing gear
wheels are automatically braked by the normal braking system.
The nose gear wheels are braked by a brake band in the gear bay.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-30 P 2/6

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DOWN : Landing gear extension is selected.

An interlock mechanism prevents unsafe retraction by locking the lever in the
DOWN position, when either :
‐ Both main landing gear bogies are compressed (aircraft on ground), or
‐ On A340 aircraft, the center landing gear shock absorber is not fully extended
(aircraft on ground), or
‐ The nose landing gear shock absorber is not fully extended (aircraft on ground),
and the nose wheels are not in the center position.
When the landing gear is extended, the system remains pressurized (if green
hydraulic pressure is available).
(2) RED ARROW
The red arrow, and associated ECAM warnings come on red in approach at 750 ft RA, if the
landing gear is not downlocked in landing configuration.Refer to PRO-ABN-LG L/G GEAR NOT
DOWN
LANDING GEAR GRAVITY EXTENSION

Ident.: DSC-32-10-30-00018899.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-30 P 3/6

FCOM ← B to C → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The landing gear gravity extension selectors are locked-toggle type selectors. The selectors are
connected by a link, so that both are operated simultaneously.
When the link is disconnected, each selector can be independently operated.
(1) LDG GEAR GRVTY EXTN selector
Each selector has three positions :
OFF : Normal position. Landing gear operation is controlled by the LGCIU and the
landing gear lever.
DOWN : The two motorized actuators are electrically-powered to close the hydraulic
(guarded) cut-off valve and to disengage door and gear uplocks which permit the nose,
center (for A340-500/600 only), and main landing gear to deploy by gravity and to
automatically lock down.
RESET : The actuators return to the initial position, and automatically set the system back
to the normal extension and retraction mode.
The selectors are then set to off for normal operation.
Note: To select the landing gear, both selector guards have to be open.
WHEEL SD PAGE
Ident.: DSC-32-10-30-00018900.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The wheel page is automatically displayed:

‐ On ground, before takeoff with engine running (flight phase 2). It disappears at engine TO power
application
‐ In approach, at landing gear down selection or below 800 ft radio height (flight phases 7, 8, 9). It
disappears at engine shutdown.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-30 P 4/6

FCOM ← C to D → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) Landing Gear Position Indication

The landing gear positions are indicated by two triangles for each gear.
The left triangle is controlled by LGCIU 1, the right one by LGCIU 2.
‐ The triangle is green when the LGCIU detects landing gear downlocked
‐ The triangle is red when the LGCIU detects landing gear in transit
‐ There is no signal when the LGCIU detects landing gear uplocked
‐ There are amber crosses in the case of an LGCIU failure.
Note: When the landing gear lever is down, one LGCIU downlocked indication (one green
triangle per gear) is sufficient to indicate that the landing gear is down and locked.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-30 P 5/6

FCOM ←D→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) Landing Gear Door Position Indication
(3) UPLOCK Indication

The indication associated with an ECAM caution, comes on amber if the landing gear uplock is
engaged when the landing gear is downlocked.
(4) L/G CTL Indication
It appears amber, with a 30 s time delay, when the position of any landing gear disagrees with
the lever position. The associated ECAM caution is triggered.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-30 P 6/6

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW NOSE WHEEL STEERING - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-32-20-10-00000618.0006001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
Nose wheel steering is provided by two actuators, powered by the green hydraulic system and
electrically-signalled by the Brake and Steering Control Unit (BSCU).
The BSCU has two independent systems. Only one is active at a time, while the other is on standby.
To control the steering the BSCU receives inputs from the steering hand wheels, the rudder pedals,
and the Auto Pilot.
The BSCU transforms the pilot order into a nose wheels steering angle by controlling the servo-valve
to provide the requested flow for the hydraulic actuators. The following limitations apply:
The steering handwheels control the nosewheel steering angle up to ±72 ° in either direction.
A lever on the towing electrical box (on the nose L/G) enables the steering system to be deactivated
for towing purposes.
A visual red warning on the overhead panel indicates to the crew that an oversteer (±93 °) has
occurred.
Pilots can disconnect the rudder pedal order to the BSCU, through a pushbutton located on each
steering hand wheel.
An internal cam mechanism returns the nose wheel to the centered position after takeoff.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-20-10 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW NOSE WHEEL STEERING - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-20-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW NOSE WHEEL STEERING - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
RUDDER PEDALS
Ident.: DSC-32-20-20-00018905.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Nosewheel steering control authority depends on aircraft speed. Rudder pedals provide nosewheel
steering control when:
‐ The speed is below 100 kt at landing, or
‐ Up to 150 kt for takeoff.
Note: The nosewheel steering angle depends on aircraft speed, and will return to zero if the
aircraft is above these speeds.
SIDE CONSOLES
Ident.: DSC-32-20-20-00000629.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) STEERING HANDWHEELS

The steering handweels provide nosewheel steering control below 100 kt, and up to 72 ° left or
right.
(2) RUDDER PEDAL DISC pb
When maintained depressed, the nosewheel steering control by the pedal is disconnected.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-20-20 P 1/6

FCOM A to B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL

Ident.: DSC-32-20-20-00018907.0004001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) A/SKD & N/W STRG sw

An ON/OFF switch activates or deactivates the Nosewheel Steering and Anti-Skid (Refer to
DSC-32-30-10 General).
(2) ALTN N/W STRG pb  (guarded pushbutton to be used on ground only)
ON : The Yellow hydraulic system supplies the nosewheel steering. This function and the
ON light are inhibited when the aircraft speed is above 70 kt.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-20-20 P 2/6

FCOM C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
WHEEL SD PAGE
Ident.: DSC-32-20-20-00018909.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
For A330
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-20-20 P 3/6

FCOM D→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
For A340
(1) N/W STRG indication

Appears amber in case of:
‐ Nose wheel steering failure detected by the BSCU (associated with an ECAM caution), or
‐ A/SKID & N/W STRG sw is OFF, or
‐ Failure of both BSCU channels (associated with ECAM caution).
MAINTENANCE PANEL
Ident.: DSC-32-20-20-00018908.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
NWS TOWING pb (guarded)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-20-20 P 4/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FAULT : On ground, it comes on red when the nosewheel steering has exceeded 93 ° .
It is associated with the illumination of the red oversteer warning light, located on
the nose landing gear. When pressed, the light goes out.
MEMO DISPLAY
Ident.: DSC-32-20-20-00017135.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
N/WS DISC : This memo appears in green if the nose wheel steering lever is in the towing
position.
N/WS DISC : This memo appears in amber if one engine is running.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-20-20 P 5/6

FCOM ← E to F 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-20-20 P 6/6

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW BRAKES AND ANTISKID - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-32-30-10-00018913.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The main wheels are equipped with carbon multidisc brakes, which can be actuated by either of two
independent brake systems.
The normal system uses green hydraulic pressure, whilst the alternate system uses the blue
hydraulic system (backed up by the hydraulic accumulator).
An antiskid and autobrake system is also provided.
Braking commands come from either the brake pedals (pilot action), or the autobrake system
(deceleration rate selected by the crew).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-10 P 1/8

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
A dual channel Brake and Steering Control Unit (BSCU) controls all braking modes and functions
which are the following :
‐ Normal braking
‐ Alternate braking
‐ Autobrake
‐ Antiskid.
The BSCU performs the following secondary functions:
‐ Checks the residual pressure in the brakes
‐ Monitors brake temperature
‐ Provides discrete wheel speed information to other aircraft systems.
A changeover between the two BSCU systems takes place at each DOWN landing lever selection, or
in case one system fails.
The main gear wheels are fitted with fusible plugs which protect against tire burst in the event of
overheat.
Main gear wheels are also equipped with brake cooling fans  , which permit a high speed cooling
of the brakes.
ANTISKID SYSTEM
Ident.: DSC-32-30-10-00018914.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The antiskid system provides maximum braking efficiency by maintaining the wheels at the limit of an
impending skid.
At skid start, brake release orders are sent to:
• Normal servovalves
• Alternate servovalves
• ECAM system which displays the released brakes.
Without using autobrake, full braking performance is achieved only with brake pedals at full
deflection.
The antiskid system is deactivated below 10 kt (ground speed). For A340-500/600, below 10 kt
(ground speed), the antiskid system is only operative during hard braking.
An ON/OFF switch activates or deactivates the antiskid system.
A/SKID PRINCIPLE
The A/SKID system compares the speed of each MLG wheel (and NLG wheel for A340-500/600)
given by a tachometer with the aircraft speed called reference speed.
When the speed of a wheel decreases below 0.88 time the reference speed, brake release orders
are given to maintain the wheel speed at the value (best braking efficiency).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-10 P 2/8

FCOM ← A to B → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
In normal operation, the reference speed is determined by BSCU from the horizontal acceleration
from ADIRU1 or ADIRU2 or ADIRU3.
In case all ADIRUs are failed, reference speed equals the maximum of either landing gear wheel
speeds.
AUTOBRAKE
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-32-30-10-A-00018916.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
The A/BRK is a function that automatically decelerates the aircraft during landing, or in the case of a
rejected takeoff (RTO). The A/BRK:
‐ Avoids any delay for brake application in the case of an RTO
‐ Reduces flight crew workload during landing, by maintaining a constant deceleration rate
‐ Reduces the number of brake applications, and therefore, brake wear.
Ident.: DSC-32-30-10-A-00018918.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
SYSTEM ARMING
The crew may arm the system by pressing the LO, MED, or MAX pushbutton provided all the
following arming conditions are met :
‐ Green pressure available
‐ Antiskid electrically-powered
‐ No failure in the braking system
‐ At least two PRIMs and one ADIRU available.
Note: Autobrake may be armed with the parking brake on.
Ident.: DSC-32-30-10-A-00018919.0008001 / 21 MAR 17
SYSTEM ACTIVATION
Automatic braking is activated:
‐ At the command for ground spoilers extension (Refer to DSC-27-10-20 Speedbrake and Ground
Spoiler Control - Speedbrake Control), for LO and MED modes, or
‐ At the command for ground spoilers extension, when the aircraft speed is above 40 kt and when
the nose landing gear is compressed, for MAX mode.
Consequently in the event of an acceleration stop, if the deceleration is initiated with the speed
below 72 kt, the automatic braking will not activate because the ground spoilers will not be
extended.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-10 P 3/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-32-30-10-A-00018920.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
SYSTEM DEACTIVATION
The system deactivates when :
‐ Autobrake is disarmed (Refer to DSC-32-30-10 System Disarming), or
‐ Ground spoilers retract. In this case, it remains armed.
Ident.: DSC-32-30-10-A-00018921.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
SYSTEM DISARMING
The system is disarmed by :
‐ Pressing the pushbutton of the corresponding armed autobrake mode, or
‐ Losing one or more arming conditions, or
‐ Applying sufficient deflection to at least one brake pedal when autobrake is active in MAX, MED
or LO mode, or
‐ After takeoff, or touch and go.
OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-32-30-10-B-00018922.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
GENERAL
There are four operation modes which are:
‐ Normal braking
‐ Alternate braking with antiskid
‐ Alternate braking without antiskid
‐ Parking brake.
Ident.: DSC-32-30-10-B-00000869.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
NORMAL BRAKING
Antiskid is operative and autobrake is available.
Braking is normal when:
‐ Green hydraulic pressure is available
‐ main landing gear in ground condition
‐ A/SKID and N/W STRG switch is ON
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-10 P 4/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The control is electrically- achieved through the BSCU either via :

‐ The pedals, or
‐ Automatically:
• on ground by autobrake system
• in flight by setting the landing gear lever to the up position
The antiskid system is controlled by the BSCU, via the normal servo valves.
No brake pressure indication is provided.
Ident.: DSC-32-30-10-B-00018924.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
ALTERNATE BRAKING WITH ANTISKID

Autobrake is inoperative.
Active when green hydraulic pressure is insufficient and provided :
‐ Blue hydraulic pressure is available
‐ A/SKID & N/W STRG sw is ON
‐ PARKING BRAKE is not ON.
Note: Alternate braking is also active in flight, when the landing gear is up.
The automatic switching between the green and blue system is achieved by an automatic
hydraulic selector.
Control is achieved by the pedals through the auxiliary low hydraulic pressure distribution line
acting on the dual valves. The BSCU controls antiskid system via the alternate servo valves.
Brake pressure, as well as accumulator pressure, are indicated on a triple indicator located on the
center instrument panel.
Note: Initial pedal force or displacement produces more braking action in alternate mode than
in normal mode.
Ident.: DSC-32-30-10-B-00018925.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
ALTERNATE BRAKING WITHOUT ANTISKID

Autobrake and antiskid are inoperative.
The antiskid system is either deactivated:
‐ Electrically (A/SKID & N/W STRG sw is OFF, or power supply failure, or BSCU failure), or
‐ Hydraulically (B + G system low pressure, the brakes are supplied by the brake accumulator
only).
Control is achieved by the pedals (acting on the dual valves). Alternate servo valves are fully open.
Brake pressure and accumulator pressure are indicated on a triple indicator, located on the center
instrument panel. The pilot must modulate brake pressure at, or below, 1 000 PSI in order to avoid
wheel locking.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-10 P 5/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Accumulators are designed to supply at least 7 full brake applications.

Note: Initial pedal force or displacement produces more braking action in alternate mode than
in normal mode.
Ident.: DSC-32-30-10-B-00000872.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
PARKING BRAKE
Brakes are supplied by the blue hydraulic system, or by accumulator pressure via the dual shuttle
valves. Alternate servo valves are open allowing full pressure application.
The accumulator maintains the parking pressure for at least 12 h.
If the parking brake is activated and no blue hydraulic or accumulator brake pressure is available,
then the normal braking system can be applied via the brake pedals.
Blue accumulators can be pressurized by pressing the blue electrical pump switch. Brake
pressure, as well as accumulator pressure, are indicated on a triple indicator located on the center
instrument panel.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-10 P 6/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-32-30-10-B-00018927.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
BRAKING SCHEMATIC
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-10 P 7/8

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-10 P 8/8

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW BRAKES AND ANTISKID - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL

Ident.: DSC-32-30-20-00018931.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) A/SKID & N/W STRG sw

ON : ‐ If green hydraulic pressure is available, antiskid and nose wheel steering are
available.
‐ If green hydraulic pressure is lost:
• Blue hydraulic pressure automatically takes over to supply the brakes
• Antiskid remains available
• Nose wheel steering is lost
• Brake blue pressure is displayed on the triple indicator.
OFF : ‐ Blue hydraulic pressure supplies the brakes:
• Antiskid is deactivated. Brake pressure has to be limited by the pilot by
refering to the triple indicator to avoid wheel locking
• Nose wheel steering is lost
• Differential braking remains available by pedals
• Brake blue pressure is displayed on the triple indicator.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-20 P 1/6

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) BRAKES and ACCU PRESS indicator

ACCU PRESS : ‐ green band : allowed pressure area in the brake
indication accumulators. Provides full pressure to the
brakes.
‐ amber band : forbidden pressure area. Necessitates a
repressurization of the accumulators.
BRAKES pressure : Indicates blue pressure delivered to left and right brakes measured
indication upstream of the alternate servovalves.
(3) AUTO BRK panel

The springloaded MAX, MED, and LO pushbutton switches arm the appropriate deceleration
rate:
‐ MAX mode is normally selected for take off.
In the case of an aborted takeoff, maximum pressure goes to the brakes, as soon as the
system generates the ground spoiler deployment order.
‐ MED or LO mode is normally selected for landing.
• When LO is selected, progressive pressure goes to the brakes 1 s after ground spoiler
deployment order, in order to decelerate the aircraft at 1.8 m/s² (5.9 ft/s²).
• When MED is selected, progressive pressure goes to the brakes starting at ground spoiler
deployment order, in order to decelerate the aircraft at 3 m/s² (9.8 ft/s²).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-20 P 2/6

FCOM ←A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ON : The ON light illuminates blue to indicate positive arming.

The DECEL light illuminates green only if the autobrake function is active and
when actual aircraft deceleration corresponds to predetermined rate. (In LO or
MED : 80 % of the selected rate ; in MAX : 2.65 m/s² (8.7 ft/s²)). This occurs
approximately 8 (5) seconds after activation for LO (MED) using only the brakes.
Predetermined rates can also be achieved by using only the reversers or a
combination of both reversers and brakes.
Note: On a slippery runway, the predetermined deceleration may not be
reached due to the slippery runway condition. In this case, the DECEL
light will not come on, even if autobrake is active (ACTIV light ON).
Off : The corresponding autobrake mode is not armed.
(4) BRK FAN pb 

ON : The brake fans run, provided the main landing gear is downlocked.
The ON legend comes on in white.
Off : The brake fans stop.
HOT It : Comes on amber, along with the associated ECAM caution, when one brake
temperature exceeds 300 °C.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-20 P 3/6

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
PEDESTAL
Ident.: DSC-32-30-20-00018932.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) PARK BRK handle

Pull the handle, then turn it clockwise to apply the parking brake.
For A340-500/600, the activation of the parking brake deactivates all the other braking modes.
The "PARK BRK" message is displayed on the ECAM memo page.
CAUTION As long as the handle is not in the "ON" position, the parking brake is not
applied.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-20 P 4/6

FCOM B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
WHEEL SD PAGE
Ident.: DSC-32-30-20-00018933.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) NORM BRK indication

Appears in amber in case of:
‐ Normal braking is failed, or
‐ A/SKID & NWS sw is at OFF (associated with ECAM caution), or
‐ Both BSCU channels are failed (associated with ECAM caution).
(2) ANTISKID indication
Appears amber associated with an ECAM caution in case of total BSCU failure or when the
A/SKID & NWS sw is OFF or in case of anti-skid failure detected by the BSCU or in flight with
at least one engine running when green and blue systems are failed.
(3) AUTO BRK indication
Displayed : ‐ In green when the autobrake is armed.
‐ In amber and an associated ECAM caution comes on in case of autobrake
system failure, or failure of both BSCU channels.
MAX, MED or LO indicates the selected rate (green). It is not displayed when the autobrake is
faulty.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-20 P 5/6

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(4) Wheel number identification

Indication is displayed in white.
(5) III indications
It appears in green when:
‐ In flight, the landing gear is extended, and the antiskid is valid, or
‐ On ground, when antiskid is activated and the brakes are released.
It is amber in case of:
‐ Residual pressure, or
‐ Brake release fault.
Note: The III indications do not appear if the Alternate Nose Wheel Steering  is active
(i.e. if the ALTN NWS pb is switched to ON).
The R (Release) indication is always in white.
(6) Brake temperature indications
‐ It is normally green (minimum indication 0 °C).
‐ The green arc appears on the hottest wheel, when one brake temperature exceeds 100 °C.
‐ The amber light, and associated ECAM caution, come on when the corresponding brake
temperature exceeds 300 °C.
In addition, on the hottest wheel, the arc becomes amber.
Note: Below 100 °C, the indicated brake temperature may be below the actual brake
temperature. This difference can reach 25 °C with an actual brake temperature of
30 °C, and it decreases when the temperature increases.
MEMO DISPLAY
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-32-30-20-A-00017137.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
BRK FAN : This memo appears in green, if the BRK FAN pb  is ON.
Ident.: DSC-32-30-20-A-00017136.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
PARK BRK : This memo appears in green when the aircraft is on ground (during flight phases
1, 2, 9 and 10) and the parking brake is ON, .
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-30-20 P 6/6

FCOM ← C to D 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-32-40-10-00018936.0004001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The Tire Pressure Indicating System (TPIS) includes:

‐ A sensor which measures the pressure of each tire
‐ A transmission unit which transmits the electrical pressure signal from the sensor to the computer
‐ A Tire Pressure Indicating Unit (TPIU) which sends informations to the ECAM for cautions and
system page display.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-40-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-40-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATING SYSTEM - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
WHEEL SD PAGE
Ident.: DSC-32-40-20-00018937.0005001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Tire pressure indication

Indication is green.
Becomes amber associated with an ECAM caution when tire low pressure is detected.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-40-20 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LANDING GEAR
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATING SYSTEM - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-40-20 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-33-10 Cockpit Lighting

DSC-33-10-10 General
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Description............................................................................................................................................................... A

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
Pedestal................................................................................................................................................................... B
Glareshield............................................................................................................................................................... C
Main Instrument Panel............................................................................................................................................ D
Left Rear Panel........................................................................................................................................................E
DSC-33-20 Exterior Lighting

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A

Controls and Indicators............................................................................................................................................A
Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... B
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... C
DSC-33-30 Emergency Lighting

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-33-30-20 Operation
Operation..................................................................................................................................................................A

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-33-40 Signs
Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
Overhead Panel (cont'd)..........................................................................................................................................B
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... C

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW COCKPIT LIGHTING - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-33-10-10-00018004.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The instrument panel has both integral instrument lighting and flood lighting.
The brightness of all panel lighting is adjustable.
Spot lights and flood lights provide lighting for all work surfaces and the side consoles.
Two dimmable dome lights provide lighting for the overall cockpit.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-10-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW COCKPIT LIGHTING - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-10-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW COCKPIT LIGHTING - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-33-10-20-00000677.0003001 / 06 JAN 16
Applicable to: ALL
INSTRUMENT AND PANEL INTEGRATED LIGHTING

All instruments and panels installed in the cockpit (other than the DU) are integrally lit.
Their brightness of all instruments and panels can be adjusted.
ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT TEST AND DIMMING
The brightness of all the annunciator lights in the flight deck can be adjusted, depending on the
ANN LT TEST / BRT / DIM sw position on the overhead panel.
The lights are dimmed to a fixed level.
An annunciator light test is provided to verify cockpit annunciator lamp operation.
The test is done by selecting the TEST position on the ANN LT «TEST / BRT / DIM» sw, and by
visually checking that all lights illuminate.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-10-20 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
COCKPIT LIGHTING
(2, 3, 4) Dome lights and lighting strips:

Two dome lights and lighting strips supply general cockpit illumination providing shadow
free lighting.
(5, 6) Map holder lighting:
Map chart holder is provided at the CAPT and F/O stations.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-10-20 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(7, 8) Console and floor lighting:

Briefcase stowage, side console, and floor lighting are provided at the CAPT and F/O
stations.
(1, 10) Centre instrument panel and standby compass:
The centre instrument panel is lighted by a set of lights located below the glareshield.
The standby compass is provided with integral illumination.
(F) Reading lights:
Individual reading lights, and supplementary reading lights, are provided at the CAPT
and F/O stations.
(9) Pedestal lighting:
Located in the middle of the overhead panel, a flood light provides illumination of the
centre pedestal.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-10-20 P 3/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-10-20 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW COCKPIT LIGHTING - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-33-10-30-00018009.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) READING LT knob

Turns the reading lights on and off, and adjusts their brightness.
There are two reading lights on the central part of the overhead panel.
(2) ICE IND  & STBY COMPASS sw
This switch turns the standby compass light, the seat alignment indicator, and the external ice
detector light  on and off.
(3) CTL sw
A two-way switch that operates the dome lights. There is another two-way switch on the left
rear panel (next to the cockpit door).
Note: On ground, and when batteries are the only source of power, the dome light on the
right automatically comes on, regardless of the switch position selected by the flight
crew.
(4) DOME sw
The DOME sw controls both dome lights. The DOME sw can have one of the two following
configurations:
or
STORM : Sets the two dome lights, and the main instrument panel lights, to their maximum
brightness.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-10-30 P 1/6

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
BRT : Both dome lights are on and bright. (Provided that the flight crew uses the CTL
sw, or the dome light switch on the rear left panel, to turn them on).
DIM : Both dome lights are on and dim. (Provided that the flight crew uses the CTL sw,
or the dome lighting switch on the rear left panel, to turn them on).
(5) ANN LT sw
The ANN LT sw controls all the flight deck annunciator lights. The ANN LT sw can have one of
the two following configurations:
or
TEST : All flight deck annunciator lights turn on.The figure '8' is displayed on all Liquid
Crystal Displays (LCD) of the FCU.
DIM : Reduces the brightness of all flight deck annunciator lights.
BRT : All flight deck annunciator lights operate normally.
PEDESTAL
Ident.: DSC-33-10-30-00018023.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) FLOOD LT MAIN PNL knob

Turns on or off, and adjusts the brightness of the center instrument panel.
(2) FLOOD LT PED knob
Turns on or off, and adjusts the brightness of the pedestal lights.
(3) INTEG LT knob
Turns on or off, and adjusts the brightness of the integral lights of:
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-10-30 P 2/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ The main instrument panel

‐ The center pedestal
‐ The overhead panel.
GLARESHIELD
Ident.: DSC-33-10-30-00018034.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) This knob adjusts the brightness of the integral lighting on the glareshield and of the FCU
displays.
(2) This knob adjusts the brightness of the FCU displays.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-10-30 P 3/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-10-30 P 4/6

FCOM ←C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL

Ident.: DSC-33-10-30-00018035.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Ceiling sw 
Operation of the two lighting strips located on either side of the overhead panel
(2) MAP sw
Operates the two map holder lights located under the side windows.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-10-30 P 5/6

FCOM D→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(3) CONSOLE sw
Illuminates the side consoles, briefcases, and floor surrounding the pilots' seats (two lighting
levels).
LEFT REAR PANEL

Ident.: DSC-33-10-30-00018036.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-10-30 P 6/6

FCOM ← D to E 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EXTERIOR LIGHTING - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-33-20-10-00018039.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Exterior lighting includes the following lights:

‐ The navigation lights
‐ The landing lights
‐ The runway turn off lights
‐ The TO and TAXI lights
‐ The logo lights
‐ The anticollision lights
‐ The wing and engine scan lights.
Exterior lighting is controlled by means of switches located on the overhead panel.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-20-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EXTERIOR LIGHTING - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-20-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EXTERIOR LIGHTING - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

Ident.: DSC-33-20-20-00018042.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-20-20 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-20-20 P 2/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-33-20-20-00018087.0020001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) BEACON sw
This switch turns on and off the two flashing red lights, one on top and one on the bottom of the
fuselage.
(2) WING sw
This switch turns on and off two beam lights on each side of the fuselage. These lights provide
lighting on the wing leading edge and on the engine air intake to detect ice accretion.
The wing and engine scan lights go off when the door 2 (LH or RH) opens for aircraft equipped
with an automatic control logic of the wing and engine scan lights  .
(3) NAV & LOGO sw
There are navigation lights on each wing tip and in the APU tail cone.
There are logo lights on the upper surface of each horizontal stabilizer.
These lights provide lighting for the company logo on the vertical stabilizer provided the main
landing gears is compressed, or depending on the aircraft configuration, when flaps are
extended (at least 15 ° on some aircraft).
2 : Turns on NAV 2 and the LOGO lights.
1 : Turns on NAV 1 and the LOGO lights.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-20-20 P 3/4

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
OFF : The NAV and the LOGO lights are off.

(4) NOSE sw
This switch turns the taxi and takeoff lights on and off.
T.O : Turns on both taxi and takeoff lights.
TAXI : Turns on only taxi light.
OFF : Taxi and takeoff lights are off.
Note: These two lights, attached to the nose gear strut, go off automatically when the
landing gear is retracted.
(5) LAND sw
This switch turns on and off the landing lights.
(6) RWY TURN OFF sw
This switch turns the runway turn-off lights on and off.
Note: These lights go off automatically when the landing gear is retracted.
(7) STROBE sw
Operation of the two synchronized strobe lights on each wing tip plus one in the tail cone.
ON : The strobe lights flash white.
AUTO : The strobe lights come on automatically when the main landing gear is not
compressed.
OFF : The strobe lights are off.
MEMO DISPLAY
Ident.: DSC-33-20-20-00000718.0001001 / 22 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
STROBE LT OFF : The message is displayed in green, if the STROBE sw is OFF in flight.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-20-20 P 4/4

FCOM ← B to C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EMERGENCY LIGHTING - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-33-30-10-00017993.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Emergency lighting consists of the following:

‐ Cabin emergency lighting:
• Proximity emergency escape path marking system (escape path and exit markers),
• Overhead emergency lights, and
• EXIT signs.
‐ Escape slide lighting.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-30-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EMERGENCY LIGHTING - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-30-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EMERGENCY LIGHTING - OPERATION
OPERATING MANUAL
OPERATION
Ident.: DSC-33-30-20-00017959.0010001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
‐ The floor proximity emergency escape path marking is a self-luminescent system.

‐ The exit markers of the proximity emergency escape path marking, the overhead emergency
lighting, and the EXIT signs come on, if the EMER EXIT LT sw is ON, or if the Purser panel’s
EMER pb is pressed.
‐ The cabin emergency lighting system is supplied as follows:
• The DC ESS BUS and AC BUS 1 supply the cabin emergency lighting.
• If the DC ESS BUS fails, internal batteries provide power to the cabin emergency lighting.
• In nominal case, the DC ESS BUS charges these internal batteries.
‐ The escape slides are equipped with an integral lighting system. The escape slide lights come on
automatically, when the slide is armed and the door is open. They have the same supply as the
cabin emergency lighting.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-30-20 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EMERGENCY LIGHTING - OPERATION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-30-20 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EMERGENCY LIGHTING - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-33-30-30-00017958.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) EMER EXIT LT sw

ON : The cabin emergency lighting comes on.
OFF : The cabin emergency lighting is off.
ARM : ‐ The cabin emergency lighting automatically comes on if:
• DC ESS BUS fails, or
• Normal aircraft electrical power fails
‐ The overhead emergency lights automatically come on in the case of partial loss of
the normal AC power supply. This is to provide minimum cabin lighting.
(2) EMER EXIT LT OFF light
Comes on amber when the EMER EXIT LT sw is set to OFF.
(3) EMER pb-sw
On : Emergency lights, EXIT signs and proximity emergency escape path marking come on.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-30-30 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EMERGENCY LIGHTING - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-30-30 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW SIGNS - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-33-40-10-00017948.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The switches described below are installed on the SIGNS panel on the overhead panel.
The cabin signs consist of the following:
• a SEAT BELTS sw, and
• a NO SMOKING sw  , or
• an EXIT sw  , or
• a NO PORTABLE ELEC DEVICE sw  .
The SEAT BELTS sw activates the FASTEN SEAT BELT and RETURN TO YOUR SEAT signs.
The NO SMOKING sw  activates the EXIT and NO SMOKING signs.
The NO PORTABLE ELEC DEVICE sw  activates the EXIT and NO MOBILE signs.
A low tone chime sounds (depending on CIDS/CAM Programming) each time a sign goes on or off.
Each switch has 3 positions:
ON : Signs are on in the cabin
AUTO  : Signs are on in the cabin when either landing gear is extended or flaps/slats are
extended (position 1, 2, 3 or FULL)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-40-10 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW SIGNS - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OFF : Signs are off in the cabin

Example of switches layout:
Note: In the event of excessive cabin altitude, the cabin lights (depending on CIDS/CAM
programming) and all the cabin signs, except the NO PORTABLE ELEC DEVICE signs 
, come on regardless of switches position.
OVERHEAD PANEL (CONT'D)

Ident.: DSC-33-40-10-00017931.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) TOILET OCCPD light

The OCCPD light comes on when the lavatory located near the forward exit is occupied.
MEMO DISPLAY
Ident.: DSC-33-40-10-00015508.0001001 / 05 JAN 15
Applicable to: ALL
When the corresponding signs are on, the ECAM displays in green the SEAT BELTS message,
the NO SMOKING message or the NO PORTABLE DEVICES message, depending on aircraft
customization.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-33-40-10 P 2/2

FCOM ← A to C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-34-10-10 ADIRS
DSC-34-10-10-10 Description
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Probes Location....................................................................................................................................................... B
Probes Schematic....................................................................................................................................................C
ADIRS Schematic.................................................................................................................................................... D
DSC-34-10-10-20 Controls and Indicators

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
Pedestal................................................................................................................................................................... B
Main Instruments Panel...........................................................................................................................................C
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... D
Maximum Differences Between Speed/Mach Indications....................................................................................... E
DSC-34-10-15 GPS
Description............................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-34-10-20 Standby Instruments

Compass.................................................................................................................................................................. A
Description of the ISIS............................................................................................................................................ B
Attitude..................................................................................................................................................................... C
Airspeed................................................................................................................................................................... D
Altimeter................................................................................................................................................................... E
Landing System Function........................................................................................................................................ F
BUGS Function........................................................................................................................................................G
Flags........................................................................................................................................................................ H
DSC-34-10-30 Radio NAV

DSC-34-10-30-10 Tuning
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Architecture.............................................................................................................................................................. B
DSC-34-10-30-20 Navaids
VOR..........................................................................................................................................................................A
ILS / GLS  ....................................................................................................................................................... B
ADF  ................................................................................................................................................................ C
DME......................................................................................................................................................................... D
Marker Beacon.........................................................................................................................................................E
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-PLP-TOC P 1/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

Digital Distance and Radio Magnetic Indicator (DDRMI)  ............................................................................... A
Radio Management Panel (RMP)........................................................................................................................... B
DSC-34-10-40 Radio Altimeter

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Automatic Callout.....................................................................................................................................................B

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ADIRS - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-34-10-10-10-00018959.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The Air Data and Inertial Reference System (ADIRS) supplies temperature, anemometric, barometric
and inertial parameters to the EFIS system (PFD and ND) and to other user systems (FMGEC,
FADEC, PRIM, SEC, FWC, SFCC, ATC, GPWS, CMC, CPC).
The system includes:
‐ Three identical ADIRUs (Air Data and Inertial Reference Units).
Each ADIRU is divided in two parts, either of which can work separately in case of failure in the
other:
• The ADR (Air Data Reference) part which supplies barometric altitude, airspeed, Mach, angle of
attack, temperature and overspeed warnings.
• The IR (Inertial Reference) part which supplies attitude, flight path vector, track, heading,
accelerations, angular rates, ground speed, vertical speed and aircraft position.
‐ One ADIRS control panel on the overhead panel for selection of modes (NAV, ATT, OFF) and
indications of failures.
‐ Four types of sensors:
• Pitot probes (3)
• Static pressure probes (STAT) (6)
• Angle of attack sensors (AOA) (3)
• Total air temperature probes (TAT) (2)
These sensors are electrically heated to prevent from icing up.
‐ Eight ADMs (Air Data Modules) which convert pneumatic data from PITOT and STAT probes into
numerical data for the ADIRUs.
‐ A switching facility for selecting ADR3 or IR3 for instrument displays in case of ADIRU1 or 2
failure.
‐ A MAG/TRUE pb-sw for polar navigation.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-10-10 P 1/4

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
PROBES LOCATION
Ident.: DSC-34-10-10-10-00001019.0001001 / 22 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-10-10 P 2/4

FCOM B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
PROBES SCHEMATIC
Ident.: DSC-34-10-10-10-00001021.0001001 / 22 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Note: ADIRU 1 is supplied by CAPT probes,

ADIRU 2 is supplied by F/O probes,
ADIRU 3 is supplied by STBY probes and CAPT TAT
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-10-10 P 3/4

FCOM C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ADIRS SCHEMATIC
Ident.: DSC-34-10-10-10-00018960.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-10-10 P 4/4

FCOM D 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ADIRS - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-34-10-10-20-00018961.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) ADR 1(2)(3) pb sw

OFF light : Air data output disconnected.
FAULT light : This amber light comes on with an ECAM caution if a fault is detected in the
air data reference part.
(2) IR 1(2)(3) pb sw
OFF light : Inertial data output disconnected.
FAULT light : This amber light comes on with an ECAM caution when a fault affects the
respective IR.
Steady : the respective IR is lost.
Flashing : the attitude and heading information may be recovered in
ATT mode.
(3) IR 1(2)(3) mode rotary sel
OFF : The ADIRU is not energized.
ADR and IR data are not available.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-10-20 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
NAV : Normal mode of operation.

Supplies full inertial data to aircraft systems.
ATT : IR mode supplying only attitude and heading information if the system loses its ability
to navigate.
The heading must be entered through the MCDU and has to be reset frequently
(about every 10 min).
(4) ON BAT light
The ON BAT light comes on in amber when the aircraft battery supplies at least one IRS.
The ON BAT light also comes on for a few seconds at the beginning of a complete IRS
alignment. The light does not come on in the case of a fast alignment.
Note: When the aircraft is on the ground, and if at least one ADIRU is supplied by aircraft
batteries :
‐ An external horn sounds
‐ The ADIRU light comes on amber on the SERVICE INTERPHONE BAY panel.
PEDESTAL
Ident.: DSC-34-10-10-20-00018962.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
(1) ATT HDG and AIR DATA sel

NORM : ADIRU1 supplies data to PFD1, ND1, DDRMI  and ATC1.
ADIRU2 supplies data to PFD2, ND2 and ATC2.
CAPT ON 3 : ADR3 or IR3 replaces ADR1 or IR1.
F/O ON 3 : ADR3 or IR3 replaces ADR2 or IR2.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-10-20 P 2/4

FCOM ← A to B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MAIN INSTRUMENTS PANEL

Ident.: DSC-34-10-10-20-00018963.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
When entering in the following area, the ADIRUs will trigger the message “SELECT TRUE REF” on
ND requesting to change north reference:
‐ North of 73 ° North, between 90 ° West and 120 ° West (magnetic polar region), and
‐ North of 82 ° North, and
‐ South of 60 ° South.
When the NORTH REF pb-sw is set to TRUE, the ADIRUs replace magnetic heading by true
heading on EFIS and DDRMI  . In addition, the GRID track appears on ND.
(1) NORTH REF pb-sw

TRUE (in) : Pressing this pushbutton-switch selects the true heading for instrument
display.
TRUE light comes on blue.
MAG (out) : Magnetic heading is selected.
MEMO DISPLAY
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-34-10-10-20-A-00017200.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
ADIRS SWTG : This memo appears in green when either the AIR DATA or the ATT HDG
selector is not in the NORM position.
Ident.: DSC-34-10-10-20-A-00017196.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
IR XXX IN ATT ALIGN : This memo appears in green during an IR alignment.

Ident.: DSC-34-10-10-20-A-00017197.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
IRS IN ALIGN : This memo appears in amber if engines are running.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-10-20 P 3/4

FCOM C to D → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
IRS IN ALIGN : This memo flashes in green if IRS alignment is faulty.

Ident.: DSC-34-10-10-20-A-00017195.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
IRS IN ALIGN XXX : This memo appears in green during an IR alignment.

Ident.: DSC-34-10-10-20-A-00017198.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
TRUE NORTH REF : This memo appears in green when the NORTH REF pb-sw is at
TRUE. The message pulses for 10 s in flight phase 1 or 2, or at
slats' extension.
MAXIMUM DIFFERENCES BETWEEN SPEED/MACH INDICATIONS

Ident.: DSC-34-10-10-20-00020923.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
SPEED/MACH COMPARISON BETWEEN

ADR3 and ADR1 or ADR3 Standby Airspeed Indicator
ADR1 and ADR2 (on PFD)
FL SPEED and ADR2 (on PFD) and any ADR 1 or 2 or 3
Mach on
kt Mach kt Mach kt
ISIS  (1)
GND CHECK - 6 kt M 0.008 6 kt M 0.008 6 kt -
FL 50 250 kt 4 kt M 0.010 4 kt M 0.010 7 kt -
FL 100 250 kt 4 kt M 0.009 4 kt M 0.009 7 kt M 0.030
FL 200 300 kt 3 kt M 0.008 3 kt M 0.009 8 kt M 0.031
FL 300 M 0.82 3 kt M 0.009 3 kt M 0.009 8 kt M 0.025
FL 410 M 0.82 4 kt M 0.009 4 kt M 0.009 7 kt M 0.023
(1) Mach values lower than M 0.50 in climb, and M 0.45 in descent, are not displayed on ISIS  .
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-10-20 P 4/4

FCOM ← D to E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GPS - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-34-10-15-10-00018964.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite based radio navigation aid.
Worldwide 24 satellites broadcast accurate navigation data that the aircraft can use for the precise
determination of its position.
The aircraft has two independent GPS receivers. Depending of the aircraft configuration, each
receiver consists:
‐ Of a GPS Sensor Unit (GPSSU), or
‐ Is integrated in the Multi Mode Receiver (MMR). The GPS1 receiver in MMR1, and the GPS2
receiver in MMR2.
The GPSSU or the MMR processes the received data, and transfers them to the ADIRU. Then the
ADIRU performs the GP-IRS hybrid position calculation. The FMGEC uses this hybrid position.
OPERATIONS
GPS information are available on the FMS – GPS Monitor Page. Refer to DSC-22_20-50-10
Pages descriptions.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-15-10 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GPS - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
• During normal operations

The GPS receiver 1 supplies the ADIRU1 and the ADIRU3, and the GPS receiver 2 supplies the
ADIRU2.
• In case of failure of one GPS receiver
All ADIRUs use the operative GPS receiver.
• In case of failure of ADIRUs:
‐ If the ADIRU1 fails, ADIRU3 is supplied by the GPS receiver 1, and ADIRU2 is supplied by
the GPS receiver 2.
‐ If the ADIRU2 fails, the ATT HDG selector has to be set to F/O 3 in order to maintain Side 1
and Side 2 segregation. In this case, the ADIRU3 will be supplied with GPS receiver 2.
‐ If two ADIRUs fail, the remaining ADIRU is supplied by its own side GPS receiver.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-15-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW STANDBY INSTRUMENTS
OPERATING MANUAL
COMPASS
Ident.: DSC-34-10-20-00019087.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
There is a compass located on top of the windshield center post.

The deviation card is located above the compass.
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISIS

Ident.: DSC-34-10-20-00019142.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The ISIS system displays the following information:
‐ Attitude
‐ Airspeed and mach
‐ Altitude
‐ Barometric pressure
‐ LS function
‐ Bugs.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-20 P 1/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) "+"/"-" activation pushbuttons

Two pushbuttons, labelled "+" and "-", are used to adjust the level of brightness.
This brightness of the screen automatically adjusts after power-up tests. This is because of
the photosensitive cell located on the surface of the ISIS system display.
The "+" and "-" pushbuttons then allow this initial brightness to be manually adjusted and
changed.
ARCHITECTURE
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-20 P 2/10

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ATTITUDE
Ident.: DSC-34-10-20-00019144.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Note: When leveling the wings, after performing a small turn of a small bank angle, the displayed
roll altitude may temporarily be incorrect by a few degrees.
(1) Fixed aircraft symbol

The fixed aircraft symbol is in black, and outlined in yellow.
Depending of the aircraft configuration, the center of the fixed aircraft symbol is a point (like on
the illustration above) or "V-bars".
(2) Roll scale
The roll scale is in white.
The markers are at 0 (small yellow triangle), 10, 20, 30, 45, 60 ° of bank.
(3) Roll index
The roll index is in black, and outlined in white. It indicates the bank angle.
(4) Lateral acceleration index
The trapezoidal index moves beneath the roll index. It represents the aircraft's lateral
acceleration.
(5) Pitch scale
The pitch scale is in white. The scale shows markers every 2.5 °, between 30 ° nose up and
30 ° nose down. Beyond 30 °, large red arrowheads (V-shaped) indicate that the attitude has
become excessive, and show the direction to follow in order to reduce it. The minimum pitch
scale displayed is -17.5 ° +15 ° at 0 ° of pitch.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-20 P 3/10

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(6) ATT RST

The attitude indication can be reset by pressing this pushbutton for at least 2 s. The aircraft
must be level during this procedure. During the reset time (approximately 10 s), the “ATT 10s”
message is displayed on the screen. This pushbutton is also used to realign the system, if
excessive aircraft movement is detected during the alignment phase.
AIRSPEED
Ident.: DSC-34-10-20-00019147.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Airspeed scale

A white scale moves in front of a yellow triangle indicating the airspeed. The scale ranges from
5 to 250 kt, with a mark every 5 kt, and from 250 to 520 kt, with a mark every 10 kt.
(2) Mach Number
The Mach number is displayed in green when it goes above 0.5. And it disappears when it
goes below 0.45.
(3) Speed bug
When a speed bug is entered via the BUGS function, the corresponding speed mark is
indicated by a cyan dash.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-20 P 4/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ALTIMETER
Ident.: DSC-34-10-20-00019153.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Altitude indication

The altitude indication is given as a white moving scale, and a green digital readout on a grey
background.
The altitude scale ranges from -2 000 ft to 50 000 ft, every 100 ft, with digital altitude indications
every 500 ft.
For negative altitudes, “NEG” appears in the window in white.
The altitude box changes to cyan, when it also corresponds to a bug value.
Depending of the aircraft configuration, the altitude in meters is displayed above the altitude
scale.
(2) Barometric reference
The barometric reference is displayed in cyan.
The displayed barometric reference is:
‐ The standard barometric reference "STD", or
‐ Depending of the aircraft configuration, the barometric pressure in "hPa" or "hPa / inHg".
(3) Barometric selection knob
This knob enables the selection of a barometric pressure, setting a variation of 10 hPa per
knob rotation.
The standard barometric pressure can be selected by pressing the barometric knob. “STD” is
then displayed, in place of the pressure value.
Pressing the knob again will display the selected barometric pressure.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-20 P 5/10

FCOM E→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(4) Altitude bug

When an altitude bug is entered through the bugs function, the corresponding altitude mark is
indicated by a cyan dash, or by a cyan box when the dash covers the digital indication on the
scale.
LANDING SYSTEM FUNCTION

Ident.: DSC-34-10-20-00019157.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Localizer / scale and index

(2) Glideslope / scale and index
When the LS pb is pressed, the deviation scales are displayed.
When deviation scales are displayed and the LS deviations are valid, the indexes appear.
The LS deviations that are displayed correspond to the LS approach:
‐ Selected on the MCDU, or
‐ Tuned on the RMP.
Note: The LS approach corresponds to either ILS approach, or GLS  approach, or non
precision approach using FLS  .
(3) LS selection pushbutton
Pressing the LS pb will display the LS scales. Pressing the LS pb again will remove the LS
scales.
CAUTION Do not use the ISIS LS for takeoff using the localizer of the opposite runway,
or for a back-course localizer approach. The LOC deviations are given in the
wrong sense.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-20 P 6/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
BUGS FUNCTION
Ident.: DSC-34-10-20-00001083.0001001 / 19 DEC 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) BUGS function selection pushbutton

Pressing the BUGS pushbutton will activate the BUGS function, and display the bug values to
be selected.
(2) SPD BUG and ALT BUG columns
The SPD BUG column gives four speed values (in knots) that can be selected by the crew.
The ALT BUG column gives two altitude values (feet) to be selected by the crew.
(3) BUGS value selection knob
It allows the bug value to be set by rotating the BARO knob. This value cannot be lower than
30 kt for a speed bug, or a negative value for an altitude bug.
Pressing the BARO setting knob, once a bug value box is activated, will deselect the bug value.
The "OFF" label comes on close to the activated box.
The entered values are memorized by the system, when exiting the screen, by pressing the
BUGS pushbutton (1), or after 15 s without any pilot action.
(4) "+"/"-" box activation buttons
Access from one box to another is obtained by pressing the "+" or "-" pushbutton.
When a bug value is entered, access to the next box is obtained by pressing the "-"
pushbutton. The box becomes active and flashes.
The "+" pushbutton can be used to return to a previous box.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-20 P 7/10

FCOM G→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: Use of the ISIS bugs function is not recommended because, in the event that both
PFDs are lost in flight, when the ISIS bugs were previously set for takeoff, then for the
approach, the bugs would remain at the takeoff characteristic speed settings.
FLAGS
Ident.: DSC-34-10-20-00001086.0012001 / 09 APR 15
Applicable to: ALL
(1) ATT flag (red)

When attitude data is lost, the red ATT flag appears.
(2) SPD flag (red)
When airspeed data is lost, the red SPD flag appears.
(3) M flag (red)
When Mach number is lost, the red M flag appears.
(4) ALT flag (red)
When altitude data is lost, the red ALT flag appears.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-20 P 8/10

FCOM ← G to H → 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(5) G/S flag (red)

When glideslope information is lost, the red G/S flag appears.
(6) LOC flag (red)
When localizer data is lost, the red LOC flag appears.
(7) ATT: RST (yellow)
The "ATT": RST flag appears:
‐ When excessive aircraft movement is detected during the alignment phase, or
‐ After 350 h of continuous electrical supply, or
‐ When the “WAIT ATT” flag is displayed during more than 10 s.
In the above cases, press the ATT RST pb to reset/realign and recover the attitude indication.
(8) MAINT flag (white)
Maintenance required. This “MAINT flag” does not affect ISIS operation.
Displayed only on ground phase (speed < 60 kt).
(9) OUT OF ORDER (white)
When an internal failure of the ISIS indicator occurs, the “OUT OF ORDER” message appears,
accompanied by a fault code.
(10) WAIT ATT flag (yellow)
If the ISIS looses attitude data, its entire sphere is cleared to display the: “WAIT ATT” flag.
‐ If the “WAIT ATT” flag is displayed during less than 10 s, a normal operation is recovered.
‐ If attitude data are lost for more than 10 s, the “WAIT ATT” flag is then replaced by the “ATT:
RST” flag.
(11) ATT 10 s flag (yellow)
This count down flag appears, when the flight crew press the ATT RST pb, in order to indicate
that the attitude reset function is in progress.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-20 P 9/10

FCOM ←H 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-20 P 10/10

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW RADIO NAV - TUNING
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-34-10-30-10-00019185.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Three modes of tuning are available:

1. Automatic Tuning
This is the basic means for tuning navaids.
In normal operation, the FMGEC tunes navaids automatically, with each FMGEC controlling its
own receivers.
If one FMGEC fails, the remaining FMGEC controls both sides receivers, after activation of the FM
selector switch.
2. Manual Tuning
The flight crew can use the MCDU to override the automatic tuning of navaids by FMGEC in order
to select a specific navaid for visual display.
This does not affect the automatic function of the FMGEC.
Any entry on one MCDU is sent to both FMGEC in dual mode, or the remaining FMGEC in single
mode.
3. Back Up Tuning
If both FMGECs fail, the flight crew can use the RMPs (Radio Management Panels 1 and 2) on the
pedestal for back up tuning.
The CAPT RMP controls VOR1 and ADF1  .
The F/O RMP controls VOR2 and ADF2  .
Either RMP controls both ILS/GLS  , provided "STBY NAV" is selected on RMP1 and RMP2.
RMP3  is not used for navaids tuning.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-30-10 P 1/4

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ARCHITECTURE
Ident.: DSC-34-10-30-10-00019189.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
NORMAL OPERATION
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-30-10 P 2/4

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FMGEC 1 FAILURE
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-30-10 P 3/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
BACK UP TUNING
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-30-10 P 4/4

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW RADIO NAV - NAVAIDS
OPERATING MANUAL
VOR
Ident.: DSC-34-10-30-20-00019194.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has two VOR receivers.

‐ The Navigation Displays (NDs) display VOR1 and VOR2 information, in accordance with the
position of the ADF  /VOR selectors on the EFIS control panel (Refer to DSC-31-50 EFIS
Control Panel).
‐ The DDRMI  also displays VOR1 and VOR2 bearings, if the heading signal is valid.
ILS / GLS 
Ident.: DSC-34-10-30-20-00019195.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has two ILS/GLS  receivers.

Note: When the aircraft is equipped with MMRs, ILS and GLS  receivers are in the MMRs
(ILS1/GLS 1  in the MMR1 and the ILS2/GLS 2  in the MMR2)
‐ PFD1 and ND2 display ILS1/GLS 1  information.
‐ PFD2 and ND1 display ILS2/GLS 2  information.
‐ The PDF display the ILS/GLS  information if the flight crew press the LS pb or ILS pb
(depending of the aircraft configuration) on the EFIS control panel (Refer to DSC-31-50 EFIS
Control Panel).
‐ The NDs display ILS/GLS  information if the flight crew selects the ROSE LS mode or the
ROSE ILS mode (depending of the aircraft configuration) on the EFIS control panel (Refer to
DSC-31-50 EFIS Control Panel).
ADF 
Ident.: DSC-34-10-30-20-00019207.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft may be fitted with 1 ADF  or 2 ADF  .

The NDs display ADF  information, depending on the position of the ADF/VOR selectors on the
EFIS control panel. Refer to DSC-31-45 Rose Modes.
The DDRMI  also displays ADF1  and ADF2  bearings, depending on the position of the
ADF/VOR selector on the DDRMI  .
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-30-20 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW RADIO NAV - NAVAIDS
OPERATING MANUAL
DME
Ident.: DSC-34-10-30-20-00019211.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has two DMEs.

The frequency that is automatically set on the DME corresponds to the frequency/channel that is set
on the VOR, or ILS, or GLS  .
One DME receiver is capable to tune simultaneously several frequencies from different DME ground
stations.
Some frequencies are tuned for FMS radio position computation in VOR/DME mode and in
DME/DME mode. Other frequencies are tuned for VOR/DME display and ILS/DME display.
The NDs and the DDRMI  can display DME information associated with VOR,
The PFDs can display DME information associated with ILS/GLS  Refer to DSC-31-40 Trajectory
Deviation - ILS Approach (Cont'd)
MARKER BEACON
Ident.: DSC-34-10-30-20-00019212.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
One marker beacon system is included in VOR receiver 1.

The PFD displays the outer, middle and inner marker signals (Refer to DSC-31-40 Trajectory
Deviation - ILS Approach (Cont'd)).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-30-20 P 2/2

FCOM D to E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW RADIO NAV - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
DIGITAL DISTANCE AND RADIO MAGNETIC INDICATOR (DDRMI) 

Ident.: DSC-34-10-30-30-00019213.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Compass Card

ADIRU1 normally supplies the signal that positions the compass card.
ADIRU3 supplies this signal when selected by the ATT HDG SWITCHING selector.
Heading reference is in MAG or TRUE as selected by the NORTH REF pb-sw.
(2) Bearing Pointers
Indicate the magnetic bearing to the station received by VOR1 or ADF1  (dashed pointer)
and VOR2 or ADF2  (double pointer).
Note: Depending on the quality of the VOR beacon's signal, and mainly at distances greater
than 25 NM from the station, the processing of the signal, on aircraft equipped with
COLLINS or BENDIX VOR may lead to bearing pointer oscillations.
(3) DME1(2) Counters
Indicates distance in nautical miles to/from DME station.
The counters indicate distances:
‐ in NM when the station is at more than 20 NM
‐ 1/10 th of NM when the station is at less than 20 NM
When the station is at less than 1 NM, 0 is shown.
The DME1 and DME2 displays are blanked or dashed when a fault is detected or data invalid.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-30-30 P 1/6

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(4) VOR/ADF Selector 

‐ VOR1 or ADF1  on the dashed pointer.
‐ VOR2 or ADF2  on the double pointer (if ADF2 is not installed, then ADF1 may be
selected).
The DDRMI has also VOR/ADF flags and HDG flags when the associated information is not available
The indicators display these flags if:
‐ The VOR or ADF receiver fails (associated to the VOR/ADF flag only),
‐ The DDRMI has an internal failure,
‐ The heading signal from ADIRS is not valid,
‐ The power supply fails.
As long as the VOR/ADF flag is shown, and depending of the aircraft configuration, the associated
bearing pointer remains:
‐ At the last valid position, or
‐ Into the horizontal line.
Note: In EMER ELEC configuration, only the VOR1 or ADF1  are available, according to the
position of the VOR1/ADF1 selector.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-30-30 P 2/6

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
RADIO MANAGEMENT PANEL (RMP)

Ident.: DSC-34-10-30-30-00019215.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
(1) ON/OFF sw
The switch controls the power supply to the panel.
(2) NAV key (transparent switchguard)
‐ Pressing this key engages the radio navigation backup mode. It takes control of the VOR,
ILS, GLS  and ADF  receivers away from the FMGEC and gives it to the RMP
Note: Pressing the MLS key has no effect.
‐ The green monitor light comes on
‐ Pressing the NAV key a second time returns control of the navigation radios to the FMGEC.
Note: The flight crew must select this backup tuning mode on both RMP1 and RMP2 if both
FMGECs or both MCDUs fail. In the emergency electrical configuration, only RMP1
receives power.
Pressing the NAV key on RMP 3  has no effect.
In the NAV backup mode, the flight crew can select radio communication systems as it would in
the normal mode.
Setting one RMP to NAV backup mode removes navaids tuning from both FMGECs.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-30-30 P 3/6

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
When the flight crew uses an RMP to tune an ILS/DME or GLS  /DME, the PFDs do not
display the DME distance.
(3) STBY NAV keys
When the NAV key is on and the flight crew presses one of these STBY NAV keys, the ACTIVE
window displays the frequency/channel to which that receiver is tuned. The green monitor light
on the selected key comes on, and the one on the previously selected STBY NAV or COM key
goes out.
(4) Frequency/channel selector knob
Two concentric knobs allow the flight crew to preselect frequencies/channel for communication
radios and stand-by navigation systems and select courses for VOR, ILS, GLS  .
The desired frequency, channel or course is set in the STBY/CRS window.
The outer and the inner knobs set a frequency/channel: the outer knob controls the most
significant digits, the inner knob controls the least significant digits. A rate multiplier speeds up
the tuning when the knob is rotated rapidly.
The inner knob only sets a course.
(5) Transfer key
The flight crew presses this key to interchange ACTIVE and STBY frequencies/channels. This
action tunes the selected receiver to the new ACTIVE frequency/channel.
(6) STBY/CRS window
The flight crew can change the displayed frequency/channel by rotating the tuning knob.
The frequency/channel displayed in this window becomes the active frequency/channel when
the flight crew presses the Transfer Key.
If this window displays a course, then the ACTIVE window displays the associated
frequency/channel.
Note: If the STBY/CRS window is displaying a course, then pressing the transfer key
displays the active frequency/channel in both windows.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-30-30 P 4/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(7) ACTIVE window

This window displays the frequency/channel of the selected navaid, which is identified by a
green monitor light on the selection key.
(8) LOAD FUNCTION 
The flight crew can load the VHF frequency from the CPDLC CONTACT/MONITOR messages
to the STBY/CRS window.
(9) BFO key 
If the ADF  is selected, pressing this key activates the BFO (Beat Frequency Oscillator).
For most ADF, with BFO activated, the audio identification is heard. However there are some
ADF where the BFO must be deactivated in order to hear the audio identification.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-30-30 P 5/6

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-30-30 P 6/6

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW RADIO ALTIMETER - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-34-10-40-10-00019239.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has two radio altimeter (RA).

CAPT PFD displays the RA1 height, and the F/O PFD displays the RA2 height.
If one RA fails, both PFDs display the height from the remaining RA.
For indication on the PFD, Refer to DSC-31-40 Altitude - Metric Altitude Indications (Cont'd).
AUTOMATIC CALLOUT
Ident.: DSC-34-10-40-10-00019240.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The FWC generates a synthetic voice for radio height announcement below 2 500 ft. These
announcements come through the cockpit loudspeakers, even if the speakers are turned off.
PREDETERMINED CALLOUT
The altitude callout uses the following predetermined threshold:
height (ft) callout
TWO THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED
2 500
or TWENTY FIVE HUNDRED
2 000 TWO THOUSAND
1 000 ONE THOUSAND
500 FIVE HUNDRED
400 FOUR HUNDRED
300 THREE HUNDRED
200 TWO HUNDRED
100 ONE HUNDRED
80 EIGHTY
70 SEVENTY
60 SIXTY
50 FIFTY
40 FORTY
30 THIRTY
20 TWENTY
10 TEN
5 FIVE
DH (or MDA/MDH) +100 HUNDRED ABOVE
DH (or MDA/MDH) MINIMUM
Note: The reference altitude for callouts is the radio height for precision approaches (DH) and
baro altitude (MDA/MDH) for non precision approaches.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-40-10 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW RADIO ALTIMETER - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
Pin programming enables Operators to select the required callouts.

If the aircraft remains at a height that is in the detection zone for a height callout, the
corresponding message is repeated at regular intervals.
INTERMEDIATE CALLOUT
If the time between two consecutive predetermined callouts exceeds a certain threshold, the
present height is repeated at regular intervals.
The threshold is:
‐ 11 s above 50 ft, or
‐ 4 s below 50 ft
The repeating interval is 4 s.
RETARD ANNOUNCEMENT
The loudspeaker announces RETARD:
‐ at 20 ft, or
‐ at 10 ft if the autothrust is active and one autopilot is in LAND mode.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-10-40-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-34-20-10 ATC
Principle....................................................................................................................................................................A
ADS-B OUT............................................................................................................................................................. B

Control Panel........................................................................................................................................................... A
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-34-20-30 Weather Radar

Description............................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-34-20-30-20 Predictive Windshear System

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Windshear Alerts during Takeoff Roll, up to 100 Knots..........................................................................................B
Windshear Alerts above 50 Feet............................................................................................................................ C
Windshear Alerts Inhibition......................................................................................................................................D

Control Panel........................................................................................................................................................... A
Weather Radar indication on ND............................................................................................................................ B
PWS  indication on PFD and ND................................................................................................................... C
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... D
DSC-34-20-40 GPWS
Overview.................................................................................................................................................................. A
Principle....................................................................................................................................................................B
DSC-34-20-40-20 GPWS Basic Modes

Mode 1 : Excessive Rate of Descent..................................................................................................................... A
Mode 2 : Excessive Terrain Closure Rate.............................................................................................................. B
Mode 3 : Altitude Loss After Takeoff...................................................................................................................... C
Mode 4 : Unsafe Terrain Clearance when Not in Landing Configuration............................................................... D
Mode 5 : Descent Below Glideslope.......................................................................................................................E
DSC-34-20-40-30 Predictive GPWS Functions

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Alerts........................................................................................................................................................................ B
Alert Envelopes........................................................................................................................................................C
Inhibition Logic of the Predictive GPWS Functions in Approach............................................................................ D

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
Main Instruments Panel...........................................................................................................................................B
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... C
DSC-34-20-60 TCAS
Overview.................................................................................................................................................................. A
Principle....................................................................................................................................................................B
Main Components....................................................................................................................................................C
Intruder Detection Categories................................................................................................................................. D
TCAS Modes............................................................................................................................................................E
Advisory Inhibition.................................................................................................................................................... F

ATC/TCAS Panel..................................................................................................................................................... A
ND Indications..........................................................................................................................................................B
TCAS Messages......................................................................................................................................................C
PFD Indications....................................................................................................................................................... D
Aural Messages....................................................................................................................................................... E
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... F

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ATC - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
PRINCIPLE
Ident.: DSC-34-20-10-10-00020405.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has two ATC transponders (XPDR) which are controlled by a control panel (ATC/TCAS)
on the center pedestal.
Only the selected XPDR operates.
The XPDR automatically responds to requests:
‐ From the ATC, to ensure effective air traffic surveillance
‐ From another aircraft that have a TCAS, to ensure that traffic alerts are triggered.
The XPDR is capable of elementary surveillance (ELS) and enhanced surveillance (EHS). It
transmits the following data to the ATC center:
‐ The aircraft 24 bit address, the aircraft altitude, the flight number, the RA report
‐ The indicated airspeed, the Mach number, and the barometric vertical speed that are all supplied
by the ADRs
‐ The magnetic heading, the roll angle, the ground speed, the track angle, the track angle rate, and
the inertial vertical speed, that are all supplied by the IRs
‐ The selected altitude and barometric reference settings supplied by the FCUs.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-10-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ATC - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
ADS-B OUT
Ident.: DSC-34-20-10-10-00020406.0002001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
With the ADS-B OUT capability, the Mode S transponders automatically and continuously transmit
surveillance data, without preliminary interrogation, to:
‐ The ATC ground station
‐ Aircraft capable of ADS-B IN function.
The ADS-B OUT surveillance data that are automatically and continuously transmitted, include the
following:
‐ The latitude and longitude, the Horizontal Integrity Limit (HIL), the difference between barometric
altitude and geometric altitude, the ground speed, all supplied by GPS
‐ The barometric altitude supplied by ADIRS
‐ The track, the vertical speed, all supplied by the IRs
‐ The flight number (registered on the ATC flight plan and entered in the FMS during cockpit
preparation) supplied by the FMS
‐ The emergency situation indicator
‐ The selected altitude and heading, the barometric pressure setting (QNH/QFE) from FCU.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-10-10 P 2/2

FCOM B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ATC - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
CONTROL PANEL
Ident.: DSC-34-20-10-20-00020407.0005001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
(1) XPDR Selector

This switch selects XPDR 1 or 2.
(2) Mode Selector
STBY : Both XPDR are electrically supplied but not operating.
ON : Selected XPDR operates.
AUTO : On ground : The selected XPDR only operates in the selective aircraft
interrogation mode of Mode S.
AUTO : In flight : The selected XPDR operates.
(3) ALT RPTG Switch
ON : The XPDR sends barometric standard altitude data.
OFF : No altitude data transmission. If the TCAS is installed, the upper ECAM
displays "TCAS STBY" in green.
(4) IDENT Switch
The flight crew presses this button to send the aircraft identification signal.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-10-20 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ATC - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
(5) Code Display

The window displays the selected code.
(6) Keypad
The flight crew uses the keypad to set the code assigned by ATC.
(7) CLR Key
The flight crew uses this key to clear the code display.
Note: As long as the four figures of the new code are not entirely written, the previous code
remains.
(8) ATC FAIL Light
This light comes on if the selected XPDR fails.
MEMO DISPLAY
Ident.: DSC-34-20-10-20-00017201.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
TCAS STBY : This memo appears in amber in flight phase 6 when the ATC/XPDR used by the
TCAS is faulty.
TCAS STBY : This memo appears in green in flight phases 2 and 7 when the ATC/XPDR used
by the TCAS is faulty.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-10-20 P 2/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WEATHER RADAR - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-34-20-30-10-00014718.0004001 / 14 OCT 15
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft is fitted with two Multiscan weather radar systems with a Predictive WindShear (PWS)
function  and a weather hazard prediction function  .
The flight crew can display weather data on the CAPT and/or F/O NDs in either ARC or ROSE mode.
The flight crew can adjust the brightness of the weather image on the ND thanks the outer knob of
the ND Brightness Control knob (Refer to DSC-31-50 EFIS DMC Panel).
Note: A low brightness setting of the weather display may reduce the visibility of weather data,
and therefore reduce crew awareness of the weather situation.
The flight crew can use the radar in the following modes:
‐ Multiscan Automatic mode: MULTISCAN sw set to AUTO (recommended), or
‐ Manual mode: MULTISCAN sw set to MAN.
When in Multiscan Automatic mode:
‐ The radar alternatively scans at two antenna tilt settings. The weather radar image that is
displayed is the result of the stored and combined information from each beam.
‐ When the gain selector is set to the Calibrated position (CAL), the radar automatically adjusts the
gain based on various parameters (aircraft altitude, geographical area, season, time of the day) to
obtain the best weather display.
‐ To prevent unnecessary clutter display, the “Quiet and Dark cockpit” philosophy removes the
weather that:
‐ is not on the aircraft flight path
‐ is not a threat to the aircraft (post convective cell).
‐ The Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) function removes the ground returns from the ND.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-30-10 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WEATHER RADAR - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
Multiscan Principle
When in Manual mode:

‐ The flight crew can adjust manually the antenna tilt settings, and can adjust gain either
automatically or manually using knobs located on the radar control panel
‐ The GCS function is not available
‐ When the gain selector is set to CAL, there is no automatic gain adjustment based on altitude,
geographical area, season and time of the day.
As a consequence, when the flight crew switches from the Multiscan Automatic mode with CAL gain
to the Manual mode with CAL gain, the weather displayed on the ND may be significantly different.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-30-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WEATHER RADAR - PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-34-20-30-20-00004757.0003001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The weather radar has a Predictive WindShear System (PWS) that operates when the PWS sw is in
the AUTO position, and the aircraft radio height is below 2 300 ft, and
‐ Weather radar is ON (Radar sw on position 1 or 2), or
‐ Weather radar is OFF, and
‐ At least one engine is running, and
‐ Aircraft ground speed is greater than 30 kt, or
‐ Aircraft longitudinal acceleration is above a given threshold during at least 0.5 s
Note: When the selected weather radar fails, the flight crew can recover the PWS function by
selecting the operative system on the Radar sw of the radar control panel.
The system scans the airspace for windshear within a range of 5 NM ahead of the aircraft. When the
system detects windshear, a windshear symbol appears on the ND (Refer to DSC-34-20-30-30 PWS
indication on PFD and ND).
Predictive windshear warnings and cautions are associated to an aural alert and to a red (warning)
or amber (caution) "W/S AHEAD" message on the PFD, whereas windshear advisories are only
displayed on the ND (Refer to DSC-34-20-30-30 PWS indication on PFD and ND) without message
on the PFD.
ND (Refer to
DSC-34-20-30-30
Alert Level Aural Warning PFD
PWS indication
on PFD and ND)
«GO AROUND
Warning (Approach) W/S AHEAD (red) Windshear icon
WINDSHEAR AHEAD»
Warning (Takeoff) «WINDSHEAR AHEAD» (twice) W/S AHEAD (red) Windshear icon
Caution «MONITOR RADAR DISPLAY» W/S AHEAD (amber) Windshear icon
Advisory Nil Nil Windshear icon
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-30-20 P 1/4

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
WINDSHEAR ALERTS DURING TAKEOFF ROLL, UP TO 100 KNOTS

Ident.: DSC-34-20-30-20-00004758.0001001 / 12 APR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Windshear Alerts during takeoff, up to 100 knots
During the takeoff roll, up to 100 kt, both warnings and cautions are available within a range of 3 NM.
Note: This is also applicable during taxi when weather radar is set to ON.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-30-20 P 2/4

FCOM B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
WINDSHEAR ALERTS ABOVE 50 FEET

Ident.: DSC-34-20-30-20-00004759.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Windshear Alerts above 50 feet
During final approach, the visual and aural warning alerts are downgraded to caution alerts between
370 ft AGL and 50 ft AGL, and range between 1.5 NM and 0.5 NM.
WINDSHEAR ALERTS INHIBITION

Ident.: DSC-34-20-30-20-00004760.0001001 / 14 OCT 15
Applicable to: ALL
At takeoff, alerts are inhibited above 100 kt and up to 50 ft.

During landing, alerts are inhibited below 50 ft.
The aural alerts of the Predictive WindShear System (PWS):
‐ Have priority over TCAS, GPWS and other FWC aural warnings
‐ Are inhibited by reactive windshear detection and aural messages of stall warnings.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-30-20 P 3/4

FCOM C to D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-30-20 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WEATHER RADAR - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
CONTROL PANEL
Ident.: DSC-34-20-30-30-00014713.0008001 / 14 OCT 15
Applicable to: ALL
Control Panel
(1) Radar sw
This switch sets one radar to ON or turns both radars to OFF.
(2) GAIN knob
This knob adjusts the sensitivity of the radar.
CAL is the normal position of the knob
‐ When in Multiscan Automatic mode and gain set to CAL, the radar automatically adjusts the
gain according to various parameters (aircraft altitude, geographical area, season, time of
the day) to obtain the best weather display.
‐ When in Manual mode and gain set to CAL, the radar adjusts the gain to a calibrated setting.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-30-30 P 1/6

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(3) Display Mode selector

WX : Weather mode:
Colors indicate the intensity of precipitation (black for the lowest intensity, green,
amber and red indicate progressively higher intensity).
WX+T : Weather and Turbulence mode:
The ND indicates precipitation and turbulence areas. Turbulence areas are
displayed in magenta (within 40 NM).
TURB : Turbulence mode:
 The ND only displays turbulence areas. Turbulence areas are displayed in
magenta (within 40 NM).
WX+T : Weather, Turbulence and Hazard mode (recommended position) :
+HZD The ND indicates precipitation, turbulence areas in magenta (within 40 NM)
 and hazard prediction risk areas (Refer to DSC-34-20-30-30 Weather Hazard
Prediction Function Indication on ND).
Hazard prediction function is only available when the MULTISCAN sw is set to
AUTO.
Note: When MULTISCAN sw is set to MAN, WX+T+HZD mode is equivalent
to WX+T mode.
MAP : Map mode:

The radar operates in ground mapping mode: black indicates water, green
indicates the ground, and amber indicates cities and mountains.
(4) TILT knob
This knob adjusts the antenna tilt when MULTISCAN sw is set to MAN.
Zero indicates the horizon reference, as provided by the IRS.
(5) MULTISCAN sw
AUTO : Activates Multiscan mode.
Multiscan controls the tilt automatically and combines two scans done at different
tilt angles to optimize weather detection and minimize ground clutter.
MAN : When set to MAN, the crew can manually adjust the tilt by using the TILT knob.
(6) GCS sw
The Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) switch is spring-loaded to the AUTO position.
AUTO : ‐ If MULTISCAN sw is set to AUTO, the radar is in normal use. Ground clutter is
not displayed on the screen
‐ If MULTISCAN sw is set to MAN, the GCS sw has no utility. Ground clutter is
displayed on the screen.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-30-30 P 2/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
OFF : Ground clutter is displayed on the screen.

(7) PWS sw 
AUTO : Activates the Predictive WindShear function in accordance with activation
conditions (Refer to DSC-34-20-30-20 General).
OFF : The Predictive WindShear function is off.
WEATHER RADAR INDICATION ON ND

Ident.: DSC-34-20-30-30-00000745.0006001 / 14 OCT 15
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Weather Radar Picture

‐ When the radar is operating, and when the ND is not in PLAN mode, the ND displays the
weather radar picture.
‐ The weather echoes appear in different colors, depending on the precipitation rates (black,
green, yellow, red or magenta for turbulence).
‐ The selected ND range will determine how often the image is refreshed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-30-30 P 3/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) Tilt Angle

‐ The multiscan function of the weather radar alternatively scans at low and high beam, and
automatically sets the tilt of these beams to optimize the weather radar detection. The
displayed weather radar picture is the result of the storing and merging of the information
from each beam.
‐ The value of the tilt angle is in degrees, and quarters of a degree. It appears in the lower
right corner of the screen:
• In green, when the MULTISCAN sw is set to AUTO. This value represents the average of
the lower and the upper beam tilts.
• In blue, next to the blue “MAN” indication, when the flight crew sets the MULTISCAN sw to
MAN.
The tilt angle is the angle between the horizon and the radar beam axis.
‐ When the multiscan function is lost, the tilt value is dashed and the “NO AUTO TILT”
message appears in amber on the ND, until the flight crew sets MULTISCAN sw to MAN.
(3) Gain Mode
‐ ”MAN GAIN” appears in white, when the flight crew selects the manual gain mode.
(4) Failure Messages
The ND lists the detected failures.
If the message is in “red”, the ND does not display a radar image.
If the message is in “amber”, the image is not affected.
NO WXR (red) : Radar System failure.
WXR RT (red) : Radar transceiver failure.
WXR ANT (red) : Radar antenna failure.
WXR CTL (red) : Radar control unit failure.
WXR RNG (red) : Range error.
WXR DU (red) : Overheating of the display unit.
WXR WEAK (amber) : Calibration failure.
WXR ATT (amber) : Attitude control failure.
WXR STAB (amber) : Antenna stabilization failure.
PRED W/S (amber) : PWS function  failure.
NO AUTO TILT : Automatic tilt adjustment failure.
(amber)
WXR TEST (amber) : Radar System test.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-30-30 P 4/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(5) PAC alert

When the flight crew sets the display mode selector to WX or WX+T, or WX+T+HZD  and
sets the gain to CAL, and when the aircraft is within 80 NM of a storm cell, the Path Attenuation
Compensation (PAC) alert is available.
The PAC alert displays a yellow arc on the outermost scale of the ND, when an intervening
rainfall creates an attenuated area behind a storm cell (also called a radar shadow or
attenuation effect).
Note: The PAC alert is only available when the MULTISCAN sw is in the AUTO position.
PWS  INDICATION ON PFD AND ND

Ident.: DSC-34-20-30-30-00020809.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
(1) W/S AHEAD message on the PFD

This message is displayed, when the Predictive WindShear system detects windshear ahead of
the aircraft..
The message is in amber or red, depending on the level of the alert.Refer to DSC-34-20-30-20
General.
(2) Predictive WindShear area indication
A red and black symbol and two yellow radial lines indicate the predicted windshear area.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-30-30 P 5/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Windshear indication is available in ARC and ROSE ND modes.

When the radar detects a windshear event and the ND range is set above 10 NM, a W/S SET
RNG 10 NM (Windshear, set range to 10 NM) message appears. This message requests the
flight crew to adjust the range on the corresponding ND.
Depending on the windshear alert level, ND indication may be associated with an aural
message and a PFD message. Refer to DSC-34-20-30-20 General.
(3) PWS SCAN message on the ND
If only the PWS detection is active, the ND displays a PWS SCAN message when the PWS is
active. In this mode, when the radar detects a windshear event, a windshear symbol and the
weather returns appear automatically on the ND.
MEMO DISPLAY
Ident.: DSC-34-20-30-30-00017202.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The "PRED W/S OFF" message appears when the windshear is set to OFF on the weather radar
panel.
PRED W/S OFF : This memo appears in green during flight phases 2 and 6.
PRED W/S OFF : This memo appears in amber when:
‐ The aircraft is in flight phases 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, and 9.
‐ The T.O. CONFIG pb is pressed during flight phase 2.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-30-30 P 6/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GPWS - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERVIEW
Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-10-00021038.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The purpose of the Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS) is to warn the flight crew of
potentially hazardous situations, such as a collision with terrain. It detects terrain collision threats and
triggers applicable aural and visual indications.
The GPWS includes:
‐ Five basic modes active up to radio height of 2 500 ft:
• Excessive rate of descent (Mode 1)
• Excessive terrain closure rate (Mode 2)
• Altitude loss after takeoff or go-around (Mode 3)
• Terrain clearance not sufficient, if not in landing configuration (Mode 4)
• Excessive descent below the glide slope (Mode 5).
‐ A predictive GPWS  function, based on a GPWS database, to display terrain information. It
can be provided:
• By Honeywell through Enhanced GPWS (EGPWS)
• By ACSS as Ground Collision Avoidance System (GCAS), through T2CAS or T3CAS.
The predictive GPWS is composed of:
• Mandatory functions such as the Forward Looking Terrain Alerting function
• Optional functions such as the obstacle database.
Note: The terrain data are displayed on the ND and the brightness is controlled via the weather
radar brightness control knob. If the weather radar brightness was set to low (due to bad
weather) and a terrain alert occurs, then the brightness of the terrain display will also be
low.
PRINCIPLE
Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-10-00021039.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The GPWS computes the geometric altitude of the aircraft by using:

‐ Pressure altitude
‐ Radio-altitude
‐ Temperature
‐ Barometric references
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-10 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GPWS - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ GPS altitude for predictive GPWS 

‐ Data from the GPWS database for predictive GPWS  .
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GPWS - GPWS BASIC MODES
OPERATING MANUAL
MODE 1 : EXCESSIVE RATE OF DESCENT

Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-20-00014903.0004001 / 19 MAY 14
Applicable to: ALL
Mode 1 triggers aural and visual alerts about excessive rates of descent, based on the radio height,
and the rate of descent of the aircraft.
Mode 1 is active for all phases of the flight.
CAUTION WARNING
"PULL UP"
AURAL ALERT "SINK RATE, SINK RATE"
(repeated as long as MODE 1 is triggered)
The GPWS amber The PULL UP red

VISUAL ALERT lights come on lights come on
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-20 P 1/6

FCOM A 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MODE 2 : EXCESSIVE TERRAIN CLOSURE RATE

Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-20-00014904.0004001 / 13 JAN 14
Applicable to: ALL
Mode 2 triggers aural and visual alerts, based on the landing gear/flaps configuration of the aircraft,
the radio height, and the RA rate of change.
There are two types of Mode 2 alerts, Mode 2A (active during climb, cruise, and initial approach), and
Mode 2B (active during approach and 60 s after takeoff).
Flaps not in Landing position + Landing Gear Up (Mode 2A)
CONFIGURATION
Flaps in landing position + Landing Gear Up (Mode 2B)
CAUTION WARNING
“PULL UP” “TERRAIN”
AURAL ALERT (repeated as long as (repeated as long as MODE
“TERRAIN, TERRAIN”
MODE 2 is triggered in 2 is triggered after leaving
the warning conditions) the warning conditions)
The GPWS The PULL
The PULL UP
VISUAL ALERT amber lights UP red lights
red lights stay on
come on come on
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-20 P 2/6

FCOM B→ 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CONFIGURATION Flaps in landing position + Landing Gear Down (Mode 2B)

CAUTION
AURAL ALERT "TERRAIN"
VISUAL ALERT The PULL UP red lights come on
MODE 3 : ALTITUDE LOSS AFTER TAKEOFF

Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-20-00014905.0004001 / 20 SEP 13
Applicable to: ALL
Mode 3 triggers aural and visual alerts when the altitude significantly decreases after takeoff, and
go-arounds with landing gear or flaps not in landing configuration.
CAUTION
AURAL ALERT "DON'T SINK, DON'T SINK"
VISUAL ALERT The GPWS amber lights come on
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-20 P 3/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MODE 4 : UNSAFE TERRAIN CLEARANCE WHEN NOT IN LANDING CONFIGURATION

Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-20-00014906.0004001 / 20 SEP 13
Applicable to: ALL
There are two types of Mode 4 alerts, Mode 4A and Mode 4B (both active during cruise and
approach).
Mode 4A and Mode 4B trigger aural and visual alerts when terrain clearance is not sufficient based
on the phase of flight, the configuration of the landing gear and the flaps, and the speed.
Flaps not in landing position +
CONFIGURATION Landing gear Up (Mode 4A)
Landing gear down (Mode 4B)
CAUTION
AURAL ALERT "TOO LOW "TOO LOW "TOO LOW
"TOO LOW FLAPS"
TERRAIN" GEAR" TERRAIN"
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-20 P 4/6

FCOM D 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MODE 5 : DESCENT BELOW GLIDESLOPE

Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-20-00014907.0004001 / 20 SEP 13
Applicable to: ALL
Mode 5 triggers aural and visual alerts, when the aircraft descends below the glide slope.
CAUTION
"GLIDESLOPE"
AURAL ALERT (repeated as long as MODE 5 is triggered)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-20 P 5/6

FCOM E 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-20 P 6/6

FCOM 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GPWS - PREDICTIVE GPWS FUNCTIONS
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-30-00005062.0005001 / 13 JAN 14
Applicable to: MSN 1351-1391
The GPWS system:

‐ Correlates the current aircraft position to terrain (and obstacle  ) and airport database
‐ Computes a caution and a warning envelope in front of the aircraft. This includes the determination
of the climb prediction envelope for terrain (and obstacle  ) avoidance, using the modelized
climb capability of the aircraft
‐ Displays the terrain (and obstacle  ) hazards along the projected flight path ahead of the aircraft
‐ Generates alerts described below.
While the predictive GPWS functions are operative, the basic GPWS Mode 2 is inhibited.
If the predictive GPWS functions fail or if there is significant difference between the radio height and
the altitude computed by the T3CAS, the basic GPWS Mode 2 is reactivated.
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-30-00005062.0003001 / 13 JAN 14
The GPWS system:

‐ Correlates the current aircraft position to terrain and airport database.
‐ Computes a caution and a warning envelope in front of the aircraft. This includes the determination
of the climb prediction envelope for terrain avoidance, using the modelized climb capability of the
aircraft.
‐ Displays the terrain hazards along the projected flight path ahead of the aircraft.
‐ Generates alerts described below.
While the predictive GPWS functions are operative, the basic GPWS Mode 2 is inhibited.
If the predictive GPWS functions fail or if there is significant difference between the radio height and
the altitude computed by the T2CAS, the basic GPWS Mode 2 is reactivated.
ALERTS
Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-30-00005061.0004001 / 25 JUL 16
The following table provides the relevant warning and caution alerts:
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-30 P 1/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ND (Refer to
Alert Level Aural alert Local alert
DSC-31-45 General)
‐ Automatic terrain
display.(1)
TERRAIN AHEAD, PULL UP
‐ Solid red areas.
‐ TERR AHEAD (red)
The GPWS/PULL UP pb
Warning light comes on, on each
pilot’s instrument panel.
display.(1)
AVOID TERRAIN ‐ red/black crosshatched
areas.
‐ TERR AHEAD (red)
The GPWS of the
display.(1)
TERRAIN AHEAD GPWS/PULL UP pb
Caution ‐ Solid yellow areas
comes on, on each
‐ TERR AHEAD (Amber)
TOO LOW TERRAIN NIL
(1) When the TERR ON ND pb is set to ON, and ARC or ROSE mode is selected, the ND displays the
terrain memorized in the database, depending on the aircraft’s position. The terrain is displayed
in various densities of green, yellow, red, or magenta, depending on the threat (Refer to DSC-31-45
General, INDICATIONS ON ND). If an alert is generated (caution or warning), and TERR ON ND is
not selected, the terrain is automatically displayed, and the ON light of the TERR ON ND pb comes
on.
In case of low accuracy of the aircraft position computed by the FMGC, the enhanced modes of the
GPWS are automatically deactivated. The 5 GPWS basic modes remain active.
ALERTS
Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-30-00005061.0006001 / 25 JUL 16
The following table provides the relevant warning and caution alerts:
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-30 P 2/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ND (Refer to
Alert Level Aural alert Local alert
DSC-31-45 General)
‐ Automatic terrain display(1)
TERRAIN AHEAD, PULL UP ‐ Solid red areas
‐ TERR AHEAD (red).
‐ Automatic obstacle display(1)

OBSTACLE AHEAD,
‐ Solid red areas
PULL UP  ‐ OBST AHEAD  (red).
The GPWS/PULL UP pb
Warning ‐ Automatic terrain display(1) light comes on, on each
‐ Red/black crosshatched pilot’s instrument panel.
AVOID TERRAIN
areas
‐ TERR AHEAD (red).
‐ Automatic obstacle display(1)

‐ Red/black crosshatched
AVOID OBSTACLE  areas
‐ OBST AHEAD  (red).
‐ Automatic terrain display(1)

TERRAIN AHEAD ‐ Solid yellow areas
‐ TERR AHEAD (Amber).
The GPWS of the GPWS/PULL
Caution ‐ Automatic obstacle display(1)
UP pb comes on, on each
OBSTACLE AHEAD  ‐ Solid yellow areas
‐ OBST AHEAD  (amber).
TOO LOW TERRAIN NIL

(1) When the TERR ON ND pb is set to ON, and ARC or ROSE mode is selected, the ND displays
the terrain and obstacle  memorized in the database, depending on the aircraft’s position.
The terrain and obstacle  are displayed in various densities of green, yellow, red, or magenta,
depending on the threat (Refer to DSC-31-45 General, INDICATIONS ON ND). If an alert is generated
(caution or warning), and TERR ON ND is not selected, the terrain and obstacle  are
automatically displayed, and the ON light of the TERR ON ND pb comes on.
In case of low accuracy of the aircraft position computed by the FMGC, the predictive functions of the
GPWS are automatically deactivated. The 5 GPWS basic modes remain active.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-30 P 3/10

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ALERT ENVELOPES
Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-30-00005060.0004001 / 01 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
VERTICAL ENVELOPE
CAUTION ENVELOPE
The caution envelope extends along the flight path, from a distance of 20 s in front of the
aircraft, to a constructed climb path, at a distance of 132 s in front of the aircraft.
If there is a conflict between the terrain caution envelope and the terrain data stored in the
database, one of the following cautions is triggered:
‐ A “TERRAIN AHEAD” caution, if the terrain conflict is ahead of the aircraft
‐ A “TOO LOW TERRAIN” caution, if the terrain conflict is below the aircraft, instead of ahead
of the aircraft.
WARNING ENVELOPE
The warning envelope extends along the flight path, from a distance of 8 s in front of the aircraft,
to a constructed climb path, at a distance of 120 s in front of the aircraft.
In a Mountainous Approach Area (MAA: Existence of terrain more than 2 000 ft above the
runway and within 6 NM of this runway), this distance is linearly reduced to 30 s , to prevent
nuisance alerts during low altitude maneuvers.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-30 P 4/10

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
If there is a conflict between the terrain caution envelope ahead of the aircraft, and the terrain
data stored in the database, one of the following warnings is triggered:
• A “TERRAIN AHEAD-PULL UP” warning, if the aircraft can climb over the terrain
• An “AVOID TERRAIN” warning, if the aircraft cannot climb over the terrain with a sufficient
safety margin.
HORIZONTAL ENVELOPE
During turns, the sensor opens up into turns to determine if there are possible terrain conflicts (up
to 90 °).
RUNWAY CONVERGENCE CRITERIA
When the aircraft enters the approach sector (approximately 2.7 NM or 5 km from the runway
threshold), the system computes runway convergence criteria in order to inhibit the Terrain
Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) predictive alerts.
For more information on the inhibition logic of the T2CAS/T3CAS, Refer to DSC-34-20-40-30
Inhibition Logic of the Predictive GPWS Functions in Approach.
INHIBITION LOGIC OF THE PREDICTIVE GPWS FUNCTIONS IN APPROACH

Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-30-00013497.0003001 / 17 MAR 17
In approach, as the aircraft is flying towards the ground, the runway convergence criteria will inhibit
the Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) predictive functions. Therefore, depending on
the convergence criterion, TAWS alert may not be triggered in the landing tunnel described below,
even close to terrain.
The main runway convergence criteria are the following:
‐ (1) Aircraft flaps/landing gear configuration,
‐ (2) Aircraft horizontal and vertical position from the runway threshold (landing tunnel criterion),
‐ (3) Aircraft track (convergence criterion).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-30 P 5/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LANDING TUNNEL (LATERAL VIEW)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-30 P 6/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LANDING TUNNEL (VIEW FROM ABOVE)
INHIBITION LOGIC OF THE PREDICTIVE GPWS FUNCTIONS IN APPROACH

Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-30-00013497.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
In approach, as the aircraft is flying towards the ground, the runway convergence criteria will inhibit
the Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) predictive functions. Therefore, depending on
the convergence criterion, TAWS alert may not be triggered in the landing tunnel described below,
even close to terrain.
The main runway convergence criteria are the following:
‐ (1) Aircraft flaps/landing gear configuration,
‐ (2) Aircraft horizontal and vertical position from the runway threshold (landing tunnel criterion),
‐ (3) Aircraft track (convergence criterion).
The airports stored in the terrain database are split into two categories:
‐ Airport flagged as Terrain Challenging Airport Area (TCAA),
‐ Airport not TCAA flagged.
For TCAA flagged airports, the shape and dimensions of the landing tunnel are tailored to each
TCAA airport while for non TCAA airports the landing tunnel shape and dimensions are described
below.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-30 P 7/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LANDING TUNNEL – LATERAL VIEW (FOR NON TCAA AIRPORT)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-30 P 8/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LANDING TUNNEL – VIEW FROM ABOVE (FOR NON TCAA AIRPORT)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-30 P 9/10

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-30 P 10/10

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GPWS - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-40-00001220.0003001 / 21 NOV 11
Applicable to: ALL
(1) SYS pushbutton

OFF : All basic GPWS alerts (Mode 1 to 5) are inhibited. If OFF is selected, the ECAM
caution NAV GPWS FAULT is displayed.
Note: If ILS 1 fails, only mode 5 is inhibited. Consequently, the FAULT light does not come
on, and the GPWS FAULT warning is not triggered.
FAULT lt : This amber light comes on, along with an ECAM caution, if the GPWS mode 1 to
5 malfunctions.
(2) G/S MODE pushbutton
OFF : Glide slope mode (mode 5) is inhibited.
(3) FLAP MODE pushbutton
OFF : Flap mode ("TOO LOW FLAPS" mode 4) is inhibited.
(To avoid nuisance warning in case of landing with reduced flaps setting).
Moreover if LDG CONF 3 is selected on MCDU the flap mode will be
automatically inhibited when FLAPS 3 position is reached.
(4) TERR pushbutton
OFF : Inhibits the predictive modes of the GPWS.
FAULT light : This amber light comes on, along with an ECAM caution, if the predictive
modes fail. The terrain is not shown on the ND. The basic GPWS mode 1
to mode 5 are still operative, if the SYS pushbutton is not OFF or the SYS
FAULT lights are not illuminated.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-40 P 1/4

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MAIN INSTRUMENTS PANEL

Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-40-00001222.0018001 / 21 NOV 11
Applicable to: ALL
(1) PULL UP pb – GPWS pb

PULL UP : Comes on in red for any GPWS warnings.
It is accompanied by a specific aural warning.
GPWS : Comes on in amber for any GPWS caution. It is accompanied by a
corresponding aural alert.
Note: 1. If the flight crew briefly presses this button, when mode 5 alert is heard, the GPWS
light goes out and the aural alert stops.
2. The GPWS can be tested by pressing this pushbutton (on ground only).
(2) TERR ON ND pb
These pushbuttons are located on either side of the ECAM. Each pushbutton controls the
onside terrain display.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-40 P 2/4

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ON : The terrain is displayed on the ND, if the:

‐ TERR pb is selected ON, and
‐ TERR FAULT light is not on
‐ TERR STBY ECAM memo is not displayed
‐ The FMGES navigation accuracy is high.
The ON light comes on.
OFF : The terrain data is not displayed on the ND.
Note: ‐ If the predictive functions of the GPWS generate a caution or a warning, while the
TERR ON ND is not switched ON, terrain data is automatically displayed on the
NDs and the ON light of the TERR ON ND pb will come on.
‐ To differentiate between the terrain and the weather display, the TERR indication
comes on, instead of the TILT indication, in the lower right corner of the ND.
MEMO DISPLAY
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-40-A-00017204.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
GPWS FLP OFF : This memo appears in green when the GPWS FLAP MODE pb-sw is OFF.
Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-40-A-00017205.0004001 / 21 MAR 16
The "TERR OFF" message appears when the predictive functions of the GPWS are deselected.
TERR OFF : This memo appears in green during flight phases 2 and 6.
TERR OFF : This memo appears in amber when:
‐ The aircraft is in flight phases 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, and 9.
‐ The T.O. CONFIG pb is pressed during flight phase 2.
Ident.: DSC-34-20-40-40-A-00017208.0008001 / 21 MAR 16
TERR STBY : This memo appears in green when any required predictive function input is
missing or considered invalid. The predictive functions are not available, until
the TERR STBY memo disappears. If selected, the terrain data display on the
ND is automatically deselected when the TERR STBY memo is triggered.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-40 P 3/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-40-40 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW TCAS - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERVIEW
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-10-00020237.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS):

‐ Detects and displays surrounding aircraft that have a transponder
‐ Calculates and display possible collision threats
‐ Triggers vertical speed orders, in order to avoid collisions.
PRINCIPLE
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-10-00020239.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The TCAS detection capability is limited to intruders flying within a maximum range of 30 NM on
either sides and approximately 30 NM to 100 NM longitudinally (depending on aircraft configuration
and external conditions), and within a maximum altitude range of 9 900 ft above and below the
aircraft.
TCAS Range
The TCAS obtains data transmitted by the transponders of nearby aircraft, and uses this data to
evaluate possible collision threats.
The TCAS determines:
‐ The bearing of intruders, in relation to the bearing of the aircraft
‐ The distance between the aircraft and intruders, and the rate of separation or closure
‐ The relative altitude of intruders, if intruders have a Mode-C or Mode-S transponder.
The TCAS then calculates the intruder trajectory, the Closest Point of Approach (CPA), and the
estimated time (TAU) before reaching the CPA.
The TAU is the ratio between the distance that separates both aircraft, and the sum of their speed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-10 P 1/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TAU Definition
If the TCAS detects that the trajectory of an intruder may be a collision threat, it triggers:
‐ Audio and visual indicators
‐ Vertical speed orders, to ensure a sufficient trajectory separation and a minimal vertical speed
variation considering all intruders.
MAIN COMPONENTS
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-10-00020240.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The system includes:

‐ A single channel TCAS computer
‐ Two TCAS antennas
‐ Two mode S ATC transponders, one active the other in standby.
These transponders allow:
• Interface between the ATC/TCAS control panel and the TCAS computer
• Communication between the aircraft and intruders equipped with a TCAS system.
‐ An ATC/TCAS control panel.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-10 P 2/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
INTRUDER DETECTION CATEGORIES

Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-10-00020247.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The TCAS divides the space surrounding the aircraft into the following four zones, in order to
evaluate and categorize possible collision threats:
‐ Resolution Advisory (RA)
‐ Traffic Advisory (TA)
‐ Proximate intruders
‐ Other intruders.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-10 P 3/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TCAS Envelopes
Depending on the level of the collision threat, the TCAS triggers audio and visual indicators:
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-10 P 4/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LEVEL INTRUDER POSITION DISPLAYED INFORMATION AND MESSAGE

Other intruders ‐ No collision threat ‐ ND: Intruder position
‐ Any non-proximate, TA, RA
within the surveillance envelope
(lateral range: Closer than
30 NM)
Proximate ‐ No collision threat ‐ ND: Intruder position

‐ Intruder in the vicinity of the A/C
(closer than 6 NM laterally and
±1 200 ft vertically)
Traffic Advisory (TA) ‐ Potential collision threat ‐ ND: Intruder position

‐ TAU is about 40 s ‐ Aural messages
Resolution Advisory ‐ Real collision threat ‐ ND: Intruder position

(RA) ‐ TAU is about 25 s ‐ Aural messages
‐ PFD: Vertical orders
• Maintain actual V/S
(Preventive Advisory)
or
• Modify V/S (Corrective
Advisory)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-10 P 5/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TA/RA thresholds
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-10 P 6/8

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TCAS MODES
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-10-10-00020248.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
TCAS MODES
The TCAS has three different modes of operations that can be selected on the ATC/TCAS control
panel:
‐ The Traffic Advisory/Resolution Advisory (TA/RA) mode
‐ The Traffic Advisory Only (TA ONLY) mode
‐ The standby (STBY) mode.
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-10-10-00020249.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
TRAFFIC ADVISORY/RESOLUTION ADVISORY (TA/RA) MODE

The TA/RA mode is the normal TCAS operating mode that enables:
‐ The ND to display all intruders
‐ The PFD to display the vertical speed orders that indicate the vertical direction that the aircraft
should take, in order to avoid a collision.
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-10-10-00020250.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
TRAFFIC ADVISORY ONLY (TA ONLY) MODE

The TA ONLY mode can be selected:
‐ Manually in case of aircraft degraded performance (engine failure, landing gear extended), or in
specific airports, and for specific procedures (identified by operators) that may provide RA that
are neither wanted nor appropriate (e.g. closely-spaced parallel or converging runways).
‐ Automatically, if TA/RA mode is previously selected and:
• The windshear alert is triggered
• The stall warning is triggered
• GPWS alerts are triggered
• Aircraft is below 1 000 ft AGL.
When the TCAS is operating in TA ONLY mode:

‐ All RAs are inhibited and converted into TAs (TCAS flight guidance mode is inhibited)
‐ TA threshold is set to TAU ≤20 s, irrespective of the aircraft’s altitude
‐ No vertical speed advisories are indicated on the PFDs
‐ “TA ONLY” is displayed on the NDs.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-10 P 7/8

FCOM E→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-10-10-00020251.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
STANDBY MODE
In the standby mode, the advisory generation and surveillance functions are not active. The TCAS
does not trigger any alert. No TCAS information can be displayed on the PFDs and NDs.
ADVISORY INHIBITION
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-10-00020254.0004001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Some advisories are inhibited, depending on the aircraft altitude:

‐ All intruders flying below 380 ft AGL, when the own aircraft altitude is below 1 700 ft AGL.
‐ All RA aural messages below 1 100 ft AGL in climb, and 900 ft AGL in descent. In this case, the
RAs are converted into TAs.
‐ “Descend” RA below 1 100 ft AGL.
‐ “Increase Descent” RA below 1 550 ft AGL.
‐ All TA aural messages below 600 ft AGL in climb and below 400 ft AGL in descent.
‐ The AP/FD TCAS  flight guidance mode is inhibited below 900 ft.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-10 P 8/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW TCAS - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
ATC/TCAS PANEL
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-20-00020255.0003001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Mode sel pb

TA/RA: Normal position.
Proximate and other intruders, TAs and RAs are displayed provided:
‐ The ALT RPTG switch is at ON, and
‐ The ATC mode selector is at ON or AUTO.
TA : To be used in case of aircraft degraded performance (engine failure, landing gear

extended or approach on parallel runways). All RAs are converted into TAs. TAs,
proximate and other intruders are displayed.
STBY : TCAS is on standby.
(2) TRAFFIC sel
The TRAFFIC selection affects only the display of proximate and others.
THRT : Proximate and other intruders are displayed only when a TA or RA is present and
they are within 2 700 ft above and 2 700 ft feet below the aircraft.
ALL : Proximate and other intruders are always displayed, even if no TA or RA is present.
(FULL TIME display) The altitude range is 2 700 ft above the aircraft to 2 700 ft
below.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-20 P 1/8

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ABV : The same as ALL, except that the others intruders are displayed if within 9 900 ft
above the aircraft and 2 700 ft below.
BLW : The same as ALL, except that the other intruders are displayed if within 9 900 ft
below the aircraft and 2 700 ft above.
ND INDICATIONS
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-20-00020256.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The traffic is displayed in all ROSE modes and ARC mode whatever NM range is selected. Only the
eight most threatening intruders are displayed.
(1) Other intruder

Indicated by a white empty diamond.
(2) Proximate intruder
Indicated by a white filled diamond.
(3) TA intruder
Indicated by an amber circle.
Associated with the "TRAFFIC-TRAFFIC" aural message.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-20 P 2/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(4) RA intruder
Indicated by a red square.
Associated with vertical orders displayed on the PFD and aural messages.
Note: If the range of an intruder is not available, the intruder is not displayed.
An intruder may be partially displayed when its range is out of scale.
(5) Relative altitude/Vertical Speed arrow
Relative altitude : indicated in hundred of feet above or below the symbol depending on
the intruder position.
Vertical speed : displayed only if the intruder vertical speed is greater than ± 500 ft/min
arrow
Relative altitude and vertical speed arrow are displayed in the same color as the associated
intruder symbol.
Note: If the altitude of an intruder is not available, neither altitude nor vertical speed
indications are displayed.
(6) No Bearing Intruder
If the bearing of TA or RA intruder is not available the following data is presented in digital form
at the bottom of the ND :
‐ range
‐ relative altitude and vertical speed arrow if available.
Displayed amber or red according to threat level.
(7) Range Ring
A 2.5 NM white range ring is displayed when a 10 or 20 NM range is selected.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-20 P 3/8

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TCAS MESSAGES
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-20-00020257.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Mode and Range Messages

The following messages may appear to get the flight crew’s attention:
TCAS : REDUCE RANGE : Displayed, when a TA or RA is detected, and the ND range
is above 40 NM.
TCAS : CHANGE MODE : Displayed, when a TA or RA is detected, and the ND mode
is PLAN.
It is displayed in amber or red, depending on the advisory level (TA or RA).
(2) TCAS Operation Messages
TCAS : Displayed in case of an internal TCAS failure.
TA ONLY : Displayed in white, when the TA mode is selected automatically, or manually
by the flight crew.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-20 P 4/8

FCOM C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
PFD INDICATIONS
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-20-00020258.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
In case of RA detection, the vertical speed scale becomes rectangular and the PFD presents vertical
orders on the vertical speed scale. The vertical speed scale background is normally grey, but may be
partially replaced by green and/or red areas.
Note: When TCAS information has to be displayed on the vertical speed scale, the grey
background of the air speed and heading scales are removed.
(1) Red area

Indicates the vertical speed where the risk of conflict is high.
(2) Green area
Indicates the recommended vertical speed range. ("FLY TO" sector).
Note: The aircraft can also fly in the grey vertical speed range without the risk of conflict
(preventive RA).
(3) TCAS message
It is displayed when the TCAS cannot deliver RA data, or in case of a TCAS internal failure,
provided that the TCAS is not in standby.
Note: When within the red area, the vertical speed needle and digits change to red, but in a
different pattern, so that it is possible to clearly distinguish them from the background.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-20 P 5/8

FCOM D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AURAL MESSAGES
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-20-00020267.0012001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
TA/RA detection is associated with the following messages:

“TRAFFIC TRAFFIC” : Only in case of TA detection.
"CLIMB CLIMB" : Climb at the vertical speed indicated by the
green area on the PFD.
“CLIMB, CROSSING CLIMB” (twice) : Same as above. Indicates that you will cross
through the intruder altitude.
“INCREASE CLIMB” (twice) : Triggered after the CLIMB message, if the
vertical speed is insufficient to achieve safe
vertical separation.
“DESCEND, DESCEND" : Descend at the vertical speed indicated by the
green area on the PFD.
“DESCEND, CROSSING DESCEND” (twice) : Same as above. Indicates that you will cross
through the intruder altitude.
“INCREASE DESCEND” (twice) : Triggered after the DESCEND message, if the
vertical speed is insufficient to achieve safe
vertical separation.
"LEVEL OFF, LEVEL OFF" : Set the Vertical Speed to 0.
“CLIMB, CLIMB NOW” (twice) : Triggered after the DESCEND message, if the
intruder trajectory has changed.
“DESCEND, DESCEND NOW” (twice) : Triggered after the CLIMB message, if the
intruder trajectory has changed.
“MONITOR VERTICAL SPEED” : Ensure that the vertical speed remains outside
the red area. Triggered only once, in case of
preventive RA.
"MAINTAIN VERTICAL SPEED, MAINTAIN" : Maintain the vertical speed within the green
area and/or out of the red area of the vertical
speed scale.
"MAINTAIN VERTICAL SPEED ... CROSSING : Maintain the vertical speed indicated on the
MAINTAIN" green area of the PFD. Indicates that you will
cross through the intruder altitude.
“CLEAR OF CONFLICT” : The range increases, and separation is
adequate. Return to assigned clearance.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-20 P 6/8

FCOM E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MEMO DISPLAY
Ident.: DSC-34-20-60-20-00020268.0018001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
TCAS STBY : This memo appears in amber in flight phase 6 when:

‐ The flight crew selects TCAS STBY or ATC STBY on the ATC/TCAS panel, or
‐ Both ATCs or both RAs fail, or
‐ The flight crew turns OFF the ALT RPTG sw, or
‐ In the case of a triple ADR failure.
TCAS STBY : This memo appears in green in flight phases 2 and 7 when:
‐ The flight crew selects TCAS STBY or ATC STBY on the ATC/TCAS panel, or
‐ Both ATCs or both RAs fail, or
‐ The flight crew turns OFF the ALT RPTG sw, or
‐ In the case of a triple ADR failure.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-20 P 7/8

FCOM F 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SURVEILLANCE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-34-20-60-20 P 8/8

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-35-10 General
Description............................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-35-20 Fixed Oxygen System for Cockpit

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Operation..................................................................................................................................................................B
Mask Donning..........................................................................................................................................................C
Mask Stowage......................................................................................................................................................... D

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
Lateral Consoles...................................................................................................................................................... B
Crew Oxygen Mask................................................................................................................................................. C
Pressure Regulator..................................................................................................................................................D
ECAM Door/Oxy Page.............................................................................................................................................E
DSC-35-30 Fixed Oxygen System for Cabin

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Operation..................................................................................................................................................................B
Schematic................................................................................................................................................................ C

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
Maintenance Panel.................................................................................................................................................. B
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... C
DSC-35-40 Portable Oxygen System

Flight Crews Portable Oxygen System................................................................................................................... A
Using the Hood........................................................................................................................................................B

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-35-10-00000932.0001001 / 10 JAN 11
Applicable to: ALL
The oxygen system consists of:

‐ A cockpit-fixed oxygen system, which supplies adequate breathing oxygen to the cockpit
occupants in case of depressurization, or emission of smoke and noxious gases.
‐ A cabin-fixed oxygen system, which supplies oxygen for cabin occupants (passengers and cabin
crew) in case of depressurization.
‐ A portable oxygen system, which is provided in both the cockpit and cabin and is to be used:
• As PROTECTION for the crew during on board emergencies.
• For FIRST AID purposes.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FIXED OXYGEN SYSTEM FOR COCKPIT - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-35-20-10-00017595.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The cockpit's fixed oxygen system consists of:

‐ One (or two  ) high-pressure cylinder located in the left-hand lower fuselage
‐ One (or two  ) pressure regulator, connected directly to the cylinder that delivers oxygen, at a
pressure suitable for user
‐ Two overpressure safety systems to vent oxygen overboard, through a safety port, if the pressure
becomes too high
‐ A supply solenoid valve that allows the crew to shut off the distribution system
‐ Four full-face quick-donning masks, stowed in readily-accessible boxes adjacent to the
crewmembers seats (one at each seat)
‐ One or two filling port for external oxygen replenishment  .
OPERATION
Ident.: DSC-35-20-10-00017203.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The crewmember squeezes the red grips to pull the mask out of its box, and this action causes the
mask harness to inflate.
A mask-mounted regulator supplies a mixture of air and oxygen or pure oxygen, or performs
emergency pressure control. With the regulator set to NORMAL, the user breathes a mixture of cabin
air and oxygen up to the cabin altitude at which the regulator supplies 100 % oxygen. The user can
select 100 %, in which case the regulator supplies pure oxygen at all cabin altitudes.
If the situation calls for it, the user can use the emergency overpressure rotating knob and receive
pure oxygen at positive pressure.
The storage box contains a microphone lead, with a quick-disconnect, for connection to the
appropriate mask microphone cable.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-10 P 1/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-10 P 2/6

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MASK DONNING
Ident.: DSC-35-20-10-00000969.0001001 / 09 OCT 12
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-10 P 3/6

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MASK DONNING
Ident.: DSC-35-20-10-00000969.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-10 P 4/6

FCOM ←C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MASK STOWAGE
Ident.: DSC-35-20-10-00000971.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-10 P 5/6

FCOM D→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MASK STOWAGE
Ident.: DSC-35-20-10-00000971.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-10 P 6/6

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FIXED OXYGEN SYSTEM FOR COCKPIT - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-35-20-20-00000972.0001001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) CREW SUPPLY pushbutton

This pushbutton controls the solenoid valve.
On : The valve is open, and supplies low pressure oxygen to the masks (normal position in
flight).
OFF: The valve is closed, and the white light comes on.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-20 P 1/10

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LATERAL CONSOLES
Ident.: DSC-35-20-20-00000977.0001001 / 09 OCT 12
(1) Blinker flowmeter (yellow)

This indicator flashes when oxygen is flowing.
(2) RESET / TEST control slide
The crewmember presses the slide, and pushes it in the direction of the arrow to test: The
operation of the blinker, the regulator supply, the system sealing downstream of the valve, and
the regulator sealing and system operation. Pressing the RESET control slide, after the oxygen
mask has been used, cuts off the oxygen and the mask microphone.
(3) OXY ON flag
As soon as the left flap door opens, the mask is supplied with oxygen and, once it closes (mask
still supplied with oxygen), the “OXY ON“ flag appears.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-20 P 2/10

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LATERAL CONSOLES
Ident.: DSC-35-20-20-00000977.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
(1) Blinker flowmeter (yellow)

This indicator flashes when oxygen is flowing.
(2) RESET / TEST control slide
The crewmember presses the slide, and pushes it in the direction of the arrow to test: The
operation of the blinker, the regulator supply, the system sealing downstream of the valve, and
the regulator sealing and system operation. Pressing the RESET control slide, after the oxygen
mask has been used, cuts off the oxygen and the mask microphone.
(3) OXY ON flag
As soon as the right flap door opens, the mask is supplied with the oxygen and, once it closes
(mask still supplied with oxygen), the “OXY ON“ flag appears.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-20 P 3/10

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CREW OXYGEN MASK

Ident.: DSC-35-20-20-00000981.0001001 / 09 OCT 12
CREW OXYGEN MASK

Ident.: DSC-35-20-20-00000981.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-20 P 4/10

FCOM C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
PRESSURE REGULATOR
Ident.: DSC-35-20-20-00000980.0001001 / 24 NOV 15
(1) Red grips

Squeezing the righthand side grip unlocks the two-flap door and permits the harness to inflate.
(2) EMERGENCY pressure selector
Use of this selector creates an overpressure, which eliminates condensation or fogging of the
mask, and prevents smoke, smell or ashes from entering the mask.
‐ Pressing this knob generates an overpressure for a few seconds.
‐ Turning the knob, in the direction of the arrow, generates a permanent overpressure.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-20 P 5/10

FCOM D→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: 1. Overpressure supply is automatically started, when cabin altitude exceeds 30 000 ft
.
2. Overpressure supply is available, only when the N/ 100 % selector is set on the
100 % position.
(3) N/100 % sel
This two-position button is locked down (100 % position) when the crewmember pulls the mask
out of the stowage. Pushing up the button from underneath releases it, and it pops up to the N
(normal) position. Pressing it again returns it to 100 %.
100 % : The mask delivers 100 % oxygen.
N : The mask provides the flight crew with a mixture of air and oxygen. This mixture
changes with cabin altitude. The higher the cabin altitude, the more oxygen the
mask provides, until the mask supplies 100 % oxygen.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-20 P 6/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-20 P 7/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
PRESSURE REGULATOR
Ident.: DSC-35-20-20-00000980.0002001 / 08 AUG 13
(1) Red inflation button

Pressing the red inflation button, located on the side of the regulator, enables the harness to
inflate.
(2) Mode selector knob
NORM : The mask provides the flight crew with a mixture of air and oxygen. This mixture
changes with cabin altitude. The higher the cabin altitude, the more oxygen the
mask provides, until the mask supplies 100 % oxygen.
100 % : The mask delivers 100 % oxygen.
EMER : This selection creates an overpressure, which eliminates condensation and
prevents smoke from entering the mask.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-20 P 8/10

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ECAM DOOR/OXY PAGE

Ident.: DSC-35-20-20-00000987.0005001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
(1) OXY pressure indication

It is in green, when the pressure is greater than, or equal to 600 PSI.
It pulses in green, when the pressure is less than 600 PSI (the DOOR/OXY page is
automatically displayed).
It is in amber, when the pressure is less than 300 PSI.
On ground, an amber half frame appears when oxygen pressure is less than 1 000 PSI.
In this case, the flight crew must check that the remaining quantity is not below the minimum
(Refer to LIM-OXY Minimum Flight Crew Oxygen Pressure).
(2) REGUL LO PR indication
It is in amber, if oxygen pressure on the low-pressure circuit is low (50 PSI).
(3) CKPT OXY indication
It is normally in white.
It becomes amber, when:
‐ The pressure goes below 300 PSI.
‐ Low oxygen pressure is detected.
‐ The overhead panel's OXYGEN CREW SUPPLY pushbutton is OFF.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-20 P 9/10

FCOM E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-20-20 P 10/10

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FIXED OXYGEN SYSTEM FOR CABIN - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-35-30-10-00017210.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
In the case of depressurization, the fixed oxygen system in the cabin supplies oxygen to the cabin
occupants.
Chemical generators  produce the oxygen. Each generator supplies a group of 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
masks. Oxygen masks are located in containers above the passenger seats, in the lavatories, in
each galley, and at each cabin crew station.
OPERATION
Ident.: DSC-35-30-10-00017596.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Each container has an electrical latching mechanism that automatically opens to allow the masks to
drop, if the cabin pressure altitude exceeds 14 000 ft (+250, -750 ft).
Flight crewmembers can override the automatic control.
When the masks are released, the passenger address system automatically broadcasts prerecorded
instructions  .
Oxygen supply begins, when the passenger pulls the mask towards the passenger seat. The
chemical reaction used for oxygen generation creates heat. Therefore, a smell of burning, smoke,
and an increase in cabin temperature may be associated with the normal operation of the oxygen
generators. The mask receives pure oxygen under positive pressure for about 15 min  , 22 min
 or up to 36 min  , until the generator is exhausted.
A reset is available for the rearming of the system after the masks are restowed.
A manual release tool allows the crew to open the doors manually, in case of electrical failure. It is
stored at the cabin attendants' station.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-30-10 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FIXED OXYGEN SYSTEM FOR CABIN - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
SCHEMATIC
Ident.: DSC-35-30-10-00017597.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-30-10 P 2/2

FCOM C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FIXED OXYGEN SYSTEM FOR CABIN - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-35-30-20-00001001.0001001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) PASSENGER SYS ON lt

This light comes on in white when the control for the oxygen mask doors is activated, and
remains on until the TMR RESET pushbutton is pressed. (Refer to DSC-35-30-20 Maintenance
Panel).
(2) MASK MAN ON pb
The guard keeps this button in the AUTO position.
AUTO : The mask doors open automatically when the cabin altitude exceeds
14 000 ft.
Pressed : The mask doors open.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-30-20 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FIXED OXYGEN SYSTEM FOR CABIN - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
MAINTENANCE PANEL
Ident.: DSC-35-30-20-00001003.0001001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) TMR RESET pb sw

The maintenance crew uses this pushbutton to reset the control circuit, after the system has
operated.
ON : This light comes on in white, and the PASSENGER SYS ON light goes off.
FAULT : This light comes on in white, when the door latch solenoids are energized for
more than 30 s.
MEMO DISPLAY
Ident.: DSC-35-30-20-00018272.0013001 / 21 MAR 16
As soon as cabin oxygen masks fall down in the cabin either automatically, or manually.
OXY PAX ON : This memo appears in green when both CPC detect excessive cabin altitude.
OXY PAX ON : This memo appears in amber when one CPC or both CPC do not detect
excessive cabin altitude.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-30-20 P 2/2

FCOM B to C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PORTABLE OXYGEN SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
FLIGHT CREWS PORTABLE OXYGEN SYSTEM

Ident.: DSC-35-40-10-00000994.0004001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
The smoke hood on the left back side of the cockpit protects the eyes and respiratory system of one
member of the flight crew while he is fighting a fire, or if smoke and/or noxious gases enter the cabin,
or if the cabin loses pressure.
The smoke hood is equipped with one solid state oxygen supply source and one CO2 absorption
system, contained in a life support pack which furnish an effective time of use of 15 min.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-40-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
OXYGEN
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PORTABLE OXYGEN SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
USING THE HOOD

Ident.: DSC-35-40-10-00000996.0004001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-35-40-10 P 2/2

FCOM B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-36-10 Description
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-36-10-20 Engine Bleed System

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Engine Air Supply.................................................................................................................................................... B
Pressure Regulation and Limitation........................................................................................................................ C
Temperature Regulation and Limitation.................................................................................................................. D
DSC-36-10-30 APU Bleed Air Supply

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-36-10-40 HP Ground Air Supply

HP Ground Air Supply.............................................................................................................................................A
DSC-36-10-50 Crossbleed
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
ECAM Indication...................................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-36-10-60 Leak Detection

Leak Detection......................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-36-10-70 Operation Following Failures

BMC Failure............................................................................................................................................................. A
DSC-36-20 Controls and Indicators

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
BLEED SD Page..................................................................................................................................................... B
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... C

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-36-10-10-00020661.0003001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The pneumatic system supplies high pressure air for :

‐ Air conditioning
‐ Engine starting
‐ Thrust reversers
‐ Wing anti-icing
‐ Water pressurization
‐ Hydraulic reservoir pressurization.
‐ Pack bay ventilation turbofan actuation
‐ Cargo heating 
‐ Fuel Tank Inerting System (FTIS)  .
High pressure air is supplied from three sources :
‐ Engine bleed systems
‐ APU load compressor
‐ Two HP ground connections.
Note: An external HP source may be used for air conditioning.
Engine bleed systems are interconnected by a crossbleed duct, to which the APU and ground
sources are connected.
A valve, mounted on the crossbleed duct, allows the left side (ENG 1) and the right side (ENG 2) to
be interconnected.
Pneumatic system operation is controlled and monitored by two Bleed Monitoring Computers (BMC
1 and 2), the overhead control panel and the ECAM. The APU bleed supply is controlled by the APU
Electronic Control Box (ECB).
A leak detection system is provided to detect any overheat in the vicinity of the hot air ducts.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - ENGINE BLEED SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-36-10-20-00000840.0007001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Engine bleed systems are similar

Each system is designed to:
‐ select the air source compressor stage
‐ regulate bleed air pressure
‐ regulate bleed air temperature
Each system is controlled and monitored by one Bleed Monitoring Computer.
Each BMC is provided with bleed pressure, temperature and valve position information, and is
interconnected to:
‐ other systems involved with the bleed system
‐ the other BMC,
and provides indications and warnings to the ECAM and CMC.
In case of failure of one BMC, the other one takes over most of the monitoring functions.
The LH and RH bleed valves are electrically-controlled by BMC1 and BMC2 respectively, and are
pneumatically -operated.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-20 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ENGINE AIR SUPPLY

Ident.: DSC-36-10-20-00000845.0003001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
Air is normally bled from the intermediate pressure stage (IP) of engine HP compressor, to minimize
fuel penalty.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-20 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
When pressure from the IP is not sufficient (low engine speed), air is bled from the high pressure
(HP) stage thru the HP valve which limits downstream pressure to 36 ± 4 PSI.
An intermediate pressure check valve, mounted downstream of the IP port , closes to prevent air
from HP stage being circulated to the IP stage.
L3 The HP valve is automatically closed
‐ pneumatically :
• in case of low upstream pressure
• in case of excessive upstream pressure
‐ electrically when :
• the BLEED valve is electrically controlled closed or,
• wing anti-ice is OFF and upstream HP valve pressure is > 73 PSI
L1 ECAM INDICATION
PRESSURE REGULATION AND LIMITATION

Ident.: DSC-36-10-20-00000858.0003001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Downstream of the junction of HP and IP ducting, air is admitted into the bleed valve. This bleed
valve acts as a shut-off, and as a Pressure Regulating Valve (PRV).
Delivery pressure is regulated between 44 and 52 PSI , depending on the flow.
The pressure can be reduced, in case of over temperature at the precooler inlet.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-20 P 3/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
In case of a pressure regulation failure, the overpressure valve (OPV) closes, when the pressure is
greater than 85 PSI.
The bleed valve is fully closed :
‐ Pneumatically in case of :
• Upstream pressure less than 8 PSI, or
• Engine fire
‐ Electrically through the:
• BLEED pushbutton, when switched OFF
• ENG FIRE pushbutton when pushed
• BMC, in the following cases :
‐ Overtemperature
‐ Overpressure
‐ Leak detection
‐ APU bleed ON (for Engine 2, provided crossbleed valve is not closed).
‐ Starting sequence
‐ Engine shutdown
TEMPERATURE REGULATION AND LIMITATION

Ident.: DSC-36-10-20-00000861.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The temperature regulation of bleed air is achieved by a precooler, that is mounted downstream of
the bleed valve.
The precooler is an air-to-air heat exchanger, which uses cooling air that is bled from the engine fan,
to regulate the temperature to 200 °C.
Fan airflow is controlled by the fan Air Valve.
When wing anti-ice is selected off, the temperature may be regulated to 150 °C, upon zone controller
demand.
The fan air valve is spring-loaded closed, in the absence of pressure.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-20 P 4/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - APU BLEED AIR SUPPLY
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-36-10-30-00000881.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Air supplied by the APU load compressor is both available on ground and in flight.
APU bleed air is controlled by the APU bleed valve, which operates as shutoff valve. It is
electrically-controlled and pneumatically-operated.
The APU bleed valve is controlled by the APU BLEED pushbutton, located on the AIR panel.
When, the pushbutton is set to ON, APU bleed air supplies the pneumatic system, provided APU N is
greater than 95 %. This causes the crossbleed valve to open and the engine bleed valves to close.
If the APU bleed valve is opened, it automatically closes in the case of APU leak, left wing leak, or
engine 1 leak (except during engine start). Refer to DSC-36-10-60 Leak Detection.
A non-return valve, located near the crossbleed duct, protects the APU when air is bled from another
supply source.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-30 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - APU BLEED AIR SUPPLY
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-30 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - HP GROUND AIR SUPPLY
OPERATING MANUAL
HP GROUND AIR SUPPLY

Ident.: DSC-36-10-40-00000899.0001001 / 06 JUN 16
Applicable to: ALL
Air is supplied to the aircraft’s pneumatic system via two HP ground connectors. The crossbleed
valve has to be opened manually to provide air for both sides.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-40 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - HP GROUND AIR SUPPLY
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-40 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - CROSSBLEED
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-36-10-50-00000908.0004001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
There is a crossbleed valve on the crossbleed duct. This valve enables the isolation or
interconnection of LH (ENG1) and RH (ENG2) air supply system.
The crossbleed valve is electrically controlled from a rotary selector that is located on the overhead
AIR panel.
Two electric motors control the crossbleed valve : One is for automatic mode, the other is for manual
mode.
In automatic mode, the crossbleed valve is normally closed. It opens when APU bleed air is used. It
closes, if the system detects an air leak (except during engine start). Refer to DSC-36-10-60 Leak
Detection.
ECAM INDICATION
Ident.: DSC-36-10-50-00000903.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-50 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - CROSSBLEED
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-50 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - LEAK DETECTION
OPERATING MANUAL
LEAK DETECTION
Ident.: DSC-36-10-60-00000912.0007001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The air leakage detection loops detect any ambient overheat in the vicinity of the hot air ducts in the
fuselage, pylons and wings.
The sensing elements are tied to form a single loop, for pylon or, a double loop for the wing and
APU.
A wing or APU leak signal is activated when the two loops detect a leak, or when one loop detects
the leak and the other is inoperative.
The system has identical control logic included in each BMC.
‐ In case of wing leak signal
• The engine bleed valve and HP valve on the affected wing are automatically closed.
• The associated ENGINE BLEED FAULT light on the AIR panel are illuminated
• The X-bleed valve automatically closes (except when manually selected open).
• If the APU bleed valve is opened, and if the leak affects the left wing, the APU bleed valve
automatically closes.
‐ In case of pylon leak signal
• The bleed valves and the HP valves on the affected side are automatically closed
• The FAULT light associated with the related engine is illuminated on the AIR panel
• The X-bleed valve automatically closes (except during an engine start or manually selected
open).
• If the APU bleed valve is opened, and if the leak affects pylon 1, the APU bleed valve
automatically closes (except during engine start).
‐ In case of APU leak signal
• The APU bleed valve automatically closes
• The FAULT light illuminates on the APU BLEED pushbutton on the AIR panel.
• The X-bleed valve automatically closes (except when manually selected open).
• If the APU bleed valve is closed, the engine 1 bleed valve and engine 1 HP valve automatically
close.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-60 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - LEAK DETECTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-60 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - OPERATION FOLLOWING FAILURES
OPERATING MANUAL
BMC FAILURE
Ident.: DSC-36-10-70-00000924.0005001 / 19 JAN 11
Applicable to: ALL
If one BMC is failed the other BMC takes over monitoring of the bleed system and ensures the
following ECAM warnings:
‐ ENG BLEED FAULT (overpressure and overtemperature only)
‐ WING LEAK
‐ APU BLEED LEAK
‐ BLEED LO TEMP (if wing anti ice is on)
Nevertheless the associated FAULT light on the AIR panel is lost, and the bleed valve does not close
automatically.
ENG BLEED LEAK warning is lost for the associated engine.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-70 P 1/2

FCOM A 25 NOV 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - OPERATION FOLLOWING FAILURES
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-36-10-70 P 2/2

FCOM 25 NOV 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-36-20-00000692.0004001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) ENG 1 (2) BLEED pb sw

On : The bleed valve opens, provided:
‐ Upstream pressure is above 8 PSI.
‐ The APU BLEED pb-sw is OFF, or the APU bleed valve is closed.
‐ There is no onside wing or pylon leak, overpressure, or overtemperature
detected.
‐ The ENG FIRE pushbutton is not released out
‐ The ENG start valve is closed.
FAULT lt : illuminates amber, associated with ECAM caution, in case of:
‐ Bleed valve is not closed during engine start
‐ Bleed valve is not closed with APU bleed ON (and for RH engine X-bleed
open).
and additionally associated with autoclosure of the bleed and HP valves:
‐ Overpressure downstream of the bleed valve.
‐ Bleed overheat
‐ Wing or engine leak on the related side.
It goes off, when the ENG BLEED pushbutton is OFF, provided the failure has
disappeared.
OFF : The Bleed valve and HP valve close. OFF light comes on white. The FAULT light
and the autoclosure signal are reset.

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) APU BLEED pb sw

ON : APU valve opens provided:
‐ N > 95 %
‐ Altitude < 25 000 ft climbing
or < 23 000 ft descending
‐ No leak detected on APU or LH bleed (Should a leak occur on the RH side, the
X-bleed would close).
ON light illuminates blue.
Off : APU valves closes.
FAULT lt : illuminates amber, associated with ECAM caution, when APU leak is detected.
(3) X-BLEED sel
AUTO : X-bleed valve is open if APU bleed valve is open
X-bleed valve is closed if APU bleed valve is closed.
OPEN : X-bleed valve is open.
CLOSE : X-bleed valve is closed.
BLEED SD PAGE
Ident.: DSC-36-20-00001042.0005001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) HP VALVES
Crossline - Green : The HP valve is fully closed.
In line - Green : The HP valve is not fully closed.
Crossline - Amber : HP valve disagree in the closed position,
or when the HP valve is fully closed and the respective engine is not
running.
(2) ENGINE BLEED VALVES
In line - Green : The bleed valve is normally open.
Crossline - Green : The bleed valve is fully closed (by manual or automatic control).
In line - Amber : The bleed valve disagrees in the open position.
Crossline - Amber : The bleed valve disagrees in the closed position,
or the bleed valve is fully closed and the respective engine is not
running.
Note: In certain circumstances (such as different engine setting, or one minor bleed valve
regulation drift), it is possible that one bleed valve on one side closes and will be
indicated closed and green on the BLEED SD page. There is no operational impact
on the bleed system, provided there is no associated “AIR ENG X BLEED FAULT”
ECAM warning.
(3) ENGINE BLEED INDICATIONS
(A) Precooler inlet pressure

It is normally in green.
It becomes amber, if lower than 4 PSI, or in case the BMC detects an overpressure
(above 60 PSI).
(B) Precooler outlet temperature
It is normally in green.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
It becomes amber, if the BMC detects an overheat or low temperature.

Overheat: Temperature exceeds:
‐ 290 °C for more than 5 s, or
‐ 270 °C for more than 15 s, or
‐ 257 °C for more than 55 s.
Low temperature is detected, if the bleed temperature drops below 150 °C, and if wing
anti-ice is on. Low temperature may, however, only be due to low outside air temperature.
(4) APU BLEED VALVE
Displayed only if the APU MASTER SW is ON.
Crossline - Green : APU valve not fully open and APU BLEED pushbutton is OFF
Crossline - Amber : APU bleed valve is not fully open and APU BLEED pushbutton is
ON.
In line - Green : APU valve fully open
(5) CROSS BLEED VALVE
Crossline - Green : crossbleed valve is normally closed.
In line - Green : crossbleed valve is normally open.
Crossline - Amber : crossbleed valve disagrees in closed position.
In line - Amber : crossbleed valve disagrees in open position.
In transit - Amber : crossbleed valve in transit
(6) GND HP ground connection indication
: displayed in white on the ground
(7) ANTI ICE indication

Displayed in white, if the WING pushbutton on the ANTI ICE panel is ON and both valves on
the related side are open. The associated anti ice indication becomes amber if:
‐ the position of at least one valve of the related side disagrees with the anti ice selection
‐ at least one arrow symbol is amber on the related side.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(8) Arrows
ARROW
DISPLAY
Not Valve is closed.
displayed
Green Valve is normally open.
Valve is open, and at least one of the following conditions is met:
‐ Bleed air pressure high, or low
Amber
‐ Wing anti-ice pushbutton is at OFF position
‐ Open for more than 35 s, while the aircraft is on ground.
MEMO DISPLAY
Ident.: DSC-36-20-00017082.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
APU BLEED : This memo appears in green, if the APU is available and the APU BLEED pb-sw
is ON.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
WATER / WASTE
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
WATER / WASTE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Potable Water.......................................................................................................................................................... B
Wastewater System.................................................................................................................................................C
Toilet System........................................................................................................................................................... D
Architecture.............................................................................................................................................................. E

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
WATER / WASTE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
WATER / WASTE
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-38-10-00017388.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The water and waste systems:

‐ Distribute potable water to the toilets and the galleys
‐ Dispose waste water
‐ Store toilet wastes.
The system is insulated to prevent water leaks and ice build up.
The water and waste control panel is located on the Forward Attendant Panel (FAP).
POTABLE WATER
Ident.: DSC-38-10-00017389.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Potable water is stored in two 350 l water tanks (or three 350 l water tanks  ) located in the aft
cargo compartment, in sidewalls.
On ground, the water system is pressurized by the air from the service panel pressure port. In flight,
the water system is pressurized by bleed air.
If bleed air is not available and the air pressure is not sufficient for the normal operation of the
potable water system, an electrical compressor  starts automatically.
Potable water is piped to the galleys and lavatories. Manual shutoff valves isolate the washbasins
and toilets from the water system. The manual shutoff valves are located behind an access door,
under the toilet bowl. The position of each valve is indicated by OPEN and SHUT legend. A placard
inside the access door gives instructions on the operation of the manual shutoff valve.
The system can be filled or drained from the service panel at the bottom of the fuselage. For tank
filling, the quantity of the potable water is preselected on the FAP.
The indication of the water quantity in the tanks is displayed on the FAP.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
WATER / WASTE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
WASTEWATER SYSTEM
Ident.: DSC-38-10-00017390.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The waste/water (from galleys and lavatories) drains overboard through two heated drain masts.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
WATER / WASTE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The forward mast drains the waste/water from the forward cabin. The aft mast drains the waste/water
from the aft cabin.
The waste and water are discharged by:
‐ Gravity, on ground
‐ Differential pressure, in flight.
TOILET SYSTEM
Ident.: DSC-38-10-00017391.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Differential pressure forces waste from the toilet bowls into 2 waste storage tanks (or 3 waste storage
tanks  ). The total waste tanks capacity is 700 l (or 1 050 l for 3 waste storage tanks  ). On the
ground, and in flight below 16 000 ft, the differential pressure is generated by the vacuum generator.
Clean water from the potable water system flushes the toilets.
A flush control unit controls the flush sequence in each toilet.
The Vacuum System Controller (VSC) ensures the system control, monitoring and fault reporting.
The VSC transmits information to:
‐ The FAP to indicate the waste tank levels and report system defects
‐ The centralized Fault Display System (CFDS) to indicate the system defects to the maintenance.
Ground personnel services the waste tanks via a service panel, located under the fuselage.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
WATER / WASTE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
A manual shutoff valve isolates an inoperative toilet. The manual shutoff valve is located on the right
side of each toilet bowl.
ARCHITECTURE
Ident.: DSC-38-10-00000918.0004001 / 15 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
WATER / WASTE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM ←E 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
WATER / WASTE
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Components............................................................................................................................................................. B
Modes of Operation.................................................................................................................................................C
Architecture.............................................................................................................................................................. D
Failure Classification................................................................................................................................................E
CMS Functions.........................................................................................................................................................F
Cockpit / CMS Interface..........................................................................................................................................G
DSC-45-20 System Operation

MAINTENANCE MENU........................................................................................................................................... A
POST OR CURRENT FLIGHT REPORT................................................................................................................B
PREVIOUS FLIGHT REPORT................................................................................................................................ C
AVIONICS STATUS................................................................................................................................................ D
CLASS 3 REPORT..................................................................................................................................................E
SYSTEM REPORT/TEST........................................................................................................................................ F
UTC/DATE INIT.......................................................................................................................................................G
CMC RECONFIGURATION.................................................................................................................................... H
DSC-45-30 Data Loader

Description............................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-45-35 Printer
Description............................................................................................................................................................... A
Controls and Indicators............................................................................................................................................B

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-45-10-00000926.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The purpose of the Central Maintenance System (CMS) is to ease the maintenance task by directly
indicating, in the cockpit, the fault messages and allowing some specific tests.
Two levels of maintenance are possible :
At the line stop : Equipment removal
At the main base : Troubleshooting
COMPONENTS
Ident.: DSC-45-10-00000928.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
The CMS includes :

‐ The Built In Test Equipment (BITE) of all electronic systems
‐ Two fully redundant Central Maintenance Computers (CMCs)
‐ Three MCDUs (Multipurpose Control Display Units) used also for FMGS, ACMS (Aircraft Condition
Monitoring System) and ATSU (Air Traffic Service Unit), which dialogue with the CMC for display
of information or initiation of tests
‐ One printer (A4 format)
Usually only CMC 1 is used, when CMC 2 is in standby. CMC 2 will automatically take over if CMC 1
fails.
A pushbutton on the overhead panel allows to force the transfer to CMC 2, by setting the CMC 1 to
OFF.
COMPONENTS
Ident.: DSC-45-10-00000928.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
The CMS includes :

‐ The Built In Test Equipment (BITE) of all electronic systems
‐ One Central Maintenance Computer (CMC)
‐ Three MCDUs (Multipurpose Control Display Units) used also for FMGS, ACMS (Aircraft Condition
Monitoring System) and ATSU (Air Traffic Service Unit), which dialogue with the CMC for display
of information or initiation of tests
‐ One printer (A4 format)

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MODES OF OPERATION
Ident.: DSC-45-10-00000938.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The CMS operates in two main modes :

‐ The NORMAL mode or REPORTING mode in flight
‐ The INTERACTIVE mode or MENU mode on ground
In NORMAL mode, the CMS records and displays the failure messages permanently transmitted by
each system BITE.
In INTERACTIVE mode, the CMS enables the connection of any BITE system with the MCDU, in
order to display the maintenance data stored and formated by the system BITE, or to initiate a TEST.

FCOM C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ARCHITECTURE
Ident.: DSC-45-10-00017146.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL

FCOM D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FAILURE CLASSIFICATION
Ident.: DSC-45-10-00000970.0001001 / 16 NOV 11
Applicable to: ALL
There are three classes of failure:

Class 1 : Failures indicated to the flight crew by means of a flight deck effect (e.g. ECAM or
instrument flags).
Class 2 : Failures which can be left uncorrected until the next scheduled maintenance check
(Management of these failures is handled by the Trouble Shooting Manual (TSM) and
should be rectified within the timescale defined in the TSM).
Class 3 : Failures not indicated to the flight crew, with no fixed time quoted for correction.
Failure Classes Class 1 Class 2 Class 3
Operational YES NO NO
consequences
Indication to the YES Refer to MMEL/MI-00-08 NO
flight crew ECAM and MAINTENANCE
Automatically displayed in real
STATUS
time:
‐ Warning or caution
messages on Engine
Warning Display
‐ Flags on Primary Flight
Display or Navigation
Display, or System Display,
‐ Local warning
Dispatch Refer to MEL may be:

MEL not applicable. MEL not applicable.
consequences “GO” without conditions. No fixed time quoted for
‐ ”GO”
These failures should be corrections.
‐ ”GO IF”
rectified within the timescale However, correction is
‐ ”NO GO”
defined in the TSM. recommended to improve
dispatch reliability.
Indication to the YES YES
maintenance team Automatically print out at the end of each flight : On request, when needed,
Failure messages on the CMC Post Flight Report Failure messages on CMC
Class 3 Report.
Note: Most Class 1 failures have an operational consequence on the current flight. Some Class
1 failures, such as MINOR FAULT, have no operational consequence on the current flight,
but must be corrected in accordance with the MEL preamble, or the time specified in the
associated dispatch condition of the MEL.

FCOM E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CMS FUNCTIONS
Ident.: DSC-45-10-00000973.0004001 / 22 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The main CMS functions are the :

‐ Acquisition and storage of messages transmitted by the connected system BITEs, or by the Flight
Warning Computer (Warning / Caution titles).
‐ Elaboration of the maintenance phases.
‐ Elaboration of the maintenance reports :

• POST OR CURRENT FLIGHT REPORT :
Presents all ECAM warning/caution and failure messages (Class 1 and 2 failures) recorded
during the last or current flight leg.
Available in flight and on ground.
• PREVIOUS FLIGHT REPORT :
Presents all ECAM and failure messages recorded during the 63 previous flight legs (post flight
reports).
Available on ground only.
• AVIONICS STATUS :
Presents, in real time, the systems affected by a failure.
Available in flight and on ground.
• CLASS 3 REPORT :
Presents the Class 3 failure messages detected during the last flight leg.
Available on ground only.
• SYSTEM REPORT/TEST :
Allows interactive dialogue between any system and the MCDU.

FCOM F→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Available on ground only..
COCKPIT / CMS INTERFACE

Ident.: DSC-45-10-00000975.0001001 / 21 MAR 16

FCOM ← F to G → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
COCKPIT / CMS INTERFACE

Ident.: DSC-45-10-00000975.0002001 / 21 MAR 16

FCOM ←G 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW SYSTEM OPERATION
OPERATING MANUAL
MAINTENANCE MENU
Ident.: DSC-45-20-00000983.0002001 / 22 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The CMS uses menus displayed on the MCDU. The operator chooses the functions or reports via
these menus.
Pressing the “MCDU MENU” key and then selecting CMS gives access to the MAINTENANCE
MENU page. These pages are different in flight and on ground.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 1/14

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
POST OR CURRENT FLIGHT REPORT

Ident.: DSC-45-20-00000988.0003001 / 19 DEC 12
Applicable to: ALL
POST FLIGHT REPORT on ground or CURRENT FLIGHT REPORT in flight, presents all class
1 and 2 failures and all system failure messages received by the CMS during the last flight leg or
current leg.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 2/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The POST or CURRENT FLIGHT REPORT is automatically printed after engine shutdown, or
manually by selecting the PRINT key.
It is also automatically downlinked to the airline ground computer after engine shutdown, or manually
by selecting SEND.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 3/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
POST FLIGHT REPORT PRINT OUT
PREVIOUS FLIGHT REPORT

Ident.: DSC-45-20-00001002.0003001 / 19 DEC 12
Applicable to: ALL
This report provides access to the POST FLIGHT REPORTS of the 63 previous flight legs.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 4/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 5/14

FCOM ←C→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
On ground, the operator can either print a flight report or a screen copy. The format is identical to that
of the POST FLIGHT REPORT. The operator can send a flight report to the airline ground computer
by selecting the corresponding SEND key.
AVIONICS STATUS
Ident.: DSC-45-20-00001005.0001001 / 19 DEC 12
Applicable to: ALL
This screen displays the list of systems affected by a Class 1 or 2 failure.

The Operator can press the button next to a system to directly call up that system page without going
through the SYSTEM REPORT/TEST menu.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 6/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
In flight, or on ground, the operator can either print the complete AVIONICS STATUS report, or only
a copy of the screen.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 7/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AVIONICS STATUS PRINT OUT
CLASS 3 REPORT
Ident.: DSC-45-20-00001009.0003001 / 19 DEC 12
Applicable to: ALL
This report is only created on ground, upon operator request. It presents all class 3 failures detected
during the last flight leg, and classifies them by ATA reference number.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 8/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
On ground, the operator can print either the complete report or only a screen copy. They can also
send the complete CLASS 3 REPORT to the airline ground computer.
CLASS 3 REPORT PRINT OUT
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 9/14

FCOM ←E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEM REPORT/TEST
Ident.: DSC-45-20-00001020.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
It allows access to all electronic systems. After the system selection, the CMC enters into the
interactive dialogue with this system.
All systems are classified by ATA chapter on six MCDU pages.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 10/14

FCOM F→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EXAMPLE : ACCESS TO BCL 2
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 11/14

FCOM ←F→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
In this example, the operator has accessed to the menu of the selected systems :
‐ LAST or PREVIOUS LEG REPORT : presents the list of LRU affected by a failure.
‐ LRU IDENT : contains the P/N of all LRUs of the system.
‐ GND SCANNING : runs the flight monitoring on ground and presents the faulty LRU.
‐ TROUBLE SHOOT DATA : provides system internal data concerning each failure.
‐ CLASS 3 FAULT : presents class 3 failures detected by the system during the last flight leg.
‐ TEST : runs the power up test and system test (if any) and display the result.
‐ GROUND REPORT : presents the list of LRU affected by a failure with the aircraft on ground.
UTC/DATE INIT
Ident.: DSC-45-20-00001027.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The CMC transmits to the aircraft systems, and the lower ECAM displays the GMT coming from the
main clock).
In case of cockpit clock failure, the internal clock of the CMC (synchronized on the cockpit clock)
takes over. If, in addition, there is a long power interrupt (greater than 5 s), crew action is required to
initialize the GMT and DATE via the MCDU.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 12/14

FCOM ← F to G → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 13/14

FCOM ←G 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CMC RECONFIGURATION
Ident.: DSC-45-20-00001031.0001001 / 06 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
(1) CMC 1 pb sw
AUTO : CMC 1 is active while CMC 2  is in stand-by.
CMC 2  automatically takes over if CMC 1 fails.
OFF : CMC 1 selected off.
CMC 2  is active.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-45-20 P 14/14

FCOM H 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DATA LOADER
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-45-30-00001036.0006001 / 22 JUL 14
Applicable to: ALL
The data loading system is an interface between aircraft systems and ground-based data processing
stations.
The data loading system enables:
‐ To upload database or to modify operational software in aircraft systems, or
‐ To download system reports from various aircraft systems.
The connection between the data loading system and the ground-based data processing stations is
performed:
‐ Via the Multipurpose Disk Drive Unit (MDDU)  , using 3.5 diskettes, or
‐ Via the Centralized Data Loading Connector (CDLC)  .
The Data Loading Selector on the overhead panel enables to guide data to and from selected aircraft
systems.
The Data Loading Selector enables to select the following aircraft systems:
‐ FMGEC
‐ SATCOM 
‐ HFDR 
‐ CBMU
‐ TCAS
‐ ELMU
‐ FDIMU
‐ DMC
‐ BMC
‐ CMC
‐ ATSU
‐ EEC

FCOM A→ 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DATA LOADER
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ The screen displays the selected system.

‐ The ON/OFF sw enables to turn ON or OFF the data loading system,
‐ The NEXT and PREV enable to scroll the list of applicable aircraft systems which are displayed on
the screen,
‐ The SEL CTL enables to select or deselect the displayed aircraft system.

FCOM ←A 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PRINTER
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-45-35-00016075.0001001 / 03 FEB 15
Applicable to: ALL
The printer is the output unit for data printing, which can be either generated manually from the
MCDUs, or automatically depending on the system.
The data printouts are described in the CMC FUNCTIONS description (Refer to DSC-45-20 CMC
RECONFIGURATION), or in the related system descriptions.
The printer is installed at the rear of the pedestal on the F/O’s side.
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

Ident.: DSC-45-35-00001043.0001001 / 03 FEB 15
Applicable to: ALL
Depending on the type of printer installed on the aircraft, the flight crew may use one of the following
descriptions.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PRINTER
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) OFF pb-sw

OFF : OFF light comes on steady, printer is off.
On : OFF light extinguishes. Then the printer is normal operation provided that:
‐ No indication light on the front panel is on
‐ The access door is closed
‐ There is paper in front of the print head.
Note: When an internal fault in the printer is detected, the OFF light will come on steady.
(2) TEST pb
TEST : When pressed and released, the printer is performing a self-test provided that
the printer is not in communication with a connected system.
(3) SLEW pb-sw
SLEW : When pressed and released, the printer unrolls the paper.
(4) PAPER ALARM pb-sw
PAPER ALARM : This light comes on steady when the paper roll is missing, empty or low.
Note: If SLEW pb-sw and PAPER ALARM pb-sw are pressed and released at the same
time:
‐ The printer aborts the printing in progress, PAPER ALARM light is on, or
‐ The printer moves the paper backward provided that the access door is open.
(5) ACCESS DOOR latch
The latch locks the printer access door.
On the inner side of the access door, a label gives paper loading instructions.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PRINTER
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) OFF/FAULT pb-sw

OFF : OFF light comes on steady, printer is off.
On : OFF light extinguishes. Then the printer is normal operation provided that:
‐ SLEW light and TEST light are on
‐ The access door is closed
‐ There is paper in front of the print head.
FAULT : When an internal fault in the printer is detected, the FAULT light comes on
steady.
(2) ABORT/TEST pb-sw
ABORT : When pressed and released, the printer aborts the printing in progress.
TEST : When pressed and released, the printer is performing a self-test provided that
the printer is on and no printing is in progress.
(3) PAPER/SLEW pb-sw
PAPER : PAPER light comes on steady when the paper roll is missing, empty or low.
SLEW : When pressed and released, the printer unrolls the paper.
Note: If PAPER/SLEW pb-sw and ABORT/TEST pb-sw are pressed at the same time, the
printer moves the paper backward provided that the access door is open.
(4) ACCESS DOOR latch
The latch locks the printer access door.
On the inner side of the access door, a label gives paper loading instructions.

FCOM ←B 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PRINTER
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-46-10 Datalink
DSC-46-10-10 General System Description
Overview.................................................................................................................................................................. A
Architecture.............................................................................................................................................................. B
Cockpit Interface......................................................................................................................................................C
Datalink Message.................................................................................................................................................... D
DSC-46-10-20 AOC Applications

DSC-46-10-20-10 General
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-46-10-30 ATC Applications

DSC-46-10-30-10 Notifications
Notification................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-46-10-30-20 Controller/Pilot Datalink Communication (CPDLC)

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Connect.................................................................................................................................................................... B
Request....................................................................................................................................................................C
Position Report........................................................................................................................................................ D
MSG Modify............................................................................................................................................................. E
Max Uplink Delay.....................................................................................................................................................F
Emergency...............................................................................................................................................................G
DSC-46-10-30-30 Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Contract (ADS-C)

ADS-Contract........................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-46-10-30-70 Message Record/Log

Message Record......................................................................................................................................................A

DSC-46-10-40-10 ATC Message Pushbutton (ATC MSG PB)
ATC MSG Pb...........................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-46-10-40-20 Datalink Control and Display Unit (DCDU)

DCDU....................................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-46-10-40-30 MCDU Datalink Pages

Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A
ADS-C DETAIL........................................................................................................................................................ B

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

ADS DETAIL............................................................................................................................................................C
ATC LAT REQ.........................................................................................................................................................D
ATC MENU.............................................................................................................................................................. E
ATC OTHER REQ................................................................................................................................................... F
ATC REPORTS....................................................................................................................................................... G
ATC VERT REQ......................................................................................................................................................H
ATSU DATALINK...................................................................................................................................................... I
COMM CONFIG....................................................................................................................................................... J
COMM MENU.......................................................................................................................................................... K
COMM STATUS.......................................................................................................................................................L
CONNECTION.........................................................................................................................................................M
CONNECTION STATUS......................................................................................................................................... N
DATALINK STATUS................................................................................................................................................O
EMERGENCY.......................................................................................................................................................... P
MAX UPLINK DELAY..............................................................................................................................................Q
MSG LOG................................................................................................................................................................ R
MESSAGE MODIFY................................................................................................................................................ S
MSG RECORD........................................................................................................................................................ T
NOTIFICATION........................................................................................................................................................U
POSITION REPORT................................................................................................................................................V
TEXT....................................................................................................................................................................... W
VHF3 DATA MODE................................................................................................................................................. X
VHF3 SCAN SELECT............................................................................................................................................. Y
WHEN CAN WE EXPECT.......................................................................................................................................Z
DSC-46-10-40-40 MCDU Scratchpad Messages

MCDU Scratchpad Messages................................................................................................................................. A
DSC-46-10-40-50 MCDU Data Entry Format

MCDU Data Entry Format....................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-46-10-40-60 ECAM
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... A

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

DSC-46-10-50 How To
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A
How to Initialize....................................................................................................................................................... B
How to Notify ..........................................................................................................................................................C
How to Connect.......................................................................................................................................................D
How to Send Request to ATC................................................................................................................................ E
How to Answer.........................................................................................................................................................F
How to Send a Position Report.............................................................................................................................. G
How to Send EMER MSG.......................................................................................................................................H
How to Modify FLT Plan...........................................................................................................................................I
DSC-46-20 Aircraft Information Network System (AINS)

Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A
System Description.................................................................................................................................................. B
Cockpit Arrangement............................................................................................................................................... C
DSC-46-40 EFB
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A
General.....................................................................................................................................................................B
Landing Application................................................................................................................................................. C
Takeoff Application.................................................................................................................................................. D
Loadsheet Application..............................................................................................................................................E
OPS Library Application...........................................................................................................................................F
Manager Application................................................................................................................................................G
DSC-46-50 Electronic QRH (eQRH)

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DATALINK - GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERVIEW
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-00020958.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The datalink has:

‐ AOC applications 
L2 The flight crew uses the AOC applications to communicate with Airline Operational Center (AOC).
L1 ‐ ATC applications 
L2 The flight crew uses the ATC applications to communicate with Air Traffic Control (ATC) centers.
L1 The ATC datalink provides communication, navigation, and surveillance for Air Traffic Management
(ATM) services.
The ATC datalink applications enable air traffic controllers to follow the aircraft navigation, and
enhance the air traffic flow.
The datalink communication (messages exchange) between the aircraft and the ground is achieved:
‐ Automatically (without a flight crew action)
‐ Manually (with a flight crew action via the DCDU/MCDU and/or RMP).
The datalink messages are:
‐ Uplink (from a ground facilities to the flight crew), or
‐ Downlink (from the flight crew to a ground facilities).
COMMUNICATION AND NAVIGATION FOR AIR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
At the beginning of the flight, the flight crew sends a notification message to the ATC center, via
the MCDU, notification application  .
L2 Refer to DSC-46-10-30-10 Notification for more information.
L1 Then, an air traffic controller will establish a connection between the aircraft and the ATC center.
As a result, the flight crew can exchange messages with the ATC center, via the DCDU (CPDLC
application  ). The messages that the flight crew sends to the ATC center can be built with
present frames and modified via the MCDU.
Depending on the type of datalink exchange, the datalink uses one of the following communication
networks:
‐ ACARS (Refer to DSC-23-30-30-10 Introduction) for FANS A / FANS A+ applications 
‐ ACARS Air Traffic Services (ATS 623) for optional applications  .
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 1/14

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FUTURE AIR NAVIGATION SYSTEM (FANS)

The ATC datalink provides:
‐ FANS A applications  , for operations in remote and in oceanic areas:
▪ Notification
▪ Controller-Pilot Data Link Communication (CPDLC)
▪ Automatic Dependent Surveillance Contract (ADS-C).
‐ FANS A+ applications  , for operations in remote and in oceanic areas:
▪ Notification
▪ Controller-Pilot Data Link Communication (CPDLC)
▪ Automatic Dependent Surveillance Contract (ADS-C).
‐ Optional applications  (compatible only with FANS A+):
▪ Departure Clearance
▪ Oceanic Clearance
▪ Digital - Automatic Terminal Information Service (D-ATIS).
NAVIGATION AND SURVEILLANCE FOR AIR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT

The Automatic Dependent Surveillance (ADS) system sends aircraft position and aircraft
navigation data to ATC centers and other aircraft.
There are two different ADS applications:
‐ ADS-Contract (ADS-C) 
The ADS-C automatically sends aircraft surveillance data to connected ATC centers via ATC
Datalink  in remote or oceanic areas.
L2 Refer to DSC-46-10-30-30 ADS-C for more information, about ADS-C application.
L1 ‐ ADS-Broadcast (ADS-B) 
The ADS-B automatically broadcasts the aircraft position and navigation data to other users
(ATC centers or other aircraft) equipped with a Mode S transponder. The ATC Datalink 
does not host the ADS-B  .
L2 Refer to DSC-34-20-10-10 ADS-B OUT for more information, about the ADS-B.
L1 SERVICE PROVIDERS
The role of a communication service provider is to deliver a message from the A/C to a ground end
system and vice versa.
A datalink service provider ensures routing of datalink messages between the aircraft and ATC
center.
L2 For VHF communication, the two main providers are ARINC and SITA that operate worldwide
networks.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 2/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
L1 REVERSION TO VOICE COMMUNICATION

Voice communication is a primary means of communication on board.
The flight crew must revert from datalink communication to voice communication, if:
‐ There is an emergency situation (exchange of a critical or urgent message)
‐ There is a doubt about a datalink message, the voice should be used for clarification
‐ An operational timer of datalink message exchange times out
‐ A response to an ATC message was not correctly transmitted via datalink.
CLOCK ACCURACY
The required time precision for ATC datalink communications is +/-1 s UTC. If this constraint is
not respected, a rejection of datalink message or acceptance of obsolete datalink message may
occur.
Not respecting this constraint may lead to the rejection of messages or to the acceptance of
obsolete messages.
For FANS operations, the flight crew should not manually set the clock during cockpit preparation.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 3/14

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ARCHITECTURE
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00020957.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Architecture of the ATC Datalink
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00020948.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

Applicable to: ALL
AIR DATA/INERTIAL REFERENCE SYSTEM (ADIRS)

The ADIRS provide aircraft position data to the FMGEC. The FMGEC consolidates the position
value from different sources and transmits it to the ATSU. This is the primary source for the aircraft
position.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 4/14

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00020954.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

Applicable to: ALL
AIR TRAFFIC SERVICE UNIT (ATSU)

The ATSU controls all datalink communication and automatically selects the best available
communication media:
‐ VHF
‐ HF
‐ SATCOM  .
The ATSU hosts:
‐ AOC applications 
‐ ATC applications 
‐ Router services
The ATSU router automatically selects VHF frequency, depending on the aircraft position, in
accordance with an entered scan mask (airline policy).
The scan mask means that a list of VHF datalink service providers, selected via the VHF 3
SCAN SELECT page, is scanned, in accordance with their priority level. The VHF scan mask is
compulsory for correct router operation. If there is no scan mask, the ECAM displays DATALINK
ATSU FAULT – ATSU INIT FAULT.
Refer to DSC-46-10-40-30 VHF3 SCAN SELECT for more information about the VHF3 SCAN
SELECT page.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00020950.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
COCKPIT VOICE RECORDER (CVR)

In addition to its voice recording function, the CVR records the data that the flight crew and the air
traffic controller exchange.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00020955.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
DATALINK CONTROL AND DISPLAY UNIT (DCDU)

The DCDU enables the flight crew to:
‐ Read and answer datalink messages, received from the ground
‐ Display datalink messages, before sending.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00021269.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (FMS)

The ATC datalink interacts with Flight Management Computers (FMC).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 5/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The FMS:
‐ Processes datalink messages
‐ Prepares/generates an answer to datalink messages
‐ Monitors clearances
‐ Reminds the flight crew about a clearance, before reaching a clearance condition.
When a monitored parameter reaches the assigned value, the FMS generates a reminder
message via the DCDU.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00020956.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
FLIGHT WARNING SYSTEM (FWS)

The FWS interacts with the ATSU and:
‐ Alerts, when a datalink message is received
‐ Alerts, in the case of detected failures
‐ Inhibits alerts, depending on the flight phase.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00020951.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS)

The GPS provides the position information to the FMGEC. The position information is consolidated
with the ADIRS data and sent to the ATSU.
The GPS also enables time synchronization to the clock, in order to provide UTC date and time for
datalink system. If the GPS fails, the clock continues to calculate the time by incrementing the last
received pertinent information as the reference time.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00020947.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
HIGH FREQUENCY (HF)

The HF communication system has:
‐ Data mode
‐ Voice mode.
HF communication system can be used in the data mode as an alternative to VHF 3 and
SATCOM  . In this case, the communication between the aircraft and HF ground stations is
established on a HF frequency. A HF frequency of HF DataLink (HFDL) is tuned automatically.
DATALINK/VOICE SWITCHING
The HF can be used in the voice mode. The flight crew can switch datalink/voice and set a voice
frequency via the RMP.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 6/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Green HF VOICE memo indicates that HF datalink communication is interrupted, when the HF
transceiver operates in the voice mode.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00020953.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
MULTI-PURPOSE CONTROL AND DISPLAY UNIT (MCDU)

The MCDU enables the fight crew to access functions to:
‐ Manage the ATC datalink connections
‐ Send notifications
‐ Edit datalink messages
‐ Consult reports
‐ Access Message Record application.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00021270.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
PRINTER
The flight crew can print ATC messages, displayed on the DCDU, or the MCDU.
Note: Each time the flight crew prints a message, they must check that the printed message is
identical to the message on the display unit.
The reference information is the information, that the display unit displays.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00020952.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
RADIO MANAGEMENT PANEL (RMP)

The flight crew sets a radio frequency into the RMP, when a specific datalink message (e.g.:
CONTACT, MONITOR, ...) is received, or when a voice contact is required.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00021268.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Frequencies that some datalink messages contain, can be loaded into RMP via LOAD pb of the
RMP.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00020945.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS (SATCOM) 

The SATCOM system  provides voice and data services. The voice/data are transmitted via
satellite, from the aircraft to the ground earth stations, and then switched through international
telecommunications networks (ARINC, SITA, etc.) to anywhere in the world (airline operational
centers, ATC centers, etc).
The ATSU (router) manages switching to/from SATCOM  (ACARS environments only).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 7/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00020949.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

Applicable to: ALL
SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS (SURV)

The ATC datalink system interacts with the surveillance system and enables the flight crew to:
‐ Provide the ATC center with a TCAS status, sent via the ADS application
‐ Provide the ATC center with the SQUAWK code as a response to CONFIRM SQUAWK uplink
message
‐ Create In-Trail Procedure (ITP) requests for aircraft equipped with ADS-B 
L2 The ITP datalink request is an option.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-10-00020946.0002001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
VERY HIGH FREQUENCY (VHF)

The communication between the aircraft and VHF ground stations is established on a VHF
frequency. The datalink system primarily uses VHF 3 communication system. The ATSU router
automatically selects a VHF frequency, depending on entered configuration, the scan mask for
VHF DataLink (VDL), and the aircraft position.
VHF data link service providers are available in each geographical area. Refer to
DSC-23-30-30-40 World Map ACARS Frequencies for a world map of VHF ACARS frequencies.
The VHF 3 communication system has:
‐ Data mode
‐ Voice mode.
DATALINK/VOICE SWITCHING
The VHF 3 can be used in the voice mode, in case of:
‐ VHF 1 failure
‐ VHF 2 failure
‐ Specific AOC functions (operator's customization)
The flight crew can switch datalink/voice and set a voice frequency via the RMP.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 8/14

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
COCKPIT INTERFACE
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-00020944.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The cockpit interface of the datalink system has:

‐ Datalink Control and Display Unit (DCDU)  on the CAPT and F/O side
The DCDU displays the uplink and downlink messages and enable the flight crew to control the
datalink message exchange.
‐ ATC MSG pb-sw  on the CAPT and F/O side of the glareshield
The ATC MSG pb-sw alerts when an uplink message is received and enables the flight crew to
cancel the alert.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 9/14

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ Multipurpose Control and Display Unit (MCDU)

The MCDU enables to manage AOC and ATC functions and data transfer to the DCDU 
‐ Printer
Datalink messages can be printed, when displayed on the DCDU.
‐ RMP
The RMP enables frequency tuning.
‐ ECAM
The ECAM informs about the abnormal operation.
DATALINK MESSAGE
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-30-00020942.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
UPLINK MESSAGE RECEPTION

When a datalink message is received, the flight crew reads, and manages the messages on
the DCDU. The status of received message is OPEN, and changes during processing. Urgent
messages or messages with higher priority are automatically displayed to the flight crew.
If a normal message is displayed on the DCDU, when receiving an urgent message, the DCDU
will display the urgent message. The normal message stays in the file queue. The flight crew can
retrieve the normal message by pressing MSG+/MSG- keys.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-30-00020943.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
UPLINK MESSAGE RECEPTION ALERT

The flight crew is alerted, when a datalink message is received. A dedicated aural alert activates and
the ATC MSG pb-sw illuminates on CAPT side and on F/O side.
Note: The ATC chime is triggered:
‐ Every 15 s, if a normal datalink message is received
‐ Every 5 s, if an urgent datalink message is received
These cockpit alerts stop, if one of the ATC MSG pb-sw is pushed, or if the flight crew answers the
datalink message via the DCDU.
Note: ATC datalink alerts are inhibited during takeoff and landing phases.
When a normal datalink message is received, this message will appear on the DCDU screen, if
the screen is empty. If the DCDU screen is not empty, this message will not appear on the screen
automatically, and the MSG (number) will flash in the information field of the DCDU.
When an urgent datalink message is received, this message will automatically appear on the DCDU
screen.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 10/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-30-00020941.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

Applicable to: ALL
UPLINK MESSAGE RESPONSE

The flight crew can answer to an ATC datalink message:
‐ Directly
Several types of datalink messages enable the flight crew to answer directly, via the DCDU. The
flight crew can launch preparation of a response message by pressing an appropriate function
key (e.g.: WILCO, ROGER, AFFIRM, NEGATIVE, ...), on the DCDU. Consequently, the FMGS
will generate a response message on the DCDU. The flight crew can send prepared response
message to the ATC by pressing SEND function key of the DCDU.
‐ Indirectly
Datalink messages that cannot be answered directly via the DCDU, are prepared on the MCDU.
The flight crew selects the appropriate function key (EDIT or MODIFY), on the DCDU, in order
to display desired MCDU page (EDIT or MESSAGE MODIFY page). The flight crew enters
relevant values and information for the response via the page of the MCDU.
When desired information is inserted, the flight crew must transfer the information from the
MCDU to the DCDU, by pressing appropriate key on the MCDU. Consequently, prepared
response message appears on the DCDU.
If the prepared downlink message has more than one page, the flight crew must display, and
review all pages of the message on the DCDU, before the message is sent to the ATC. When the
flight crew displays all pages of the message, an asterisk (*) appears next to SEND function key of
the DCDU. The asterisk (*) indicates that the function key is active, and the function can be used.
If the flight crew cannot answer to an ATC uplink message immediately, a stand-by (STBY)
message can be sent to the ATC. When a STBY response message is sent, the message status,
displayed on the DCDU, changes to STBY. This message cannot be removed from the DCDU,
until the flight crew sends a final response later on.
When a downlink message is successfully sent, the message information area will indicate SENT
and the color code of the message will change.
EXAMPLE Clearance message: The flight crew can answer positively, by selecting WILCO*
See (1) and send the message to the ATC, by selecting SEND* See (2) on the
DCDU.
SENDING appears in the information area of the DCDU, when SEND* is selected.
SENT appears in the information area of the DCDU, when the message is
successfully sent.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 11/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EXAMPLE Negotiation message: The flight crew can send the response message,
automatically generated on the DCDU, to the ATC, by selecting SEND* See (1).
successfully sent.
When a downlink message is not successfully sent, the message information area will indicate
SEND FAILED or other, depending on a datalink connection error or failure. In these cases, the
flight crew must close the message. A new request can be created, in order to send the message.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-30-00020940.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
DOWNLINK MESSAGE CREATION

The flight crew can also create and send a request to the ATC.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 12/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
A request message created by the flight crew and sent to ATC has:
‐ Cyan (blue) background before sending
‐ Green background, after sending.
EXAMPLE Request message: The flight crew can send prepared message to the ATC by
selecting SEND* See (1) on the DCDU.
successfully sent.
Note: The flight crew should avoid:

‐ Sending multiple clearance requests in the same message.
‐ Re-sending a message, if the ATC does not answer immediately.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-30-00021267.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
CLOSING AND REMOVAL OF THE MESSAGE FROM THE DCDU

When the flight crew sends the datalink message via the DCDU, The message should be closed,
by pressing the CLOSE function key. Closing the message will clean the DCDU screen.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-30-00020939.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The RECALL function key of the DCDU can be used to display the last closed message.
Other messages can be viewed on the MSG RECORD page of the MCDU.
Note: Before each flight, the MSG RECORD file of previous flight should be erased.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 13/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-10-30-00021253.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

AUTO-CLOSING
The message closes and the system automatically removes the message from the DCDU, 5 s
after the ATC center successfully receives the message.
Clearance messages and messages, related to loss of communication or datalink transmission
error, do not close automatically, when sent or received by the ATC. The flight crew must close
these messages by pressing the CLOSE key, on the DCDU. Closing the message will remove the
message from the DCDU screen.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-10 P 14/14

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DATALINK - AOC APPLICATIONS
OPERATING MANUAL
General
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-20-10-00021044.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The AOC applications  are datalink applications. The AOC applications enable an exchange of
specific messages between the flight crew and the Airline Operational Control (AOC).
The AOC applications are customized by each operator and depend on operator's choices and the
datalink service provider.
Note: Details about AOC applications cannot be provided due to the wide range of customization
by the operator.
Airbus does not supervise customization of AOC applications. It is recommended to insert
AOC application description into this chapter in accordance with AOC applications installed
on the aircraft.
The AOC application can offer the following functions:
EXAMPLE
‐ Preflight Functions:
‐ Flight log
‐ Departure Delay Message
‐ Takeoff Delay Message
‐ Weather Request
‐ NOTAM Request
‐ Loadsheet Request
‐ Others
‐ En-Route Functions:
‐ Flight log
‐ Diversion Message
‐ En-route Delay
‐ Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) Message
‐ Weather Request
‐ NOTAM Request
‐ Others
‐ Postflight Functions:
‐ Flight log
‐ Flight summary
‐ Gate delay
‐ Others
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-20-10 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DATALINK - AOC APPLICATIONS
OPERATING MANUAL
The flight crew uses the datalink cockpit interface for the AOC applications.
EXAMPLE
Flight Plan Modification
This flight plan modification example is based on following assumptions:
‐ The AOC sends a flight plan modification message to the flight crew.
‐ The flight crew loads the fight plan modification in the FMGES, into the secondary
F-PLN.
‐ The crew obtains ATC clearance before activating the modified flight plan.
‐ Refer to DSC-46-10-50 How to Modify FLT Plan for the flight plan modification
based on an AOC request.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-20-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DATALINK - ATC APPLICATIONS
OPERATING MANUAL
Notifications
NOTIFICATION
Ident.: DSC-46-10-30-10-00021184.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Notification application enables the flight crew to send a notification message to an ATC center,
if the datalink system is correctly initialized.
Refer to DSC-46-10-50 How to Initialize for more information about datalink initialization.
The flight crew must notify the ATC center, from 15 min to 45 min, before entering the ATC area.
The flight crew notifies a desired ATC center via the NOTIFICATION page of the MCDU .
However, ATC centers initiate automatic notification, when the aircraft flies from one ATC area to
another.
Note: The ATC center initiates a CPDLC connection, when the flight crew sends the notification.
The NOTIFICATION page of the MCDU will display XXXX NOTIFIED HHMM Z). Therefore,
it is not necessary to repeat notifications to the ATC center.
The notification procedure enables the ATC to correlate the aircraft with the ICAO flight number.
Note: The FMGEC provides the FLT number.
Consequently, it is essential to enter, into the FMGEC, via the INIT page of the MCDU, the same
flight number as the flight number, indicated on the ICAO flight plan (with the same number of
letters).
Optional datalink applications  (departure clearance, oceanic clearance and D-ATIS) do not
require previous notifications, or connection to an ATC center.
Optional datalink applications are based on voice exchanges:
1. Request - crew requests
2. Clearance - ground clears
3. Read-back - crew reads back
4. Confirmation - ground confirms.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-30-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-30-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Controller/Pilot Datalink Communication (CPDLC)
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-30-20-10-00021177.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
The CPDLC application enables an exchange of specific ATC messages between the flight crew and
air traffic controller.
The air traffic controller initiates the CPDLC connection with the aircraft, after the reception of a
notification message from the flight crew.
Note: When the aircraft flies from one air traffic control area to another, the CPDLC ensures an
automatic transfer of ATC centers.
The flight crew and air traffic controller use a set of predefined messages to build datalink messages.
The flight crew and air traffic controller can also send freetext datalink messages. Freetext messages
can only be used, when pre-formatted datalink messages do not allow to send the information.
Note: The freetext message does not allow the datalink system to generate automatic
pre-formatted answer.
The freetext message must contain standard ATC phraseology and standard abbreviations.
The CPDLC application enables the flight crew to answer following uplink messages via the DCDU:
‐ Clearance
‐ Report request
‐ Negotiation message
‐ Information message.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-30-20-10-00021254.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
The CPDLC application supports the following functions:

‐ Connection (Refer to DSC-46-10-30-20 Connection )
‐ Request (Refer to DSC-46-10-30-20 Request)
‐ Report (Refer to DSC-46-10-30-20 Report)
‐ Message Modify (Refer to DSC-46-10-30-20 Message Modify)
‐ MAX Uplink Delay (Refer to DSC-46-10-30-20 Max Uplink Delay)
‐ Emergency (Refer to DSC-46-10-30-20 Emergency).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-30-20 P 1/6

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CONNECT
Ident.: DSC-46-10-30-20-00021178.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The notified ATC center can initiate a CPDLC connection with the aircraft. This ATC center is then
considered as active. The active ATC center appears on the DCDU, and on the MCDU, in the active
ATC field of the CONNECTION STATUS page.
Only one ATC center can be active at a time.
During flight, the aircraft may move from one ATC area to another ATC area. The next ATC may
anticipate this change. The next ATC center may initiate a passive connection with the aircraft, when
the aircraft is still connected to the active ATC. In this case, the next ATC center appears on the
DCDU, and on the MCDU, in the next ATC field of the CONNECTION STATUS page. When the ATC
area changes, the active ATC center ends the connection with the aircraft, and the next ATC center
automatically becomes the active ATC center.
The CONNECTION STATUS page of the MCDU displays ICAO codes of both, the active and
the next (if any) ATC centers. The flight crew can manually disconnect the ATC centers via the
CONNECTION STATUS page.
Refer to DSC-46-10-40-30 CONNECTION STATUS for information about the CONNECTION
STATUS page.
REQUEST
Ident.: DSC-46-10-30-20-00021179.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The flight crew can request a clearance or information from the air traffic controller.
The MCDU enables the flight crew to create:
‐ Lateral Request
The flight crew can prepare request messages associated with lateral trajectory changes on the
ATC LAT REQ page.
‐ Vertical Request
The flight crew can prepare request messages associated with vertical trajectory changes on the
ATC VERT REQ page.
‐ WHEN CAN WE EXPECT Request
The flight crew can prepare negotiation messages associated with altitude or speed flight
parameters on the WHEN CAN WE EXPECT page.
‐ Other Request
The flight crew can prepare messages to request clearance, own separation and voice contact on
the ATC OTHER REQ page.
The flight crew can add a freetext to a request if a justification is required, or the pre-formatted layout
of message does not enable to send the information.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-30-20 P 2/6

FCOM B to C → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: Requests of the departure clearance, oceanic clearance and ATIS are not part of the
CPDLC application.
Refer to DSC-46-10-30-40 DCL for more information about the departure clearance
application  .
Refer to DSC-46-10-30-50 OCL for more information about the oceanic clearance
application  .
Refer to DSC-46-10-30-60 D-ATIS for more information about the D-ATIS clearance
application  .
POSITION REPORT
Ident.: DSC-46-10-30-20-00021180.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The REPORT function provides ATC with information about the aircraft position, trends (climb,
speed, descent, heading, track, ) and other requested parameters.
The flight crew prepares report messages on the MCDU, on the ATC REPORTS page.
The ATC REPORTS page enables the flight crew to:
‐ Set position report messages
‐ Access BACK-ON-ROUTE REPORT page
‐ Modify REPORT messages
‐ Create a freetext message
‐ Add freetext to a report message
When the flight crew positively answers report request, the FMGEC monitors associated parameters.
As a result, the DCDU displays a reminder message, when monitored parameter satisfies the
condition.
When the flight crew positively answers deferred clearance or conditional clearance message, the
DCDU displays a reminder message before the clearance expiry.
POSITION REPORT
The flight crew reports position, when requested, and/or when the waypoint is sequenced.
The flight crew can report the aircraft position to the active ATC center manually, or automatically:
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-30-20 P 3/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ MANUAL POS REPORT

The flight crew prepares the manual position report, on the POSITION REPORT page.
Mandatory and optional parameters of the position report can be filled by FMGES, or the flight
crew.
‐ AUTO POS REPORT
Position report message appears on the DCDU, if waypoints are sequenced correctly in the
FMGES.
The flight crew may activate the automatic position report on the ATC REPORTS page.
Note: Independently from the CPDLC position reporting, the ADS-C also reports the aircraft
position automatically.
BACK ON ROUTE
The flight crew may deviate from a clearance to fly an initial route, due to offset route or weather.
The flight crew sends back-on-route message to the air traffic controller, when the initial route is
resumed.
Note: The FMGEC cannot monitor the back-on-route situation.
MSG MODIFY
Ident.: DSC-46-10-30-20-00021181.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Message Modify function enables the flight crew to modify automatic replies that the CPDLC
generates, in accordance with specific requests from the ATC.
Via the DCDU, the CPDLC application may automatically propose a response to:
‐ Confirm request (position, speed, heading, altitude, ...)
‐ Report request (position reports, altitude, ...)
‐ Open negotiation request (When can you accept altitude, speed, ...?)
‐ A combination of the above requests.
The MESSAGE MODIFY page appears automatically, on the MCDU, if the MODIFY function key is
pressed on the DCDU.
Note: Pressing MODIFY also triggers MCDU FOR MODIF/MCDU FOR EDIT indication, in the
message information area, on the DCDU.
When the flight crew opens the MESSAGE MODIFY page for the first time, all modifiable fields are
automatically updated with FMGES data.
The flight crew can add a freetext to the message, if a justification is required, or if a specific
additional information is requested by the air traffic controller.
Refer to DSC-46-10-40-20 Message Information Area for information about indications on the DCDU.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-30-20 P 4/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Refer to DSC-46-10-40-30 MSG MODIFY for information about MESSAGE MODIFY page.
MAX UPLINK DELAY

Ident.: DSC-46-10-30-20-00021182.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
The Max Uplink Delay function enables the ATC datalink to reject (without a notice to the flight crew)
any CPDLC uplink messages, if the delay between ground emission and onboard reception exceeds
the time, specified in the MAX UPLINK DELAY of the MAX UPLINK DELAY page on the MCDU.
The max uplink delay is the maximum delay that is authorized for an ATC answer. By default, the
value of the max uplink delay is set to NONE. This setting means that datalink messages are not
rejected, due to a too long transmission time.
The air traffic controller defines the value of the maximum uplink delay. The ground system can
automatically uplink the value of the delay in a specific freetext message.
On the ATC request, the flight crew must modify the maximum uplink delay value via the MAX
UPLINK DELAY page on the MCDU.
CAUTION Do not enter any value in the MAX UPLINK DELAY entry field unless requested by
the air traffic controller.
Note: The MAX UPLINK DELAY value is reset to NONE, when the connection with the current
active ATC center ends.
If the flight crew receives a message CONFIRM MESSAGE LATENCY TIMER OFF, the
flight crew must check that the MAX UPLINK DELAY value is equal to NONE. If the MAX
UPLINK DELAY value is no set to NONE, the MAX UPLINK DELAY value must be cleared.
Refer to DSC-46-10-40-30 MAX UPLINK DELAY for more information about MAX UPLINK DELAY
page.
MAX UPLINK DELAY

Ident.: DSC-46-10-30-20-00021182.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
The Max Uplink Delay function enables the ATC datalink to reject (without notice to the flight crew)
any CPDLC uplink messages, if the delay between ground emission and onboard reception exceeds
the time, specified in the MAX UPLINK DELAY of the CONNECTION STATUS page on the MCDU.
The max uplink delay is the maximum delay that is authorized for an ATC answer. By default, the
value of the max uplink delay is set to NONE. This setting means that all datalink messages are
received on board, without a rejection due to a too long transmission time.
The air traffic controller defines the value of the MAX UPLINK DELAY. The ground system can
automatically uplink the value of the delay in a specific freetext message.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-30-20 P 5/6

FCOM ← E to F → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
On the ATC request, the flight crew must modify the maximum uplink delay value via the
CONNECTION STATUS page on the MCDU.
CAUTION Do not enter any value in the MAX UPLINK DELAY entry field unless requested by
the air traffic controller.
Refer to DSC-46-10-40-30 CONNECTION STATUS for more information about CONNECTION
STATUS page.
EMERGENCY
Ident.: DSC-46-10-30-20-00021183.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The EMERGENCY page enables the flight crew to:

‐ Create an emergency datalink message
‐ Activate the ADS-C Emergency.
The flight crew can switch the ADS-C to emergency mode manually via the EMERGENCY page of
the MCDU,
The ADS-C switches to the emergency mode automatically, when the flight crew sends a MAYDAY
message.
The flight crew can add a freetext to the emergency message, if additional information can be
provided.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-30-20 P 6/6

FCOM ← F to G 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Contract (ADS-C)
ADS-CONTRACT
Ident.: DSC-46-10-30-30-00021176.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Automatic Dependent Surveillance – Contract (ADS-C) application provides information and
surveillance data reports to one or more connected ATC centers. This activity is automatic and
transparent to the flight crew.
Note: Therefore, the ADS-C reporting does not require a flight crew action, datalink notification,
and/or an initiation of CPDLC application.
The air traffic controller defines the content and the frequency of the reports.
The ATC center initiates the ADS-C connection provided that, the ADS-C status of the aircraft
is armed or connected. The flight crew can check the status of ADS-C on the MCDU, on the
CONNECTION STATUS page.
The ADS-C may have the following status:
‐ Armed
The ADS-C function is armed by default. If the ADS-C is armed, up to 5 ATC centers can connect.
Connection is at the ATC’s discretion. When one ATC center is connected, the ADS-C status
changes from armed to connected.
‐ Connected
When an ATC center is connected to the ADS-C:
‐ The CONNECTION STATUS page, on the MCDU indicates the connected status of the ADS-C
‐ The ADS-C DETAIL page/ADS DETAIL page, on the MCDU provides a list of all ADS-C
connected centers
‐ The DCDU indicates the number of ADS-C connected centers in the DCDU default screen.
‐ Off
All active ADS-C connections stop, and the ADS-C connection cannot be established from the
ground, by ATC center.
The flight crew can set the ADS-C to off via the CONNECTION STATUS page.
Note: The ADS-C should not be turned off, unless the flight crew is instructed to do so (for
example, via an ATC request).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-30-30 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-30-30 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Message Record/Log
MESSAGE RECORD
Ident.: DSC-46-10-30-70-00021172.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Message Record application enables to store datalink messages. The flight crew can display the
recorded messages at any time.
When the flight crew closes a message on the DCDU, the message is stored and disappears from
the DCDU.
The messages are stored in chronological order and grouped by flight number. When the maximum
number of stored messages is reached (up to 99 messages), any new message will be stored and
the oldest message will be deleted.
The flight crew can access the stored message via the MSG RECORD page of the MCDU.
Note: 1. The flight crew can print recorded messages.
2. The flight crew can erase all recorded messages.
3. The ADS-C  reports are not stored.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-30-70 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-30-70 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DATALINK - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
ATC Message Pushbutton (ATC MSG PB)
ATC MSG PB
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-10-00021073.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
No datalink message from the ATC center was received.
Flashes when a datalink message from the ATC center is received, or a reminder
message is received. When a message is received, the DCDU automatically displays
the message on the screen.
Associated with audio alert.
When the flight crew presses one of the two ATC MSG pbs, the ATC MSG lights go off
and the aural alert associated with the reception of the message is cancelled.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Datalink Control and Display Unit (DCDU)
DCDU
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-20-10-00021072.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
 If datalink connection is not established:

By default, the DCDU displays no information. The DCDU screen is black without information.
DCDU Screen with No Datalink Connection
 If datalink connection is established:

 If no datalink message is displayed on the DCDU:
By default, the DCDU displays:
• ACTIVE ATC and the active ATC ICAO code
• NEXT ATC and the next ATC ICAO code, if the active ATC initiated an automatic transfer
to a next ATC
• ADS-C status, when the ADS-C is set to OFF
• ADS-C CONNECTED (X), if an ADS-Contract  is established with ATC center(s)
(X) : Displays the number of ADS-C active connections, when at least one ATC center
is connected
• NO ATC DLK/ATC DISCONNECTED, when the datalink connection is lost.
EXAMPLE The DCDU default screen, when the datalink is connected and no message
is displayed on the screen:
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-20 P 1/12

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DCDU Screen with Datalink Connected and No Datalink Message Displayed
 If a datalink message is displayed on the DCDU:

DCDU Screen with Datalink Connected and Datalink Message Displayed
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-20-10-00021163.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

Applicable to: ALL
DATALINK MESSAGE AREA

Displays uplink and downlink messages.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-20 P 2/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Uplink messages are displayed on a black background, and:

‐ When received, the message appears in white and the main parameters in cyan.
‐ When answered, the message becomes green.
‐ When monitored, a parameter appears in magenta (This indicates that the FMGES monitors this
parameter).
If the monitoring fails, this parameters become amber.
When the value is attained, this parameter becomes green.
‐ When monitored, the parameters appear in magenta and indicate that they are being monitored
by the FMGES.
‐ If the loading of the clearance in the secondary flight plan fails, parameters appear in amber.
Downlink messages appear in black:
‐ On a cyan background before sending
‐ On a green background while and after sending.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-20-10-00021164.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
MESSAGE STATUS
Indicates the status of the message or the response of the flight crew to a message received from
the active ATC center.
The status of the message changes to AFFIRM, when the flight crew
selects a positive answer to the ATC uplink message on the DCDU.
The status of the message changes to AFFIRM, when the flight crew
sends a positive answer to the ATC center.
The status of the message changes to NEGATV, when the flight crew
selects a negative answer to the ATC uplink message on the DCDU.
The status of the message changes to NEGATV, when the flight crew
sends a negative answer to the ATC center.
The status of the message changes to ROGER, when the flight crew
selects ROGER, in order to inform the ATC center that they received
and understood the uplink message.
The status of the message changes to ROGER, when the flight crew
sends a ROGER answer to the ATC center.
The status of the message changes to STBY, when the flight crew
selects STBY, in order to inform the ATC center that they need time
to answer the uplink message.
The status of the message changes to STBY, when the flight crew
sends a STBY answer to the ATC center.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-20 P 3/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The status of the message changes to UNABLE, when the flight crew
selects UNABLE, in order to inform the ATC center that they cannot
comply with the request.
The status of the message changes to UNABLE, when the flight crew
sends a UNABLE answer to the ATC center.
The status of the message changes to WILCO, when the flight
crew selects WILCO, in order to inform the ATC center that they
understood the request and that they will comply with it.
The status of the message changes to WILCO, when the flight crew
sends a WILCO answer to the ATC center.
Indicates that the received uplink message requires a response.
The status OPEN remains until the flight crew answers the uplink
message.
Indicates that:
‐ The flight crew did not answer the uplink message in due time, or
‐ The flight crew sent a downlink or a response message, but no
acknowledgment from the ground was received.
Indicates that a disconnection occurred during a pending uplink or
downlink message.
Note: The status field remains empty for:
‐ A downlink message sent to the active ATC center
‐ An uplink message for which no response is expected.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-20-10-00021166.0003001 / 21 MAR 17
FUNCTION KEYS
Depending on the nature of the message, the system automatically displays an appropriate
function by each function key.
Possible unctions are detailed below.
AFFIRM : When selected, prepares an affirmative response to accept an ATC
negotiation message (e.g. CAN YOU ACCEPT [altitude] AT [time]).
CANCEL : When selected, enables the flight crew to:
‐ Remove a prepared downlink message from the DCDU
‐ Cancel a selected reply to an uplink message.
CANNOT : When selected, prepares a negative answer to an OPEN negotiation
message from the ATC.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-20 P 4/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CLOSE : When selected, erases a message (from the DCDU screen) that was sent
to the ATC, or erases a message from the ATC that was answered. This
message is stored in the MSG RECORD. This is not applicable when the
answer is on stand-by (STBY).
LOAD : When selected, loads a flight plan from the ATC, or a parameter time
constraint, into the secondary flight plan.
MODIFY : When selected, accesses the MESSAGE MODIFY page or POSITION
REPORT page on the MCDU, in order to modify a message proposed by
the FMGES. MODIFY also enables to update parameters that the FMGES
provides to the DCDU.
NEGATV : When selected, prepares a negative response to an ATC message.
RECALL : When selected, recalls the most recently closed message if it was closed
within the last 5 min. If the flight crew selects the RECALL more than 5 min
after the last message was closed, the following message appears:
RECALL EMPTY
CONSULT MSG RECORD
ROGER : When selected, confirms the reception, and understanding of ATC
information or report request.
SEND : When selected, sends a message or an answer, that was prepared by using
other function keys (Example: WILCO, ROGER, AFFIRMATIVE, STBY, ...).
STBY : When selected, informs the ATC that the flight crew needs to delay the
answer.
UNABLE : When selected, rejects an ATC clearance.
WILCO : When selected, accepts an ATC clearance.
* : The function keys are operative, if an asterisk or a function is visible.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-20-10-00021166.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
FUNCTION KEYS
Depending on the nature of the message, the system automatically displays an appropriate
function by each function key.
Possible unctions are detailed below.
AFFIRM : When selected, prepares an affirmative response to accept an ATC
negotiation message
CANCEL : When selected, enables the flight crew to:
‐ Remove a prepared downlink message from the DCDU
‐ Cancel a selected reply to an uplink message.
CANNOT : When selected, prepares a negative answer to an OPEN negotiation
message from the ATC.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-20 P 5/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CLOSE : When selected, erases a message (from the DCDU screen) that was sent
to the ATC, or erases a message from the ATC that was answered. This
message is stored in the MSG RECORD. This is not applicable when the
answer is on stand-by (STBY).
LOAD : When selected, loads a flight plan from the ATC, or a parameter time
constraint, into the secondary flight plan.
MODIFY : When selected, accesses the MESSAGE MODIFY page or POSITION
REPORT page on the MCDU, in order to modify a message proposed by
the FMGES. MODIFY also enables to update parameters that the FMGES
provides to the DCDU.
NEGATV : When selected, prepares a negative response to an ATC message.
OTHER : When selected, displays the other functions that could be applicable to the
current message, but are not currently displayed.
RECALL : When selected, recalls the last message that was removed from the screen,
using the CLOSE function.
ROGER : When selected, confirms the reception, and understanding of ATC
information or report request.
SEND : When selected, sends a message or an answer, that was prepared by using
other function keys (e.g.: WILCO, ROGER, AFFIRMATIVE, STBY, ...).
STBY : When selected, informs the ATC that the flight crew needs to delay the
answer.
UNABLE : When selected, rejects an ATC clearance.
WILCO : When selected, accepts an ATC clearance.
* : The function keys are operative, if an asterisk or a function is visible.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-20-10-00021168.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-20 P 6/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MESSAGE NUMBER INDICATION

Indicates the rank of the message that is displayed on the DCDU.
If there is only one message on the DCDU, the message number information does not appear in
the information field. In the case of a new message reception, the message number indication
flashes.
PAGE NUMBER INDICATION
Indicates the page number of the message that is displayed on the DCDU.
If the message contains only one page, the page number information does not appear in the
information field.
MESSAGE INFORMATION AREA
ANSWER MSG (amber) : The maximum number of pending uplink messages is
reached.
COM FAULT (amber) : The communication means are faulty.
COM NOT AVAIL (amber) : The communication means are temporarily not available.
COM NOT INIT (amber) : The router is not initialized.
CHECK CLRCE (amber) : The response for a positive reminder of a deferred
clearance is lost.
FILE FULL (amber) : The maximum number of downlink messages, accessible
on the DCDUs, is reached.
LINK LOST (amber) : The data link connection is abnormally lost.
LOAD FAILED (amber) : The loading of the flight plan, contained in the current
message, has failed.
LOAD PARTIAL (amber) : The loading of the flight plan, contained in the current
message, was only partially done.
LOAD SEC OK (white) : The loading of the flight plan, contained in the current
message, is successful.
LOADING SEC (white) : The flight plan, or time constraint, contained in the current
message is being loaded in the secondary flight plan of the
FMGES.
LOAD UNAVAIL (amber) : The loading is not possible.
MCDU FOR TEXT (white) : A negative answer for a pending uplink message is
initiated.
MCDU FOR MODIF (white) : The current message is in modification on the MCDU.
MONIT CNCLD (white) : The FMGES monitoring is cancelled.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-20 P 7/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MONIT FAILED (amber) : The requested FMGES monitoring failed to start.

MONIT LOST (amber) : The FMGES monitoring is lost.
MONIT UNAVAIL (amber) : The FMGES monitoring is not possible.
MONITORING (white) : The FMGES monitors the parameter of the current
message.
NO ATC REPLY (amber) : The ATC center did not answer to the request within 7 min
30 s.
NO FM DATA (white) : The FMGES is not able to provide the ATC requested
parameters.
NO MORE MSG (white) : The minimum/maximum number of accessible messages is
reached.
NO MORE PGE (white) : The minimum/maximum number of accessible pages is
reached.
OVERFLW CLOSED (amber) : The maximum number of non-pending messages is
reached, and a new non-pending message is stored in the
file.
PARTIAL DATA (white) : The FMGES cannot provide all the ATC requested
parameters.
PRINT FAILED (amber) : The printing was requested from the DCDUs and the
printing failed.
PRINT UNAVAIL (white) : The printing was requested from the DCDUs, while the
printer is not available.
PRINTING (white) : The printing was requested from the DCDUs and the
printing is in progress.
RECALL MODE (white) : The last closed message from the DCDU is recalled, if the
flight crew presses the "RECALL key" within the last 5 min
of the message closure.
REMINDER (white) : The current message was automatically recalled by the
FMGES.
SEND FAILED (amber) : The transmission of a reply to an uplink message or of a
downlink is not successful.
SENDING (white) : The sending of the current message is in progress.
SENT (white) : The current message was sent.
WAIT FM DATA (white) : The FMGES is preparing an answer to the ATC’s request
for navigation parameters.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-20 P 8/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-20-10-00021168.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

Message Information Area on the DCDU
MESSAGE NUMBER INDICATION

Indicates the rank of the message that is displayed on the DCDU.
If there is only one message on the DCDU, the message number information does not appear in
the information field. In the case of a new message reception, the message number indication
flashes.
PAGE NUMBER INDICATION
Indicates the page number of the message that is displayed on the DCDU.
If the message contains only one page, the page number information does not appear in the
information field.
MESSAGE INFORMATION AREA
ANSWER MSG (amber) : Maximum number of pending uplink messages is reached.
FILE FULL (amber) : Maximum number of downlink messages, accessible on the DCDUs,
is reached.
DOWNLINK LOST : Transmission of a request is unsuccessful.
(amber)
LINK LOST (amber) : Communication with the ATC is unavailable (displayed on any
message pending when the loss occurred).
LOAD FAILED (amber) : The loading of the flight plan, contained in the current message, has
failed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-20 P 9/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LOAD OK (white) : The loading of the flight plan, contained in the current message, was
successful.
LOAD PARTIAL : The loading of the flight plan, contained in the current message, was
(amber) only partially done.
LOAD UNAVAIL : Loading is not possible.
(amber)
LOADING (white) : The flight plan, or time constraint, contained in the current message is
being loaded in the secondary flight plan of the FMGES.
MCDU FOR MODIF : Follows pressing of the “MODIFY key.
(white)
MCDU FOR TEXT : Initiation of a negative answer for a pending uplink message.
(white)
MONIT CNCLD (white) : FMGES monitoring is cancelled.
MONIT FAILED (amber) : FMGES monitoring was requested, but failed to start.
MONIT LOST (amber) : FMGES monitoring is lost.
MONIT UNAVAIL : FMGES monitoring is not possible.
(amber)
MONITORING (white) : The FMGES is monitoring the parameter of the current message.
NO ATC REPLY : No answer received within 5 min.
(amber)
NO FM DATA (white) : The FMGES is unable to provide the ATC-requested parameters.
NO MORE MSG (white) : Follows pressing of the “MSG + “ or “MSG - key, when no more
messages are accessible.
NO MORE PGE (white) : Follows pressing of the “PGE + or “PGE - key, when no more pages
are accessible.
OVERFLW STORED : Maximum number of non-pending messages is reached, and a new
(white) non-pending message is registered in the file.
PRINT FAILED (amber) : Printing was requested from the DCDUs and printing failed.
PRINTING (white) : Printing was requested from the DCDUs and printing is in progress.
PRINTING UNAVAIL : Printing was requested from the DCDUs, but the printer is
(white) unavailable.
RECALL MODE (white) : Recalls the last stored message.
REMINDER (white) : The current message was automatically recalled by the FMGES.
RESPONSE LOST : Transmission of a reply to an uplink message is unsuccessful.
(amber)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-20 P 10/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SENDING (white) : The current message is being sent.

SENT (white) : The current message was sent.
WAIT FM DATA (white) : The FMGES is preparing an answer to the ATC’s request for
navigation parameters.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-20-10-00021170.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
TIME
Indicated time corresponds to the UTC time of:
‐ Uplink message, when the ATC center sent the message.
‐ Downlink message, when the flight crew sent the message to the ATC center.
Note: If the time when the ATC center sent the message is not available:
• No time appears in the TIME area
• The “(RECEIVED AT XXXXZ) indication appears at the end of the message, where
XXXX is the reception time of the uplink message
• If the clock fails, the time area in the answer to an uplink is empty if no time stamp
was previously available.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-20-10-00021170.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

TIME
Indicated time corresponds to the time when the DCDU receives the message from the ATC or the
FMGES.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-20-10-00021171.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
BRT/DIM KEY
Adjusts the brightness of the DCDU
DESTINATION/ORIGIN ATC CENTER
Indicates the active ATC center that sent or received the message.
MESSAGE SCROLL KEY (MSG- / MSG+)
When pressed, displays the previous/next message in the file.
NEXT/PREVIOUS PAGE KEYS (PGE- / PGE+)
When pressed, displays the previous/next page of the message, if the message cannot be
displayed on one single page.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-20 P 11/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
PRINT KEY
Prints the message that is currently displayed on the DCDU.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-20 P 12/12

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MCDU Datalink Pages
INTRODUCTION
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-10-00021070.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
The MCDU MENU page enables access to datalink pages when the flight crew selects ATSU.
For more information about MCDU MENU page,
Refer to DSC-22_20-50-10-20 MCDU MENU Page
The ATSU of the MCDU MENU enables to access ATSU DATALINK page. The ATSU DATALINK
page provides a subsequent access to:
‐ AOC MENU pages
Note: Due to the customization of AOC applications  by each operator that is not monitored
by Airbus, this Controls and Indicators chapter does not contain a description of controls
and indicators associated with AOC applications.
‐ ATC MENU pages
‐ COMM MENU pages
‐ DATALINK STATUS page
Refer to DSC-46-10-40-30 DATALINK STATUS
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-10-00021070.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
The MCDU MENU page enables access to datalink pages when the flight crew selects ATSU.
For more information about MCDU MENU page,
The ATSU of the MCDU MENU enables to access ATSU DATALINK page. The ATSU DATALINK
page provides a subsequent access to:
‐ AOC MENU pages
Note: Due to the customization of AOC application  by each operator that is not monitored
by Airbus, this Controls and Indicators chapter does not contain a description of controls
and indicators associated with AOC applications.
‐ ATC MENU pages
‐ COMM pages.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 1/48

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-10-00021104.0003001 / 21 MAR 17

Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-10-00021104.0002001 / 21 MAR 17

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 2/48

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-10-00021295.0002001 / 21 MAR 17

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 3/48

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-10-00021295.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

ADS-C DETAIL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021089.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
From [1L] to [4L] Displays currently ADS-C connected centers.

[6L] CONNECTION STATUS When selected, the MCDU displays the CONNECTION STATUS
page.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 4/48

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
From [1R] to [5R] Disconnects the corresponding ADS-C connected center.
ADS DETAIL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021089.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
From [1L] to [4L] Displays currently ADS-C connected centers.

page.
From [1R] to [5R] Disconnects the corresponding ADS-C connected center.
ATC LAT REQ

Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021081.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 5/48

FCOM ← B to D → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
[1L] DIR TO Enters a selected waypoint, in order to proceed to, from the present
position.
[2L] SID or STAR Enters a request of departure or arrival procedure, depending on the
current flight phase.
The departure procedure can only be proposed, before takeoff.
The arrival procedure can only be proposed, after takeoff.
[3L] HEADING Enters a heading, in order to prepare a heading change request.
[5L] ALL FIELDS ERASE Erases data that were entered on:
‐ ATC LAT REQ page
‐ Other associated pages.
[6L] ATC MENU RETURN When selected, the DCDU displays the ATC MENU page.
[1R] WX DEV UP TO Enters a request of offset from the initial route, due to weather
conditions.
[2R] OFFSET/START AT Enters an offset from the initial route.
START AT field is optional. The flight crew can enter a position or time
into the START AT field .
[3R] GROUND TRK Enters a ground track of track change request.
[4R] WHEN CAN WE Prepares a negotiation request, in order to return to the initial route.
EXPECT BACK ON ROUTE The same negotiation request can be prepared on the WHEN CAN WE
EXPECT page ([4R]).
[5R] ADD TEXT When selected, the MCDU displays the TEXT page. ADD TEXT is
active, while a message is being created.
[6R] ATC REQ DISPL When selected, the DCDU displays prepared message.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 6/48

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ATC MENU
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-20-00021071.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
[1L] LAT REQ When selected, the MCDU displays the ATC LAT REQ page.
[2L] WHEN CAN WE When selected, the MCDU displays the WHEN CAN WE EXPECT
page.
[4L] MSG RECORD When selected, the MCDU displays the MSG RECORD page.
[5L] CONNECTION When selected, the MCDU displays the CONNECTION page.
[6L] ATSU DLK RETURN When selected, the MCDU displays the ATSU DATALINK page.
[1R] VERT REQ When selected, the MCDU displays the ATC VERT REQ page.
[2R] OTHER REQ When selected, the MCDU displays the ATC OTHER REQ page.
[3R] TEXT When selected, the MCDU displays the TEXT page.
[4R] REPORTS When selected, the MCDU displays the ATC REPORTS page.
[6R] EMERGENCY When selected, the MCDU displays the EMERGENCY page.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 7/48

FCOM E→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-20-00021071.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

[1L] LAT REQ When selected, the MCDU displays the ATC LAT REQ page.
[2L] WHEN CAN WE When selected, the MCDU displays the WHEN CAN WE EXPECT
page.
[4L] MSG RECORD When selected, the MCDU displays the MSG RECORD page.
[5L] NOTIFICATION When selected, the MCDU displays the NOTIFICATION page.
[6L] ATSU DLK RETURN When selected, the MCDU displays the ATSU DATALINK page.
[1R] VERT REQ When selected, the MCDU displays the ATC VERT REQ page.
[2R] OTHER REQ When selected, the MCDU displays the ATC OTHER REQ page.
[3R] TEXT When selected, the MCDU displays the TEXT page.
[4R] REPORTS When selected, the MCDU displays the ATC REPORTS page.
[5R] CONNECTION STATUS When selected, the MCDU displays the CONNECTION STATUS
page.
[6R] EMERGENCY When selected, the MCDU displays the EMERGENCY page.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 8/48

FCOM ←E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ATC OTHER REQ

Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021083.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
[1L] VOICE CONTACT Requests voice contact with the ATC center.
[2L] OWN Prepares:
SEPARATION & VMC ‐ Request of Visual Meteorological Conditions (VMC) procedure
‐ Request, in order to be to maintain own separations, at the captain's
initiative.
[3L] CLEARANCE Prepares a clearance request.
[5L] ALL FIELDS Erases all data that were entered on the page, and erases data that were
ERASE entered on other associated pages.
[6L] ATC MENU When selected, the MCDU displays the ATC MENU page.
RETURN
[1R] FREQ Enters the voice frequency that is necessary for voice contact with the ATC.
[5R] ADD TEXT When selected, the MCDU displays the TEXT page. ADD TEXT is active,
while a message is being created.
[6R] ATC REQ DISPL When selected, the MCDU displays prepared message.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 9/48

FCOM F 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ATC REPORTS
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021093.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Line 1 Displays the status of the AUTO POS REPORT function.

[2L] SET OFF or SET Activates (or deactivates) the automation position report function.
ON
[3L] MANUAL POS When selected, the MCDU displays the POSITION REPORT page.
REPORT
[4L] MSG MODIFY When selected, the MCDU displays the MSG MODIFY page.
RETURN
[4R] BACK ON ROUTE Prepares the BACK ON ROUTE message.
[6R] ATC REP DISPL When selected, the DCDU displays prepared BACK ON ROUTE message.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 10/48

FCOM G 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ATC VERT REQ

Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021082.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
ATC VERT REQ PAGE 1/2
[1L] CLB TO/START AT Prepares a request, in order to climb to a new altitude.

START AT field is optional, and can be filled in with:
‐ Position
‐ Time.
If the request is deferred, START AT field should be filled in with the
starting-climb waypoint.
[2L] DES TO/START AT Prepares a request, in order to descend to a new altitude.
If the request is deferred, START AT field should be filled in with the
starting-descent waypoint.
[3L] WHEN CAN WE Prepares a negotiation request, in order to climb to a higher altitude.
EXPECT HIGHER ALT If a lower altitude was selected, setting a higher altitude deselects the
lower altitude.
The same negotiation request can be prepared on the WHEN CAN
WE EXPECT page ([1L]).
[5L] ALL FIELDS ERASE Erases all data that were entered on the page, and erases data that
were entered on other associated pages.
[6L] ATC MENU RETURN When selected, the MCDU displays the ATC MENU page.
[1R] ALT Prepares a request of new altitude.
[2R] SPD Prepares a request of new speed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 11/48

FCOM H→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
[3R] WHEN CAN WE Prepares a negotiation request, in order to descend to a lower

EXPECT LOWER ALT altitude.
If a higher altitude was selected, setting a lower altitude deselects the
higher altitude. The same negotiation request can be prepared on the
WHEN CAN WE EXPECT page ([1R]).
[4R] WHEN CAN SPD Prepares a negotiation request of new speed-deferred clearance.
WE EXPECT page ([3R]).
ATC VERT REQ PAGE 1/2
[1L] BLOCK ALT Prepares a request, in order to operate within an altitude interval
(e.g.: FL 370/FL 410).
[2L] CRZ CLB TO Prepares a request of cruise climb segment, up to the entered cruise
altitude.
[4L] WHEN CAN WE Prepares a negotiation request of cruise climb segment, up to the
EXCEPT CRZ CLB TO entered cruise altitude.
WE EXPECT page ([2L]).
[5L] ALL FIELDS ERASE Erase all data that were entered on the page, and erases data that
were entered on other associated pages.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 12/48

FCOM ←H→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
[1R] VMC DESCENT Prepares a request of Visual Meteorological Condition (VMC)

descent.
[2R] SPD RANGE Prepares a request, in order to operate within a speed range.
[4R] WHEN CAN WE Prepares a negotiation request, in order to operate within a speed
EXPECT SPD RANGE range.
WE EXPECT page ([3R]).
ATSU DATALINK
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021074.0003001 / 21 MAR 17
[1R] AOC MENU When selected, the MCDU displays the AOC MENU page.
[5R] DATALINK STATUS When selected, the MCDU displays the DATALINK STATUS
page.
[6R] COMM MENU When selected, the MCDU displays the COMM MENU page.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 13/48

FCOM ← H to I → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ATSU DATALINK
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021074.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
[1R] AOC MENU When selected, the MCDU displays the AOC MENU page.
[6R] COMM When selected, the MCDU displays the COMM MENU page.
COMM CONFIG
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021078.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
EXAMPLE This is an example of the COMM CONFIG page. Information, that are displayed
on the COMM CONFIG page, depend on datalink customization, selected by each
operator.
E.g.: If a router configuration file, integrated in the ATSU, contains a customized
VHF scan mask, the access to the VHF 3 SCAN SELECT page will not display. The
VHF 3 SCAN SELECT page will not accessible.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 14/48

FCOM ← I to J → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 15/48

FCOM ←J→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EXAMPLE [1L] A/C ICAO CODE Displays the aircraft ICAO code.
Note: If the FMGEC does not enter the paramater
automatically, the flight crew can enter the
A/C ICAO CODE manually.
[2L] A/C REGISTR Displays the aircraft registration.

A/C REGISTR manually.
[3L] ACARS A/L ID Displays the ACARS airline identification.

ACARS A/L ID manually.
[4L] STANDARD A/L ID Displays the standard airline identification.

STANDARD A/L ID manually.
[5L] MULTICAST Displays the optional multicast ACARS address.

[6L] RETURN When selected, the MCDU displays the COMM MENU
page.
[1R] CONFIG ACTIVATE When selected, the system activates parameters that
were entered manually.
[5R] VHF3 SCAN SEL When selected, the DCDU displays the VHF3 SCAN
SELECT page.
[5R] MED ADV Sets the transition status of labels on/off.
[6R] PAGE PRINT When selected, the printer prints information.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 16/48

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
COMM CONFIG
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021078.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
EXAMPLE This is an example of the COMM CONFIG page. Information, that are displayed
on the COMM CONFIG page, depend on datalink customization, selected by each
operator.
E.g.: If a router configuration file, integrated in the ATSU, contains a customized
VHF scan mask, the access to the VHF 3 SCAN SELECT page will not display. The
VHF 3 SCAN SELECT page will not accessible.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 17/48

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EXAMPLE [1L] A/C ICAO CODE Displays the aircraft ICAO code.
A/C ICAO CODE manually.
[2L] A/C REGISTR Displays the aircraft registration.

A/C REGISTR manually.
[3L] ACARS A/L ID Displays the ACARS airline identification.

ACARS A/L ID manually.
[4L] STANDARD A/L ID Displays the standard airline identification.

STANDARD A/L ID manually.
page.
[1R] CONFIG ACTIVATE When selected, the system activates parameters that
were entered manually.
[4R] VHF3 SCAN SEL When selected, the DCDU displays the VHF3 SCAN
SELECT page.
[6R] PAGE PRINT When selected, the printer prints information.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 18/48

FCOM ←J 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
COMM MENU
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021080.0003001 / 21 MAR 17
[1L] VHF3 DATA MODE When selected, the MCDU displays the VHF3 DATA MODE page.
[6L] RETURN When selected, the MCDU displays the ATSU DATALINK page.
[1R] COMM CONFIG When selected, the MCDU displays the COMM CONFIG page.
[4R] MAINTENANCE When selected, the MCDU displays the MAINTENANCE page.
[6R] AUTO PRINT Sets the auto-print on or off.
COMM MENU
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021080.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 19/48

FCOM K→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
[1L] VHF3 DATA MODE When selected, the MCDU displays the VHF3 DATA MODE page.
[1R] COMM CONFIG When selected, the MCDU displays the COMM CONFIG page.
[3R] COMM STATUS When selected, the MCDU displays the COMM STATUS page.
[4R] MAINTENANCE When selected, the MCDU displays the MAINTENANCE page.
[6R] AUTO PRINT Sets the auto-print on or off.
COMM STATUS
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021149.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
VHF 3 Line 1 Displays datalink status:

‐ DLK AVAIL
The datalink communication is established and available.
‐ DLK NOT AVAIL
The datalink communication is not established.
‐ INOP
The VHF 3 datalink is not operative.
‐ NO NETWORK
The VHF 3 datalink is inhibited.
‐ VOICE
The VHF 3 datalink operates in the voice mode.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 20/48

FCOM ← K to L → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
VHF 3 Line 2 Displays availability of datalink applications:

‐ ATC / AOC
Datalink communication via ATC and AOC applications is
available.
‐ ATC ONLY
Datalink communication via ATC applications is available.
‐ AOC ONLY
Datalink communication via AOC applications is available.
SATCOM Line 1 Displays datalink status:
‐ DLK AVAIL
‐ DLK NOT AVAIL
‐ INOP
‐ NOT INSTALLED
The VHF 3 datalink is not installed.
SATCOM Line 2 Displays availability of datalink applications:
‐ ATC / AOC
available.
‐ ATC ONLY
‐ AOC ONLY
HF Line 1 Displays datalink status:
‐ DLK AVAIL
‐ DLK NOT AVAIL
‐ INOP
‐ VOICE
‐ NOT INSTALLED
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 21/48

FCOM ←L→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
HF Line 2 Displays availability of datalink applications:

‐ ATC / AOC
available.
‐ ATC ONLY
‐ AOC ONLY
[6R] PAGE PRINT When selected, the printer prints the information.
CONNECTION
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021086.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
[1L] NOTIFICATION When selected, the MCDU displays the NOTIFICATION page.
page.
[5R] MAX UPLINK DELAY When selected, the MCDU displays the MAX UPLINK DELAY
page.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 22/48

FCOM ← L to M 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CONNECTION STATUS
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021088.0003001 / 21 MAR 17
[1L] ACTIVE ATC Displays the currently active ATC for CPDLC connection.
[2L] NEXT ATC Displays the next ATC for CPDLC connection.
Line 4 Displays the status of the ADS-C function (ARMED, CONNECTED, or OFF). The
default setting of ADS-C is ARMED.
[4L] SET OFF or Activates / deactivates the ADS-C function when the Automatic Dependent
SET ARMED Surveillance-Contract (ADS-C) is OFF or ARMED.
RETURN
[1R] ALL ATC Disconnects all established CPDLC connections.
DISCONNECT
[5R] ADS DETAIL When selected, the MCDU displays the ADS-C DETAIL page.
Note: The ADS-C DETAIL page can only be accessed, if ADS-C connections
are established.
[6R] When selected, the MCDU displays the NOTIFICATION page.

NOTIFICATION
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 23/48

FCOM N→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CONNECTION STATUS
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021088.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
[1L] ACTIVE ATC Displays the currently active ATC for CPDLC connection.
[2L] NEXT ATC Displays the next ATC for CPDLC connection.
Line 4 Displays the status of the ADS-C function (ARMED, CONNECTED, or OFF). The
default setting of ADS-C is ARMED.
[4L] SET OFF or Activates / deactivates the ADS-C function when the Automatic Dependent
SET ARMED Surveillance-Contract (ADS-C) is OFF or ARMED.
RETURN
[1R] Disconnects all established CPDLC connections.
DISCONNECT
[3R] MAX UPLINK Displays the maximum delay that is authorized for an ATC answer. The default
DELAY setting of maximum delay is NONE.
If the NONE of max uplink delay is set, datalink messages are not rejected, due
to a long transmission time.
[5R] ADS DETAIL When selected, the MCDU displays the ADS DETAIL page.
Note: The ADS DETAIL page can only be accessed, if ADS-C connections are
established.
[6R] When selected, the MCDU displays the NOTIFICATION page.

NOTIFICATION
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 24/48

FCOM ←N 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DATALINK STATUS
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021075.0002001 / 22 MAR 17
VHF 3 Line 1 Displays datalink status:

‐ DLK AVAIL
‐ DLK NOT AVAIL
‐ INOP
‐ NO NETWORK
The VHF 3 datalink is inhibited.
‐ VOICE
VHF 3 Line 2 Displays availability of datalink applications:
‐ ATC / AOC
available.
‐ ATC ONLY
‐ AOC ONLY
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 25/48

FCOM O→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SATCOM Line 1 Displays datalink status:

‐ DLK AVAIL
‐ DLK NOT AVAIL
‐ INOP
‐ NOT INSTALLED
SATCOM Line 2 Displays availability of datalink applications:
‐ ATC / AOC
available.
‐ ATC ONLY
‐ AOC ONLY
HF Line 1 Displays datalink status:
‐ DLK AVAIL
‐ DLK NOT AVAIL
‐ INOP
‐ VOICE
‐ NOT INSTALLED
HF Line 2 Displays availability of datalink applications:
‐ ATC / AOC
available.
‐ ATC ONLY
‐ AOC ONLY
[6R] PAGE PRINT When selected, the printer prints the information.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 26/48

FCOM ←O 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EMERGENCY
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021092.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
EMERGENCY PAGE 1/2
[1L] MAYDAY Generates a downlink message that indicates a critical failure on

board.
[2L] PANPAN Generates a downlink message that indicates a major failure on
board.
[4L] VOICE CONTACT Requests voice contact with the ATC. The default frequency is
121.5 MHz.
[5L] ALL FIELDS ERASE Erases all data that were entered on the page, and erases the data
that were entered on other associated pages.
[1R] SET OFF or SET ON Activates, or deactivates the ADS-C emergency mode.
The title line displays the mode status:
‐ EMERG ADS-C: ON, when the mode is activated
‐ EMERG ADS-C:OFF, when the mode is not activated.
[2R] DESCENDING TO Displays the FCU-selected altitude of the descent.

[3R] DIVERTING/VIA Enters the route, or airport, the aircraft is diverting to.
[4R] FREQ Enters the requested voice frequency of voice contact with the ATC.
[5R] ADD TEXT When selected, the MCDU displays the TEXT page. ADD TEXT
activates, while a message is being created.
[6R] ATC EMERG DISPL When selected, the DCDU displays prepared emergency message.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 27/48

FCOM P→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EMERGENCY PAGE 2/2
[1L] CLBING TO Displays the FCU-selected altitude of the climb.

[2L] SOULS Enters the number of passengers on board.
Note: SOULS and ENDURANCE fields are linked:
‐ If one field is cleared, this automatically clears the
other.
‐ If one field is filled in, this automatically fills in the
other.
‐ If a field is empty, it is filled in with a default values
(999 for SOULS and 0 h 00 for ENDURANCE).
[3L] EMERGENCY CANCEL Cancels the previous emergency message.

Note: If EMERGENCY CANCEL is selected, it deselects the
PANPAN or MAYDAY items, and deactivates the ADS-C
emergency mode.
[5L] ALL FIELDS ERASE Erases all data that were entered on the page, and erases data
[1R] OFFSETTING Enters the offset value from the flight plan.
[2R] ENDURANCE Enters the maximum remaining flight time, limited by fuel
autonomy.
activates, while a message is being created.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 28/48

FCOM ←P→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
[6R] ATC EMERG DISPL When selected, the DCDU displays prepared emergency
message.
MAX UPLINK DELAY

Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021090.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
[2L] ACTIVE ATC Indicates the ICAO code of active ATC center.
When no active ATC connection is established, four dashes “----“
replace the ICAO code.
[4L] MAX UPLINK DELAY Displays the maximum delay that is authorized for an ATC
answer. The maximum delay is NONE by default.
If the NONE of max uplink delay is set, datalink messages are not
rejected, due to a long transmission time.
Note: The flight crew should not modify this field, unless they
are instructed to do so.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 29/48

FCOM ← P to Q 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MSG LOG
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021091.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Lines 1 to 4 Display a summary of each recorded message:

‐ Time
‐ ATC center
‐ Message status
‐ Beginning of the message
The latest recorded message is displayed at the top of the message
record list.
Pressing the left key, adjacent to each message title, displays full
content of recorded message.
[5L] MSG LOG ERASE Clears all the recorded messages.
When pressing MSG LOG ERASE, MSG LOG ERASE is replaced by
ERASE MSG LOG CONFIRM, in order to prevent an inadvertent erase.
[6R] MSG RECORD PRINT When selected, the printer prints all recorded messages.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 30/48

FCOM R 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MESSAGE MODIFY
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021095.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Lines 2 and 3 Displays the label and parameters that can be modified.
[5L] PAGE CANCEL Cancels the message modification. When the MESSAGE MODIFY
page is closed, the MCDU displays the ATC MENU page and the
function keys of the DCDU update.
[6L] ATC REPORTS RETURN When selected, the MCDU displays the ATC REPORTS page.
active while a message is being created.
[6R] ATC MODIF DISPL When selected, the DCDU displays prepared message.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 31/48

FCOM S→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MESSAGE MODIFY
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021095.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Line 1 Displays the name of the current ATC center.

Lines 2 and 3 Displays the label and parameters that can be modified.
[5L] PAGE CANCEL When selected, the MCDU displays the ATC MENU page.
[5R] ADD TEXT When selected, the MCDU displays TEXT page. ADD TEXT is
active while a message is being created.
[6R] ATC MODIF DISPL When selected, the DCDU displays prepared message.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 32/48

FCOM ←S 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MSG RECORD
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021150.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Lines 1 to 4 Display a summary of each recorded message:

‐ Time
‐ ATC center
‐ Message status
‐ Beginning of the message
The latest recorded message is displayed at the top of the message
record list.
Pressing the left key, adjacent to each message title, displays full
content of recorded message.
[5L] MSG RECORD ERASE Clears all the recorded messages.
When pressing MSG RECORD ERASE, MSG RECORD ERASE is
replaced by ERASE MSG RECORD CONFIRM, in order to prevent an
inadvertent erase.
[6R] MSG RECORD PRINT When selected, the printer prints all recorded messages.
Note: If sending a downlink message fails, the message appears in white on the MSG RECORD
page.
EXAMPLE Indication of Flight Number Change
When the flight number changes, a specific message with the new flight number
value is stored in the message record.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 33/48

FCOM T→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EXAMPLE Line 3 : The specific message of the flight number change,

indicating:
‐ New flight number
‐ Date of change.
NOTIFICATION
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021087.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
[1L] ATC FLT NBR Displays the flight number, filled by the FMGES. The FLT NBR
cannot be modified via this page.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 34/48

FCOM ← T to U → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Line 2 ATC CENTER Displays the logon status in front of the ATC CENTER. The logon
status can indicate:
‐ NOTIFYING indicates that the logon is in progress.
‐ NOTIF FAILED indicates that the logon has failed.
The logon status disappears, when the logon notification is
completed.
[2L] ATC CENTER Enters the ATC ICAO code for notification. The entered ATC ICAO
code is displayed in large cyan font.
Note: At initialization, a default code is displayed in small cyan
font, and corresponds to one of following options:
‐ Last active ATC with which an active CPDLC
connection was previously established
‐ Last manually-entered ATC code
‐ 4 amber boxes appear.
[4L] Displays the last ATC center, to which a successful logon

notification was performed.
Note: NOTIFICATION UNAVAILABLE is displayed in line 5, if
the communication means, the aircraft position, or the
flight number are unavailable.
[2R] NOTIFY Sends a notification to the ATC. NOTIFY is not active, if the
communication means, the aircraft position, or flight number are
unavailable.
[6R] CONNECTION STATUS When selected, the MCDU displays the CONNECTION STATUS
page.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 35/48

FCOM ←U 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
POSITION REPORT
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021076.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
POSITION REPORT PAGE 1/3
Note: The FMGES automatically fills the data into all fields. The pilot can overwrite these data.
[1L] OVHD Displays the last-reported waypoint. OVHD corresponds to the
last-sequenced waypoint.
[2L] PPOS Displays the aircraft's present position.
[3L] TO Displays the TO waypoint of the flight plan.
[4L] NEXT Displays the NEXT waypoint of the flight plan.
[1R] UTC/ALT Displays the time and altitude at the last-reported waypoint.
[2R] UTC/ALT Displays the time and altitude at the aircraft's present position.
[3R] UTC Displays the predicted time of arrival at the following waypoint.
is active, while a message is being created.
[6R] ATC REP DISPL When selected, the DCDU displays prepared message.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 36/48

FCOM V→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: The FMGES automatically fills the data into fields of Wind, ETA, and SAT. The pilot can
overwrite these data.
[1L] WIND Displays the current wind (speed and direction).
[2L] ICING (TLMS) Enters the level of icing:
‐ T for Trace icing
‐ L for Light icing
‐ M for Moderate icing
‐ S for Severe Icing.
[3L] ETA Displays the Estimated Time at Arrival.
[1R] SAT Displays the Static Air Temperature (SAT).
[2R] TURB (LMS) Enters the level of turbulence:
‐ L for Light turbulence
‐ M for Moderate turbulence
‐ S for Severe turbulence.
[3R] ENDURANCE Enters the remaining fuel and corresponding flight time.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 37/48

FCOM ←V→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: The FMGES automatically fills the data into all fields. The pilot can overwrite these data.
[1L] SPEED Displays the current speed.
[2L] VERT SPEED Displays the current vertical speed.
[3L] HEADING Displays the current true heading.
[4L] DSCENDING TO Displays the current descending target altitude, if any.
Note: The DSCENDING TO displays, if:
‐ a valid target of descend altitude is in the FMGES, or
‐ the FMGES fails, or
‐ the FMGES is turned OFF.
[1R] GROUND SPD Displays the current ground speed.
[2R] DEVIATING Displays the current offset from the flight plan.
[3R] TRACK ANGLE Displays the current track angle.
[4R] CLBING TO Displays the current climbing target altitude, if any.
Note: CLBING TO displays, if:
‐ a valid target of climbing altitude is in the FMGES, or
‐ the FMGES fails, or
‐ the FMGES is turned OFF.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 38/48

FCOM ←V→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TEXT
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021084.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
TEXT PAGE 1/2
[1L] DUE TO A/C When selected, DUE TO A/C PERFORM justification is inserted into the
PERFORM datalink message.
[2L] DUE TO When selected, DUE TO WEATHER conditions (justification) is inserted
WEATHER into the datalink message.
Note: When the pilot reports an offset, due to a weather, the DCDU will
not display the direction of the offset.
[3L] DUE TO When selected, DUE TO TURBULENCE justification is inserted into the
TURBULENCE datalink message.
[4L] FREE TEXT Adds a free text to any request.
If more than one line is necessary, proceed to the TEXT page 2/2.
[5L] ALL FIELDS Erases all data that were entered.
ERASE
RETURN
[1R] DUE TO When selected, DUE TO MEDICAL justification is inserted into the datalink
MEDICAL message.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 39/48

FCOM ← V to W → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
[2R] DUE TO When selected, DUE TO TECHNICAL justification is inserted into the
TECHNICAL datalink message.
[3R] AT PILOT When selected, AT PILOT DISCRETION is inserted into the datalink
DISCRETION message, in order to request an authorization to freely execute clearance.
[6R] ATC XXX DISPL When selected, the DCDU displays prepared message.
XXX refers to a page that is associated with the free text:
‐ TEXT (no associated page)
‐ REQ (request pages)
‐ EMERG (emergency pages)
‐ REP (position report pages)
‐ MODIF (modify page)
TEXT PAGE 2/2
Lines 1 to 4 Adds a free text to any request.

If text has been written on the fourth line of page 1, this line reappears on the
first line of page 2.
[5L] ALL FIELDS Erases all data that was entered on the page, and erases the data that was
ERASE entered on other associated pages.
RETURN
[6R] ATC TEXT When selected, the DCDU displays prepared message.
DISPL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 40/48

FCOM ←W 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
VHF3 DATA MODE

Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021077.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
EXAMPLE This is an example of the VHF3 DATA MODE page. Information, that are displayed
on the VHF3 DATA MODE page, depend on the service provider and datalink
customization, selected by each operator.
The VHF3 DATA MODE displays regions, and associated frequencies of datalink
service providers that were selected.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 41/48

FCOM X→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EXAMPLE Line 1 Displays:

‐ Mode of VHF provider selection:
‐ MANUAL
The VHF 3 is tuned to a frequency manually
selected by the flight crew via the VHF3 DATA
MODE page.
‐ AUTO
The VHF 3 is tuned to a frequency automatically
selected by the ATSU.
‐ VOICE
The VHF 3 is in the voice mode.
‐ SCAN
The VHF 3 system scans for a data frequency.
‐ AUTO DATA INHIB
No datalink service provider is available in the
area.
‐ Datalink service provider identification
‐ The frequency of the service provide that the system
is tuned to
[2L] SITA EUR/AF Displays the service provider (SITA Europe/Africa). In
this example, the ATSU is connected to the provider
SITA Europe/Africa (136.975 MHz).
page.
[1R] REVERT AUTO Reverts to VHF 3 auto-tuning.
[2R] ARINC EUROPE When selected, the VHF 3 tunes to the frequency
of the ARINC EUROPE provider. The mode of VHF
provider selection changes to MANUAL.
[3R] ARINC MIDDLE EAST When selected, the VHF 3 tunes to the frequency of
the ARINC MIDDLE EAST provider. The mode of VHF
provider selection changes to MANUAL.
[4R] ARINC INDIA When selected, the VHF 3 tunes to the frequency of
the ARINC INDIA provider. The mode of VHF provider
selection changes to MANUAL.
[6R] PAGE PRINT When selected, the printer prints information from the
VHF3 DATA MODE page.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 42/48

FCOM ←X 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
VHF3 SCAN SELECT

Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021079.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
EXAMPLE This is an example of VHF3 SCAN SELECT pages. Information, that are displayed
on the VHF3 SCAN SELECT pages, depend on datalink customization, selected by
each operator.
THE VHF 3 SCAN SELECT PAGE 1/4
EXAMPLE [1L] SITA EUR/AF Selects the SITA Europe/Africa (datalink service
provider).
[5L]:
NEW SCAN SELECT : Selects the scan mask.
ACTIVE SEL DISPLAY : Displays the scan mask used by ATSU.
[6L] RETURN When selected, the MCDU displays the COMM
CONFIG page.
[1R] ARINC EUROPE Selects the ARINC Europe (datalink service
provider).
[2R] ARINC MIDDLE EAST Selects the ARINC Eiddle East (datalink service
provider).
[3R] ARINC INDIA Selects the ARINC India (datalink service provider).
[5R] EMPTY SCAN Activates an emprty scan mask to inhibit VHF
ACTIVATE datalink communication.
[6R] SCAN SEL PRINT When selected, the printer prints information.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 43/48

FCOM Y→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EXAMPLE [1L] SITA PACIFIC Selects the SITA Pacific (datalink service provider).
[4L] AVICOM JAPAN Selects the AVCOM Japan (datalink service
provider).
[5L]:
CONFIG page.
[1R] ARINC RUSSIA Selects the ARINC Russia (datalink service
provider).
[2R] ARINC ASIA Selects the ARINC Asia (datalink service provider).
[3R] ARINC AUSTRAL Selects the ARINC Australia (datalink service
provider).
[4R] ARINC KOREA Selects the ARINC Korea (datalink service provider).
[5R] EMPTY SCAN Activates an emprty scan mask, in order to inhibit
ACTIVATE VHF datalink communication.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 44/48

FCOM ←Y→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EXAMPLE [1L] SITA NORTH AM Selects the SITA North America (datalink service
provider).
[2L] SITA SOUTH AM Selects the SITA South America (datalink service
provider).
[3L] DEPV BRASIL Selects the DEPV Brasil (datalink service provider).
[5L]:
CONFIG page.
[1R] ARINC AMERICA Selects the ARINC America (datalink service
provider).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 45/48

FCOM ←Y→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EXAMPLE
[5L]:
CONFIG page.
[1R] OLD ARINC EUROPE Selects the OLD ARINC Europe (datalink service
provider).
[2R] ARINC AFRICA Selects the ARINC Africa (datalink service provider).
[3R] JACARS AUSTRAL Selects the JACARS Australia (datalink service
provider).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 46/48

FCOM ←Y 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
WHEN CAN WE EXPECT

Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-30-00021085.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
[1L] HIGHER ALT Prepares a negotiation request, in order to climb to a higher altitude.
If a lower altitude was selected, setting a higher altitude deselects the lower
altitude.
[2L] CRZ CLB TO Prepares a negotiation request, in order to climb to a higher altitude.
[5L] ALL FIELDS Erases all data that were entered on the page, and erases the data that
ERASE were entered on other associated pages.
RETURN
[1R] LOWER ALT Prepares a negotiation request, in order to descend to a lower altitude.
If a higher altitude was selected, setting a lower altitude deselects the higher
altitude.
[2R] SPEED Prepares a negotiation request of new speed clearance.
[3R] SPEED RANGE Prepares a negotiation request, in order to operate within a speed range.
[4R] BACK ON ROUTE Prepares a negotiation request, in order to return to the initial route.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 47/48

FCOM Z 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-30 P 48/48

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MCDU Scratchpad Messages
MCDU SCRATCHPAD MESSAGES

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-40-10-00021151.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
MESSAGE CONDITIONS
ALREADY SELECTED The selectable key was selected.
BOTH ENTRY OUT OF RANGE
or The double value that was entered is out of range.
TWO ENTRY OUT OF RANGE
ENTRY OUT OF RANGE The single value that was entered is out of range.
FORMAT: _ _ _ The acquisition format is not valid.
An example of the required format is displayed (FORMAT:
NNN, FORMAT: XXXX, etc), where:
‐ N : Numerical data (0 to 9)
‐ X : Alphanumerical data (0 to 9, or A to Z).
To display the required format of specific data on the
scratchpad message field, press on the corresponding
empty field. This serves as a reference to the flight crew.
LAST MSG ELEMENT The maximum number of message elements, for a given
downlink message, was reached.
NOT ALLOWED Data entry is not allowed, or press on the selected key.
TOO MANY MSG ELEMENTS It is not allowed to enter a new parameter, because the
maximum number of message elements was reached.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-40-10-00021152.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
MESSAGE CONDITIONS
A/C REGISTER NBR UNAVAIL Notification is not available, because the Tail Number is
unavailable.
A/C POS UNAVAILABLE Notification is not available, because the Aircraft Position is
unavailable.
ADS-C FUNCTION OFF The ADS-C DETAIL key/ADS DETAIL key was selected, but
or the page cannot currently be accessed, because the ADS-C
ADS FUNCTION OFF is OFF, and consequently no ADS-C connections can be
established.
CLR NOT ALLOWED An available key has been selected, but the function is not
available due to CLR still displayed on the scratchpad field.
COM UNAVAILABLE The selected command is not available, because datalink
communications means are currently unavailable.
DCDU FILE FULL The selected command is not available, because the DCDU
file is full.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-40 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

MESSAGE CONDITIONS
ENTER MANDATORY FIELDS Selection of a command is not available, because
mandatory fields are not filled in.
FLIGHT NBR UNAVAILABLE Notification is not available, because the flight number is
unavailable.
KEY NOT ACTIVE It is not allowed to press this key.
LAT/LON DISPL ABREVIATED The LAT/LONG display is abbreviated only on the MCDU
display field, because there is lack of space.
MSG ALREADY DISPLAYED The ATC DISPL command is not available, because the
message is already displayed on the DCDU.
MSG RECORD IS EMPTY The MSG RECORD ERASE command is not available,
because there are no messages recorded.
MSG RECORD NOT RELIABLE Due to a technical problem, the list of messages recorded
is not reliable. All CPDLC messages are deleted and new
messages should not be recorded.
NO ACTIVE ATC The ATC DISPL or the MAX UPLINK DELAY keys were
selected, but the function is currently unavailable because
there is no active CPDLC connection.
NO ADS-C CONNECTION The ADS-C DETAIL key/ADS DETAIL key was selected, but
or the page cannot currently be accessed, because the ADS-C
NO ADS CONNECTION is ARMED but no connection is currently established.
NO DCDU MSG TO MODIFY The MSG MODIFY key was selected, but the function is
currently unavailable.
NO FM DATA No FMS data are available when selecting the MODIFY key
for a position report.
NO INPUTS The ALL FIELDS ERASE command is not available,
because there are no items to erase.
NO MSG TO PRINT The PRINT key was selected, but the function is currently
unavailable because there is no message to be printed.
NO WHOLE MSG PREPARED Selection of the ATC DISPL or ADD TEXT command is not
available, because the message is not completely prepared.
NON MODIFIABLE FIELD A non-modifiable field was selected.
OUT OF RANGE A single value of double data is out of range.
PRINT FAILED Print fails after selection of the PRINT function.
PRINTER UNAVAILABLE The PRINT key was selected, but the printer is currently
unavailable.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-40 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-40-10-00021155.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
SCRATCHPAD MESSAGES ON THE COMM MENU PAGE

MESSAGE CONDITIONS
COMMAND NOT AVAIL The command is unavailable.
DEFAULT VHF SP LIST (1) The new SCAN MASK is unavailable.
The system displays the default SCAN MASK instead.
ENTER A/C ICAO CODE The aircraft ICAO code is not valid.
To enter the A/C ICAO code, Refer to DSC-46-10-50 How to
Initialize
ENTER A/C REGISTR The aircraft registration number is not valid.
or To enter this parameter, Refer to DSC-46-10-50 How to
ENTER A/C REGISTER Initialize
ENTER A/L ID The airline identification number is not valid.
To enter this parameter, Refer to DSC-46-10-50 How to
Initialize
ENTER VHF3 SCAN MASK (1)
or No service provider has been selected.
ENTER VHF3 SCAN SELECT (1)
FORMAT ERROR The message was entered in an inappropriate format.
NOT ALLOWED It is not allowed to press this key.
PRINT FAILED A print command was unsuccessful.
PRT MSG PRINT FAIL Automatic print of an AOC uplink message was
unsuccessful.
SYSTEM BUSY - TRY LATER The system is busy. The command, selected by the crew,
cannot currently be performed.
VHF3 CAN BE SET IN VOICE VHF 3 datalink communications are lost.
However, VHF 3 can be used in voice mode.
VHF3 SWITCH IMPOSSIBLE It is not possible to switch from VHF 3 voice mode to VHF 3
data mode.
(1) Depending on airline customization, access to the SCAN SELECT menu may not be possible. If it
is not, the DEFAULT VHF SP LIST and ENTER VHF3 SCAN SELECT scratchpad messages are
not applicable.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-40 P 3/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-40 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MCDU Data Entry Format
MCDU DATA ENTRY FORMAT

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-50-10-00021154.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
DATA NAME FORMAT RANGE UNIT DISPLAY PAGE

A/C ICAO CODE XXXXXXXX 8 characters COMM CONFIG
A/C REGISTR XXXXXXX 7 characters COMM CONFIG
ACARS A/L ID AA 2 letters COMM CONFIG
ALT FLNNN or NNN 30-410 Hundreds ATC VERT REQ
Leading zeros on NNN may of feet POSITION REPORT
be omitted (MSL)
NNNNNFT or NNNNN 0-25 000 Feet
Between 0 and 1 000 ft,
“FT” must be written.
Leading zeros may be
omitted.
NNNNNM 0-12 500 Meters
omitted
ASSIGNED ALT Same as ALT MESSAGE MODIFY
ASSIGNED SPD Same as SPD MESSAGE MODIFY
AT Same as UTC MESSAGE MODIFY
ATC CENTER AAAA 4 letters NOTIFICATION
BLOCK ALT Same as ALT/ ATC VERT REQ
Same as ALT
CAN AT Same as DIR TO MESSAGE MODIFY
Same as UTC
CLB TO /START AT Same as ALT/ ATC VERT REQ
Same as START AT.
START AT may be optional.
START AT may be modified
independently if preceded
by “/ ”.
CLBING TO Same as ALT EMERGENCY POSITION
REPORT
CLIMBING TO Same as ALT MESSAGE MODIFY
CRZ CLB TO Same as ALT ATC VERT REQ
WHEN CAN WE EXPECT
DES TO/START AT Same as ALT/ ATC VERT REQ
Same as START AT
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-50 P 1/6

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

DESCENDING TO Same as ALT EMERGENCY MESSAGE
MODIFY
DEVIATING Same as OFFSETTING POSITION REPORT
MESSAGE MODIFY
DIR TO XXXXX (Fixname) MIN 1 ATC LAT REQ
alphanumeric
Max 5
alphanumeric
DDMM.MB/EEEMM.M DD : 0-90 Degrees
C (LAT/long) B : N or S
”DD” = lat degrees MM.M : 0-59.9 Minutes
”EEE” = long degrees
”MM.M” = lat and long EEE = 0- 180 Degrees
minutes C : E or W
omitted
DISTANCE NNN.NNM or NNN.N 0-999.9 NM MESSAGE MODIFY
omitted
NNNNKM 1-1 024 KM
”KM” must be written.
omitted
DIVERTING/VIA XXXXX/XXXXX For each XXXXX : EMERGENCY
If left (right) field is filled in, MIN 1
right (left) field must also be alphanumeric
filled in. Max 5
VIA may be modified alphanumeric
by “ / ”.
DESCENDING TO Same as ALT POSITION REPORT
ENDURANCE HHMM HH : 0-23 Hours EMERGENCY POSITION
”HH” = NN or NNH MM : 0-59 Minutes REPORT
”MM” = NN or NNMIN
”MIN” = “MIN”, “MN” or
“M”
ENSUING WPT Same as DIR TO MESSAGE MODIFY
ETA Same as UTC POSITION REPORT
FREE TEXT Any character which Max 96 characters TEXT
belongs to : (A ... Z), (0 ... MORE FREE TEXT
9), ( ), (/), (+), (-), (.)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-50 P 2/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FREQ NNNNN 2 850–28 000 HF : kHz ATC OTHER REQ
Leading zeros may be EMERGENCY
omitted
NNNNNNNNNNNN 12 numbers
SATCHANNEL:
corresponds to a 12 digits
telephone number
NNN.NNN 225-399.975 UHF : MHz
NNN.NNN 117-138 VHF : MHz
FROM Same as DIR TO MESSAGE MODIFY
GROUND SPD NNNKT or NNN 70-700 Kt POSITION REPORT
Leading zeros on NNN may
be omitted
GROUND TRK Same as HEADING ATC LAT REQ
HEADING NNN 1-360 Magnetic ATC LAT REQ POSITION
Leading zeros may be 360 is displayed degrees REPORT
omitted as 0
NNNT 1-360 True degrees
360T is displayed
as 0T
ICING X T, L, M or S POSITION REPORT
T : Trace,
L : Light,
M : Moderate,
S : Severe
LEAVING Same as ALT MESSAGE MODIFY
LEVEL Same as ALT MESSAGE MODIFY
MAX UPLINK DELAY NNN or NNNS 5-999 Seconds CONNECTION STATUS
NEXT Same as DIR TO POSITION REPORT
NEXT WPT Same as DIR TO MESSAGE MODIFY
NEXT WPT ETA Same as UTC MESSAGE MODIFY
OFFSET/ START AT Same as OFFSETTING/ ATC LAT REQ
Same as START AT.
START AT may be optional.
START AT may be modified
by “/ ”.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-50 P 3/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

OFFSETTING DNNNNM or NNNNMD D : L (Left) NM EMERGENCY
”D” = offsetting or R
direction (Right)
”NM” must be omitted NNN : 1-128
be omitted
DNNNKM or NNNKMD D : L (Left) KM
”D” = offsetting or R
direction (Right)
”KM” must be written. NNN : 1-256
be omitted
OVHD Same as DIR TO POSITION REPORT
PASSING Same as DIR TO MESSAGE MODIFY
PPOS Same as DIR TO POSITION REPORT
PRESENT ALT Same as ALT MESSAGE MODIFY
PRESENT HEADING Same as HEADING MESSAGE MODIFY
PRESENT GRND TRK Same as HEADING MESSAGE MODIFY
PRESENT POS Same as DIR TO MESSAGE MODIFY
PRESENT SPD Same as SPD MESSAGE MODIFY
REACHING ALT Same as ALT MESSAGE MODIFY
REACHING BLOCK Same as ALT/ MESSAGE MODIFY
Same as ALT
REMAINING FUEL Same as ENDURANCE MESSAGE MODIFY
REPORTED ETA Same as UTC MESSAGE MODIFY
REPORTED WPT Same as DIR TO MESSAGE MODIFY
SAT ±NN or ±NNC -80 to +47 Degrees POSITION REPORT
”-” may be entered as “M”. Celsius
If no sign is input, “+” is
taken by default
+NNNF -105 to +150 Degrees
”F” must be written. Fahrenheit
”-” may be entered as “M”.
taken by default
SID XXXXXX MIN 1 ATC LAT REQ
alphanumeric
Max 6
alphanumeric
SOULS NNNN 1-1024 EMERGENCY MESSAGE
Leading zeros may be MODIFY
omitted
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-50 P 4/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

SPD NNN or NNNKT 70-350 Kt ATC VERT REQ
omitted
M.NN or .NN 0.61-0.92 Mach
The decimal point must be
written, trailing zeros may
be omitted
SPD RANGE Same as SPD/ ATC VERT REQ
Same as SPD
SPEED Same as SPD WHEN CAN WE EXPECT
POSITION REPORT
SPEED RANGE Same as SPD/ WHEN CAN WE EXPECT
Same as SPD
SQUAWKING NNNN N : 0-7 MESSAGE MODIFY
STANDARD A/L ID AAA COMM CONFIG
START AT XXXXX (Fixname) MIN 1 ATC LAT REQ
alphanumeric ATC VERT REQ
Max 5
alphanumeric
DDMM.MB/EEEMM.MC DD : 0-90 Degrees
(lat/long) B : N or S
”DD” = lat degrees MM.M : 0-59.9 Minutes
”EEE” = long degrees
”MM.M” = lat and long EEE : 0-180 Degrees
minutes C : E or W
omitted
HHMM HH : 0-23 Hours
”HH” = NN or NNH MM : : 0-59 Minutes
”MIN” = “MIN”, “MN” or
”M” or “Z”
TO Same as DIR TO POSITION REPORT
MESSAGE MODIFY
TRACK ANGLE Same as HEADING POSITION REPORT
TURB X L, M or S POSITION REPORT
L : Light
M : Moderate
S : Severe
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-50 P 5/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

UTC ”HHMM” HH : 0-23 Hours POSITION REPORT
”HH” = NN or NNH MM : 0-59 Minutes
”MIN” = “MIN” or “MN”
or “M” or “Z”
VERT SPEED ±NNNN FT/MIN 0-6 000 Feet/ minutes POSITION REPORT
”-” may be entered as “M”.
taken by default.
”FT/MIN” = “FT/MIN”,
”FT” or
“FTM”
±NNNNM/MIN 0-2000 Meters/
”-” may be entered as “M”. minutes
taken by default.
”M/MIN” = “M/MIN”, ”M”
or “MM”
WHEN CAN SPD Same as SPD ATC VERT REQ
WIND D/NNNKT or D/NNN D : 1-360 Degrees POSITION REPORT
Leading zeros on NNN may NNN : 0-255 Kt
be omitted
D/NNNKM D : 1-360 Degrees
Leading zeros on NNN may NNN : 0-511 Km/h
be omitted
WX DEV UP TO Same as OFFSETTING. ATC LAT REQ
In this case, direction D (L
or R) can be omitted. This
means a weather deviation
in either direction.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-50 P 6/6

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ECAM
MEMO DISPLAY
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-60-A-00017111.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
COMPANY ALERT : This memo appears in green when the aircraft receives an uplink alert
message, or when an AOC special condition requires a pilot action on the
MCDU (depends on AOC programming). This memo pulses green for 180 s,
then remains steady. It is associated with a buzzer for 1 s.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-60-A-00017213.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
COMPANY DATALINK STBY : This memo appears in green when the AOC datalink air-ground
communication is temporarily unavailable, but not lost.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-60-A-00017212.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
DATALINK STBY : This memo appears in green when the datalink air-ground communication is
temporarily lost.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-60-A-00017211.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
ATC DATALINK STBY : This memo appears in green when the ATC datalink air-ground
communication is temporarily unavailable, but not lost.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-60-A-00017112.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
COMPANY CALL : This memo appears in green when the aircraft receives a message from the
ground requesting voice communication on VHF.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-40-60-A-00017114.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
COMPANY MSG : This memo appears in green when the aircraft receives a message from the
ground.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-60 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-40-60 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DATALINK - HOW TO
OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
Ident.: DSC-46-10-50-00021046.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
How To chapter contains examples of:

‐ How to activate the datalink connection
‐ How to receive a datalink message
‐ How to create a datalink message
‐ How to send a datalink message.
Illustrations in How To are generic and do not reflect differences depending on the datalink standard
installed in the aircraft.
HOW TO INITIALIZE
Ident.: DSC-46-10-50-00021047.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Datalink may be initialized:

‐ Automatically
Datalink initializes automatically, provided that a list of service providers is scanned, and all
required parameters are received, and validated by the ATSU.
‐ Manually
Datalink may be initialized manually, when the system is not correctly initialized automatically.
The VHF3 SCAN SELECT page of the MCDU displays the list of service providers.
The COMM COMFIG page, on the MCDU displays required parameters.
MANUAL INITIALIZATION
If one of required parameters is not valid, one or more manual entries may be required:
 If the A/C ICAO CODE is not valid:
The MCDU scratchpad displays ENTER A/C ICAO CODE:
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 1/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The flight crew clears the scratchpad, and inserts the A/C ICAO code (in hexal encoding) via the
MCDU scratchpad.
A/C ICAO CODE.................................................................................................................INSERT
The flight crew inserts A/C ICAO code via the MCDU scratchpad into A/C ICAO CODE.
CONFIG ACTIVATE........................................................................................................... SELECT
The flight crew selects 1R/CONFIG ACTIVATE to activate manual entry of the A/C ICAO code.
 If ARN is not valid:
The MCDU scratchpad displays ENTER A/C REGISTER:
The flight crew clears the scratchpad, and inserts the A/C registration via the MCDU scratchpad.
A/C REGISTR..................................................................................................................... INSERT
The flight crew inserts A/C ICAO registration via the MCDU scratchpad to A/C REGISTR.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 2/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

The flight crew selects 1R/CONFIG ACTIVATE to activate manual entry of the A/C registration.
 If the A/L ID is not valid:
The MCDU scratchpad displays ENTER A/L IDENT:
The flight crew clears the scratchpad, and inserts the two-letter A/L ID code via the MCDU
scratchpad.
A/L ID.................................................................................................................................. INSERT
The flight crew inserts A/L ID code via the MCDU scratchpad to A/L ID.
The flight crew selects 1R/CONFIG ACTIVATE to activate manual entry of the A/C registration.
 If VHF Service Provider is not selected
and
if the VHF3 SCAN/MASK SELECT menu can be accessed:
The MCDU scratchpad displays ENTER VHF3 SCAN SELECT:
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 3/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
On the VHF3 SCAN SELECT page, select service providers, in the airline priority order, and
activate the VHF SCAN SELECT function.
EXAMPLE OF SELECTION OF DATALINK SERVICE PROVIDERS:

Selection of SITA 725 and ARINC service providers :
1. Press 5L key: The asterisk next to SELECT indication disappears, then reappears.
2. Press 1L key to select SITA 725: SELECT indication goes off, and the priority number of
selection # 1 appears.
3. Press 1R key to select ARINC: SELECT indication goes off, and the priority number of
selection # 2 appears.
4. Press 5R key to activate the VHF SCAN SELECT function: The asterisk next to SCAN
SELECT ACTIVATE indication disappears, then reappears.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 4/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: Modification of the SCAN SELECT setting may result in the loss of air-ground VHF
datalink communication, and the increase of datalink service provider charges.
Therefore, the SCAN SELECT setting should not be modified by the flight crew, unless
the flight crew is instructed to do so.
HOW TO NOTIFY
Ident.: DSC-46-10-50-00021048.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
 On the MCDU:
NOTIFICATION Page:
NOTIFY................................................................................................................. SELECT See (1)
The flight crew enters the ATC code via the MCDU scratchpad, if the FMS does not enter the
ATC code automatically.
 If the ATC center accepts the notification:

When ATC center accepts the notification, the MCDU displays the name of the notified ATC
center:
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 5/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ATC NOTIFIED on the MCDU
 If the notification fails:

If the notification fails, the MCDU displays NOTIF FAILED information:
NOTIF FAILED on the MCDU
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 6/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: 1. For ADS-C  operations, check on the CONNECTION STATUS page of the
MCDU, that the ADS-C  is set to ARMED (ON for FANS A  ) before sending a
notification.
2. The notified ATC center initiates the CPDLC and/or ADS-C  connection.
Therefore, re-notifications should be avoided.
3. An automatic transfer from one ATC center to the next ATC center can be expected,
if:
‐ The MCDU displays the next ATC code, on the CONNECTION STATUS Page
‐ The DCDU displays NEXT ATC information with the desired ATC code, on the
default screen, when no datalink message is displayed.
HOW TO CONNECT
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-50-10-00021049.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
CPDLC CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO ACTIVE ATC
The ATC center initializes the CPDLC connection, when the ATC center receives a notification
from the aircraft.
The DCDU displays the connected ATC (ACTIVE ATC), when the connection is established.
The MCDU displays the connected ATC (ACTIVE ATC) on the CONNECTION STATUS page.
ACTIVE ATC...................................................................................................................... VERIFY
The flight crew must verify that the desired ATC center is connected.
ACTIVE ATC on the DCDU
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 7/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CONNECTION TO NEXT ATC

The active ATC can transfer the datalink connection to a next ATC without requiring a flight
crew action.
If the active ATC transfers the connection to the next ATC, the DCDU will automatically display
the next ATC code in the NEXT ATC field, on the default screen, under the next ATC code in
the NEXT ATC field.
When the flight crew receives a message of service termination from the active ATC, the next
ATC becomes the active ATC.
Ident.: DSC-46-10-50-10-00021050.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
ADS-C CONNECTION
 If the ADS-C is OFF:
The ADS-C is not connected.
The CONNECTION STATUS page of the MCDU displays ADS-C OFF.
The DCDU displays ADS-C OFF:
ADS-C OFF on the DCDU
 If the ADS-C is ON:

 On the MCDU:
ADS-C DETAIL Page
or
ADS DETAIL Page:
CONNECTED ATC................................................................................................... VERIFY
The flight crew must verify that the desired ATC center is connected.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 8/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The ADS-C DETAIL / ADS DETAIL page displays connected ATC centers. for information
displayed on the ADS-C DETAIL / ADS DETAIL page.Refer to DSC-46-10-40-30 ADS-C
DETAIL.
 On the DCDU:
The DCDU displays ADS-C ON and the number of connected ATC centers:
ADS-C CONNECTED and ACTIVE ATC on the DCDU
HOW TO SEND REQUEST TO ATC

Ident.: DSC-46-10-50-00021051.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
AIRCRAFT REQUEST OF LATERAL FLIGHT PLAN DEVIATION

Example: DEVIATION REQUEST DUE TO WEATHER
 On the MCDU:
ATC LAT REQ Page:
WX DEV UP TO................................................................................................ INSERT See (1)
Insert an offset distance and direction via the MCDU scratchpad.
REQ DISPL....................................................................................................... SELECT See (2)
The DCDU displays prepared request.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 9/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
 On the DCDU:
SEND................................................................................................................ SELECT See (1)
L2 The DCDU displays the message and the message status in green.
L1 CLOSE.............................................................................................................. SELECT See (2)
Closing the message clears the DCDU.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 10/30

FCOM ←E→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
HOW TO ANSWER
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-46-10-50-20-00021053.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
ATC IMMEDIATE CLEARANCE

Example: WEATHER DEVIATION Clearance
 On the glareshield:
ATC MSG pb....................................................................................................................PRESS
The aural and visual alerts stop.
 On the DCDU:
WILCO...............................................................................................................SELECT See (1)
The message status changes to WILCO See (2) .
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 11/30

FCOM ← E to F → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SEND................................................................................................................ SELECT See (3)

L2 The DCDU displays the message and the message status in green See (4) .
L1 CLOSE.............................................................................................................. SELECT See (5)
Closing the message clears the DCDU.
The flight crew must insert the offset in the FMGES flight plan.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 12/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ATC DEFERRED CLEARANCE

Example: CLIMB Clearance
ATC MSG pb....................................................................................................................PRESS
 On the DCDU:
WILCO...............................................................................................................SELECT See (1)
The message status changes to WILCO See (2) .
Parameters of the clearance (in the example: DINTY and FL 350) change into magenta. The
FMGES monitors these parameters. MONITORING appears in the message information area
of the DCDU.
SEND................................................................................................................ SELECT See (3)
L2 The DCDU displays the message and the message status in green.
L1 The flight crew can close the message, if the message is not closed automatically.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 13/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
REMINDER OF THE CLEARANCE MESSAGE

The FMGES monitoring clearance parameters, signals to the ATSU, when the aircraft complies
with conditions of clearance.
The system triggers visual and aural alerts, and the DCDU displays a clearance reminder
message30 s before the applicability of the clearance (in this example, 30 s before reaching
DINTY).
REMINDER appears in the information area of reminder message, on the DCDU. The absence
of an ATC indication means that the clearance reminder message is a FMGES recall (message
is not new).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 14/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Reminder Message on the DCDU
Ident.: DSC-46-10-50-20-00021054.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
ATC NEGOTIATION MESSAGE

Example: WHEN CAN YOU ACCEPT Negotiation
ATC MSG pb....................................................................................................................PRESS
 On the DCDU:
The DCDU displays the ATC negotiation message:
Note: A default answer is automatically generated on the DCDU and proposed to the flight
crew.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 15/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
 If the flight crew can comply with the proposed action immediately:
 On the DCDU:
SEND.......................................................................................................... SELECT See (1)
The flight crew can close the message, if the message is not closed automatically.
 If the flight crew can comply with the proposed action, but cannot perform the
proposed action immediately:
 On the DCDU:
MODIFY...................................................................................................... SELECT See (1)
MCDU FOR MODIF/MCDU FOR EDIT appears on the DCDU, in the message information
area See (2).
The MCDU automatically displays the MODIFY page See (3) .
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 16/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
 On the MCDU:
MESSAGE MODIFY Page
The flight crew specifies, when they can comply with the proposed action.
A default time value appears in the 2L field, on the MESSAGE MODIFY page. The flight
crew can modify the default time value via the MCDU scratchpad.
CAN FL370 AT........................................................................................... SELECT See (5)
The flight crew can propose a new time value via the scratchpad See (4) . The new time
value will be inserted to the datalink message via the MESSAGE MODIFY page See (6) .
ATC MODIF DISPL.................................................................................... SELECT See (7)
The message appears on the DCDU See (8).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 17/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
 On the DCDU:
SEND.......................................................................................................... SELECT See (9)
L2 The OPEN status of the message disappears.
 If the flight crew cannot comply with the proposed action:

 On the DCDU:
CANNOT.....................................................................................................SELECT See (1)
The generated message changes from the positive message (CAN) to a negative
message (CANNOT).
L2 The message status remains OPEN See (2) .
L1 SEND.......................................................................................................... SELECT See (3)
The flight crew can close the message, if the message is not closed automatically.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 18/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
L1
Ident.: DSC-46-10-50-20-00021055.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
ATC REQUEST OF NAVIGATION PARAMETER

Example: CONFIRM SPEED Request
RECEPTION
ATC MSG pb................................................................................................................PRESS
 On the DCDU:
The DCDU displays the ATC confirmation request:
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 19/30

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: The WAIT FM DATA appears on the DCDU, in the message information area
upon the reception of confirmation request. The WAIT FM DATA indicates that the
FMGES is preparing an answer.
RESPONSE
 On the DCDU:
The ATSU automatically proposes a response via the DCDU. The WAIT FM DATA
disappears from the message information area on the DCDU.
L2 The flight crew can modify the report by pressing MODIFY on the DCDU. When MODIFY
is selected, the DCDU displays MCDU FOR MODIF in the message information area.
Consequently, the MCDU will display the MSG MODIFY page.
L1 SEND.............................................................................................................SELECT See (1)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 20/30

FCOM ←F 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
HOW TO SEND A POSITION REPORT

Ident.: DSC-46-10-50-00021056.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
 If the AUTO POS REPORT function is set to ON:

 On the MCDU:
ATC REPORTS Page:
The MCDU displays AUTO POS REPORT: ON:
AUTO POS REPORT ON on the ATC REPORTS Page
The FMGES generates automatically the position report message on the DCDU, when a
waypoint is sequenced.
Note: It is recommended to update the flight plan during the flight. The FMGES offset
function should be used, when it is appropriate. When the heading mode is
used, the flight crew should monitor and sequence waypoints of the flight plan as
required.
 If the AUTO POS REPORT function is set to OFF:
 On the MCDU:
ATC REPORTS Page:
The MCDU displays AUTO POS REPORT: OFF:
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 21/30

FCOM G→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AUTO POS REPORT OFF on the ATC REPORTS Page
MANUAL POSITION REPORT...................................................................... SELECT See (1)

POSITION REPORTS pages 1/3, 2/3 and 3/3 See (2) show data that is automatically
provided by the FMGES. The crew can manually enter available fields, if it is desired.
L2 Refer to DSC-46-10-40-30 POSITION REPORT for information displayed on all POSITION
REPORT Pages.
L1 ATC REP DISPL............................................................................................ SELECT See (3)
The DCDU displays prepared position report.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 22/30

FCOM ←G→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
 On the DCDU:
Note: The flight crew must read and verify all pages of the position report before sending the
report to the ATC.
L2 The flight crew can modify the position report or update parameters of the position report
by pressing MODIFY on the DCDU. When MODIFY is selected, the DCDU displays MCDU
FOR MODIF in the message information area. Consequently, the MCDU will display the MSG
MODIFY page.
Prepared Position Report Request on the DCDU
L1 SEND.................................................................................................................... SELECT See (1)

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 23/30

FCOM ←G→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
HOW TO SEND EMER MSG

Ident.: DSC-46-10-50-00021068.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
EXAMPLE OF PANPAN MESSAGE

 On the MCDU:
EMERGENCY Page 1/2:
PANPAN............................................................................................................SELECT See (1)
L2 PANPAN becomes blue.
L1 DIVERTING/VIA field (3)................................................................. INSERT See (2) to See (3)
The VIA field is filled by default with the entered DIVERTING data, if the VIA field is not
manually entered.
L2
The EMERGENCY Page 1/2 will display the activation of PANPAN See (4):
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 24/30

FCOM ← G to H → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
L1
EMERGENCY Page 2/2:
Note: The emergency can be cancelled by selecting the EMERGENCY CANCEL See (6)
on the EMERGENCY page 2/2 See (5).
ATC EMERG DISPL......................................................................................... SELECT See (7)
The DCDU displays the message See (8).
 On the DCDU:
SEND*............................................................................................................... SELECT See (9)
The flight crew sends the emergency message via DCDU.
The flight crew can close the emergency message, if the message is not closed automatically.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 25/30

FCOM ←H→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
HOW TO MODIFY FLT PLAN

Ident.: DSC-46-10-50-00021069.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
 When the scratchpad (1) displays the AOC SEC F-PLN UPLINK message:
 On the MCDU:
SEC INDEX Page:
AOC F-PLN INSERT...................................................................................... SELECT See (2)
The flight plan is inserted in the secondary F-PLN See (3) .
The flight can review and modify the flight plan.
SEC F-PLN REQ DISPLAY............................................................................SELECT See (4)
L2 The DCDU automatically displays a datalink message See (5) .
L1 The flight crew sends the message to the ATC from the DCDU.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 26/30

FCOM ← H to I → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
 When ATC clearance is received:

ATC MSG pb................................................................................................................. PRESS
 On the DCDU:
STBY.............................................................................................................. SELECT See (1)
L2 The message status changes to STBY on a blue background See (2) .
L1 SEND..............................................................................................................SELECT See (3)
L2 The background color of the STBY message status changes to green.
L1 LOAD.............................................................................................................. SELECT See (4)
LOAD must be selected. Other selection may prevent loading of the clearance.
The LOAD SEC OK displays in the information field of the DCDU, if loading is successful.
L2 The flight crew can review the clearance on the MCDU, in SEC F-PLN pages.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 27/30

FCOM ←I→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
L1
 If the flight crew accepts the clearance:

WILCO......................................................................................................SELECT See (5)
The flight crew can activate the secondary F-PLN.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 28/30

FCOM ←I→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
 If the flight crew decides to modify the clearance:

• The flight crew loads the clearance into the SEC F-PLN, on the MCDU and modifies it.
• The flight crew rejects the clearance by selecting UNABLE on the DCDU.
• The flight crew sends a new request (with the modified F-PLN) to the ATC.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 29/30

FCOM ←I 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-46-10-50 P 30/30

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW AIRCRAFT INFORMATION NETWORK SYSTEM (AINS)
OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
Ident.: DSC-46-20-00015782.0001001 / 05 JAN 15
Applicable to: ALL
The Aircraft Information Network System (AINS) is part of FlySmart with Airbus. FlySmart with Airbus
is made up of the following systems:
‐ The AINS
‐ Two Onboard Information Terminal  (OIT).
FlySmart with Airbus is an Airbus solution for EFB operations.
The AINS consists of an integrated avionics file server providing a host-platform for maintenance and
operations applications, a secured interface to the avionics and a communication link between the
aircraft Ethernet Local Area Network (ELAN) and the airline ground-based information system. This
system acquires, stores, processes, and transmits data from the avionics to the:
‐ Flight crew, to accomplish performance calculations, consult documentation...
‐ Airline network via the Gatelink
‐ Maintenance operator, for fast and efficient troubleshooting.
AINS maintenance and operations applications are installed by the airline, under its own
responsibility. Due to the highly customized programming, AINS functions may vary for different
airlines and are, therefore, not described in detail.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-46-20-00015783.0001001 / 05 JAN 15
Applicable to: ALL
The AINS is capable of receiving or sending information from/to the aircraft's Line Replaceable Units
(LRU).
The different parts of this system are considered to belong to one of the two following worlds:
‐ An “open world”, since its elements are open to the outside, and use commercial off-the-shelf
software products with high updating possibilities, etc.
‐ The “avionics world”, which is protected by a secure module.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The AINS consists of:

‐ An Aircraft Network Server Unit (ANSU): To provide powerful server and data management
functions onboard the aircraft.
‐ A Server Interface Unit (SIU):To protect avionics from pollution from the open world, providing
isolation between avionics and open networks.
‐ A Terminal Wireless LAN Unit  (TWLU) and TWLU antenna  : To provide wireless
connection between the AINS and Airport Local Area Network (LAN).
Note: Through the GATELINK pb-sw  , on the overhead panel, TWLU  and TWLU antenna
 provide on-ground wireless connection between the AINS and Airport LAN.

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
COCKPIT ARRANGEMENT
Ident.: DSC-46-20-00015784.0001001 / 05 JAN 15
Applicable to: ALL
In the cockpit, the AINS can interface with laptops and printers via the:
‐ Captain's AINS plug
‐ First Officer's AINS plug
‐ Third Occupant’s AINS plug 

FCOM C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EFB
OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
Ident.: DSC-46-40-00021021.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The FlySmart with Airbus applications:

‐ TAKEOFF application
‐ LANDING application
‐ LOADSHEET application
‐ IN–FLIGHT application (available on the latest FlySmart with Airbus applications for Windows
version)
‐ Operational Documentation applications (OLB)
‐ Manager application (available for iPad version)
The FlySmart with Airbus application suite is designed to:
‐ Improve access to flight crew’s operational information
‐ Reduce the quantity of paper documents in the cockpit by replacing them with electronic
documents
‐ Enable reduced revision and distribution cycles to ensure better technical data accuracy
‐ Ease and improve the operational data updating process
‐ Provide an accurate and optimized computation of performance.
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-46-40-00021022.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The My Flight page enables:

‐ To check that FlySmart with Airbus applications are up to date. The My Flight page provides the
version of the installed applications and data (EFB version)
‐ To start the Manager application, that enables to update the operational data (performance,
manuals)
‐ To initialize the applications with the applicable aircraft tail number, flight number and citypair.
This avoids multiple entries of the same data in the different applications.
There is one My Flight page per application. All the inputs that the user has entered on one My Flight
page are retrieved by the other applications.
Note: On the My Flight page of OLB application, the user can only enter the a/c type and a/c
registration.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EFB
OPERATING MANUAL
LANDING APPLICATION
Ident.: DSC-46-40-00021023.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Landing application aims at computing the landing performance data (maximum landing weight,
approach speed) according to the aircraft configuration and external conditions (runway, surrounding
obstacles, weather).
The Landing application allows straightforward computations and provides the optimized landing
performance for the given conditions.
TAKEOFF APPLICATION
Ident.: DSC-46-40-00021025.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Takeoff application aims at computing the takeoff performance data (maximum takeoff weight,
takeoff speeds, flexible temperature) according to the aircraft configuration and external conditions
(runway, surrounding obstacles, weather).
The Takeoff application allows straightforward computations and provides the optimized takeoff
performance for the given conditions.
LOADSHEET APPLICATION
Ident.: DSC-46-40-00021026.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Loadsheet application allows the flight crew users to prepare the aircraft loading and to
check that all weights and CG remain within the loading operational envelope. This eases the
computation of the ZFWCG, ZFW, TOW and TOCG, and enables last–minute changes to the
passenger/cargo/fuel distribution.
Depending on airline’s authority requirements, the Loadsheet application can also generate a load
and trim sheet.
OPS LIBRARY APPLICATION

Ident.: DSC-46-40-00021027.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The OLB application enables the onboard consultation of any flight operations document published
in the relevant format (e.g. airline's manuals), including the ones delivered by Airbus (FCOM, MEL,
AFM, CDL, FCTM).
MEL and CDL items (including missing items) selected on OLB application are automatically
transferred to Takeoff and Landing applications.

FCOM C to F 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EFB
OPERATING MANUAL
MANAGER APPLICATION
Ident.: DSC-46-40-00021028.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Manager application aims at updating on the iPad the operational data used by FlySmart with
Airbus applications for iPad: performance data and operational manuals.

FCOM G 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EFB
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ELECTRONIC QRH (EQRH)
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-46-50-00021145.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The electronic QRH (eQRH) is an EFB application that enables the flight crew to:
‐ Manage the Normal Checklists and some Abnormal Procedures
‐ Access to some important operational data (OEBs, system architectures, performance…)

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The eQRH has several main interfaces:

‐ My Aircraft page:
The My Aircraft page enables:
‐ To check that the eQRH application is up to date. The My Aircraft page provides the version of
the installed application and data (EFB version)
‐ To initialize the eQRH application with the applicable aircraft tail number. The My Aircraft page
retrieves automatically the aircraft tail number when defined in other FlySmart with Airbus
applications
‐ EFB version:

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
If required, each flight crew member compares the EFB version with the valid version information
that is given as reference by the airline. This ensures that the eQRH application and the data
installed on their devices correspond to the latest updated version, provided by their airline's flight
operations.
‐ eQRH application:
The eQRH application enables the pilot to manage the normal checklists and non-sensed
Abnormal Procedures. It also gives access to some important operational data that may be
required during the flight.
(1) Access to My Aircraft page

(2) Aircraft tail number and type
(3) Working list

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INFORMATION SYSTEM
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(4) Search
(5) Previous/Next Navigation
(6) eQRH options
(7) Rapid Access

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-49-10-20 Main Components

APU Engine............................................................................................................................................................. A
Electronic Control Box............................................................................................................................................. B
Air Intake System.................................................................................................................................................... C
Starter...................................................................................................................................................................... D
Fuel System............................................................................................................................................................. E
Oil System................................................................................................................................................................F
Inlet Guide Vanes (IGV)..........................................................................................................................................G
Air Bleed System.....................................................................................................................................................H
Controls..................................................................................................................................................................... I
Ground Operations Safety Devices......................................................................................................................... J
Operation Under Failure Conditions........................................................................................................................K

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
External Controls..................................................................................................................................................... B
ECAM - APU SD Page........................................................................................................................................... C
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... D

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-49-10-10-00000941.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) is a self contained unit which makes the aircraft independent of
external pneumatic and electrical power supply.
On ground
‐ It supplies bleed air for starting the engine and for the air conditioning system.
‐ It supplies electrical power to the electrical system.
During Take-Off
‐ It supplies bleed air for air conditioning, thus avoiding a reduction in engine thrust caused by the
use of engine bleed air for this purpose, when optimum aircraft performance is required.
In Flight
‐ It backs up the Electrical system
‐ It backs up the Air conditioning
‐ It can be used to start the engines
The APU may obtain power for starting from the batteries specifically assigned to the APU, or in
combination with the external power, or normal aircraft supply.
APU start is permitted throughout the normal flight envelope, except when APU battery only is
supplying (Refer to LIM-APU Operational Envelope).
The ECAM displays APU parameters.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-49-10-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-49-10-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - MAIN COMPONENTS
OPERATING MANUAL
APU ENGINE
Ident.: DSC-49-10-20-00000943.0001001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
The basic element of the APU is a single shaft gas turbine which delivers mechanical shaft power
for driving the accessory gearbox (electrical generator) and produces bleed air (engine starting and
pneumatic supply).
ELECTRONIC CONTROL BOX

Ident.: DSC-49-10-20-00000944.0002001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
The Electronic Control Box (ECB) is primarily a full authority digital electronic controller that performs
the APU system logic for all modes of APU operation such as :
‐ Sequence the start and monitors it
‐ Monitors speed and temperature
‐ Monitors bleed air (IGV)
‐ Sequence the shut down (manual, protective or inhibited)
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM

Ident.: DSC-49-10-20-00000945.0001001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
The air intake and an electrically operated flap allow the external air to reach the compressor inlet.
STARTER
Ident.: DSC-49-10-20-00000946.0001001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
The ECB controls the electric starter. The starter engages if the air intake is fully open and provided
the MASTER SW and the START pushbutton are ON.
FUEL SYSTEM
Ident.: DSC-49-10-20-00000947.0001001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
The APU is supplied from the trim tank transfer line (Refer to DSC-28-10-100 FWD APU Pump
Feed).
The ECB controls the fuel flow.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-49-10-20 P 1/4

FCOM A to E 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
OIL SYSTEM
Ident.: DSC-49-10-20-00000948.0001001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
The APU has an integral independent lubrication system (for lubrication and cooling).
INLET GUIDE VANES (IGV)

Ident.: DSC-49-10-20-00000949.0001001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
The IGVs control bleed air flow, and a fuel-pressure-powered actuator positions the IGVs.
The ECB controls the actuator in response to aircraft demand.
AIR BLEED SYSTEM

Ident.: DSC-49-10-20-00000950.0002001 / 10 JAN 11
Applicable to: ALL
The ECB controls the APU BLEED valves. If APU BLEED is set to ON, the bleed valve closes at
25 000 ft when climbing, and reopens at 23 000 ft when descending.
CONTROLS
Ident.: DSC-49-10-20-00000952.0001001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
The flight crew uses the controls on the APU panel for routine shutdown. For emergency shutdown :
‐ The flight crew can push the APU FIRE handle, or
‐ The ground crew can push the APU SHUT OFF pushbutton on the interphone panel under the
nose fuselage, or the APU EMER SHUT DOWN pushbutton on the refueling/defueling panel.
GROUND OPERATIONS SAFETY DEVICES

Ident.: DSC-49-10-20-00000953.0001001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
APU FIRE WITH AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN

The APU may run, without cockpit crew supervision, when the aircraft is on ground. In case of fire
in the APU compartment :
• APU fire warnings operate in the cockpit
• A horn in the nose gear bay sounds
• The “AVAIL” light goes off
• The “FAULT“ light in the MASTER SW comes on
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-49-10-20 P 2/4

FCOM F to J → 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
• The APU shuts down

• The APU fire extinguisher discharges.
Note: On ground, the No Break Power Transfer (NBPT) function is inhibited, in the following
cases of APU shutdown :
‐ The APU is shut down, by using the APU SHUT OFF switch on the external power
panel (925 VU).
‐ An APU emergency shutdown is triggered, by using the APU EMER SHUT DOWN
switch on the REFUEL/DEFUEL panel (990 VU).
‐ An automatic APU shutdown is triggered by the ECB.
‐ The APU is shut down, by using the APU FIRE pushbutton.
OPERATION UNDER FAILURE CONDITIONS

Ident.: DSC-49-10-20-00000954.0001001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
APU FAULT WITH AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN

The following failures cause an automatic shutdown :
1. Overspeed
2. Certain critical ECB internal failures
3. Underspeed
4. Start abort
5. Low oil pressure
6. High oil temperature
7. Load compressor overtemperature
8. Generator high oil temperature
9. DC power interrupt (BAT OFF, when aircraft on batteries only)
10. Overtemperature
11. Certain ECB internal failures
Failure causes 1 and 2 lead to an automatic shutdown (protective shutdown) in all flight phases.
For failures 3 through 11, the automatic shutdown is inhibited to ensure APU availability (inhibited
shutdown in flight phase 2 to 9).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-49-10-20 P 3/4

FCOM ← J to K 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-49-10-20 P 4/4

FCOM 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-49-20-A-00017859.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Ident.: DSC-49-20-A-00017861.0004001 / 21 MAR 16
(1) APU MASTER SW pb-sw

This pushbutton controls the electric supply for APU operation, and its protective features. It also
controls the start and shutdown sequences
FAULT lt : This amber FAULT light comes on, and a caution appears on the ECAM, when
an automatic APU shutdown occurs (Refer to DSC-49-10-20 Ground Operations
Safety Devices).
Note: In case of automatic, non emergency shutdown, the air inlet flap closes
15 min after the APU speed is lower than 7 %.
If an automatic, non-emergency shutdown happens on ground, the
15 min countdown starts after liftoff.
ON/R : ‐ The blue ON light comes on.

‐ Electric power goes to the APU system, and the ECB performs a power-up
test.
‐ The APU air-intake flap opens.
‐ The APU fuel isolation valve and APU LP valve open.
‐ The FWD APU and aft APU fuel pumps operate during the trim tank fuel
transfer, and depending on the pressure in the trim tank line.
‐ If the aircraft has ground power or main generator power, the APU page
appears on the ECAM display.

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Off : Manual shutdown sequence.

‐ The ON light of the MASTER SW pb-sw goes off.
‐ After a running period of 15 s (for No Break Power Transfer), the APU shuts
down and the AVAIL light goes off,
‐ If the APU BLEED was selected, the APU performs a cooling period of 85 s at
82 % speed,
‐ At N 7 % the air-inlet flap closes.
Note: Switching the MASTER SW off then on, resets the ECB.
Ident.: DSC-49-20-A-00017862.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
(2) APU START pb-sw

ON : The blue light comes on.
When the flap is completely open, the APU starter is energized.
When N = 7 %, ignition is turned on.
When N = 50 %, the APU starter is de-energized, and ignition is turned off.
When N = 95 %, the ON light on the START pushbutton goes off and AVAIL
comes on in green.
The APU may now supply bleed air and electrical power to the aircraft systems.
10 s later, the APU page disappears from the ECAM display.
AVAIL lt : This light comes on green, when N reaches 95 %.

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
Ident.: DSC-49-20-00017865.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL

FCOM B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ECAM - APU SD PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-49-20-B-00017866.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Ident.: DSC-49-20-B-00017867.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
(1) AVAIL Indication

It is in green, when APU N is above 95 %.
Ident.: DSC-49-20-B-00017869.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
(2) APU Bleed Valve Position

It is only displayed, if the APU MASTER sw is ON/R.
In line – Green : The APU valve is fully open.
Crossline – Green : The APU valve is not fully open, and APU BLEED pb is OFF.
Crossline – Amber : The APU valve is not fully open, if APU BLEED pb is ON.
Ident.: DSC-49-20-B-00017870.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
(3) APU Bleed Air Pressure

This box displays the relative bleed air pressure in green.
It shows an amber XX, when ADIRS 1 is not available or selected OFF.

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-49-20-B-00017871.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
(4) APU GEN Line ContactorIndication

It is in green, when the APU GEN line contactor is closed.
It is in white, if the line contactor is open.
Ident.: DSC-49-20-B-00017872.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
(5) APU GEN

It is identical to the APU GEN parameters on the ELEC page.
Ident.: DSC-49-20-B-00017873.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
(6) FUEL LO PR
It is in amber, if APU fuel low pressure is detected.
Ident.: DSC-49-20-B-00017874.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
(7) FLAP OPEN

Displayed in green, when the APU air intake flap is fully open (MASTER SW pb-sw is ON).
Ident.: DSC-49-20-B-00017875.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
(8) APU N
‐ Displays the APU speed in green
‐ It becomes red, when N ≥ 107 %.
Ident.: DSC-49-20-B-00017876.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
(9) APU EGT

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
APU
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ It displays the APU EGT (needle and digital indication) in green

‐ It pulses, when the ECB detects an advisory
‐ It becomes red, when EGT ≥ RED EGT LIM. In this case an automatic shutdown of the APU
occurs.
Note: ECB calculates the RED EGT LIM and transmits it to the ECAM. It is equal to the lower
border of the red sector. It is a function of N during start, and a function of ambient
temperature and pressure when the APU is running.
Maximum EGT during start : 1 250 °C (corresponding to 0 % APU speed).
Maximum EGT with APU running : 650 °C (Sea level, standard day).
Ident.: DSC-49-20-B-00017877.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
(10) LOW OIL LEVEL

This advisory is displayed, if the ECB detects a low APU oil level, when the aircraft is on ground and
the APU is not running.
MEMO DISPLAY
Ident.: DSC-49-20-00017093.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
APU AVAIL : This memo appears in green when APU N is above 95%.

UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-52-10-20 Passengers Doors

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Outside..................................................................................................................................................................... B
Inside........................................................................................................................................................................C
DSC-52-10-30 Emergency Exits

Cockpit..................................................................................................................................................................... A
Cabin........................................................................................................................................................................ B
DSC-52-10-40 Cargo Doors

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
FWD and AFT Cargo Doors....................................................................................................................................B
Bulk Cargo Door......................................................................................................................................................C
Cargo Doors............................................................................................................................................................ D
Location of the Service Panels............................................................................................................................... E
DSC-52-10-50 Avionics Compartment Access Door

Avionics Compartment Access Door.......................................................................................................................A
DSC-52-10-70 Escape Slides/Rafts

Cabin Door Slides/Rafts.......................................................................................................................................... A
Emergency Exit Slides.............................................................................................................................................B
Escape Slide Arrangement......................................................................................................................................C
DSC-52-10-80 Doors and Slides Control System

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Architecture.............................................................................................................................................................. B
Overhead Maintenance Panel  ........................................................................................................................C

ECAM DOOR/OXY Page........................................................................................................................................ A
DSC-52-30 Cockpit Door Security System

Cockpit Door Description.........................................................................................................................................A
Cockpit Door Damper.............................................................................................................................................. B

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

DSC-52-30-20 Cockpit Door Locking System (CDLS)
Description............................................................................................................................................................... A
Controls.................................................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-52-30-30 Cockpit Door Surveillance System (CDSS)

Description............................................................................................................................................................... A
Controls.................................................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-52-40 How to
How to Operate the Cockpit Door...........................................................................................................................A
How to Operate the Fwd and Aft Cargo Door........................................................................................................ B
How to Operate the Fwd and Aft Cargo Doors (Auxiliary Operation).....................................................................C
How to Leave the Aircraft via the Access Door in the Avionics Bay...................................................................... D

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-52-10-10-00017252.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
The A330 fuselage has :

‐ Six passenger doors
‐ Two emergency exits in the cabin
‐ Two cockpit emergency exits (sliding windows)
‐ Three cargo compartment doors
‐ One avionic compartment access door.
All doors are monitored by the Doors and Slides Control System (DSCS). The DSCS generates
indications and warnings on the doors and on the ECAM.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-10 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-52-10-10-00017252.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
The A330 fuselage has :

‐ Eight passenger doors
‐ Two cockpit emergency exits (sliding windows)
‐ Three cargo compartment doors
‐ One avionic compartment access door.
All doors are monitored by the Doors and Slides Control System (DSCS). The DSCS generates
indications and warnings on the doors and on the ECAM.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-10 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-10 P 3/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-10 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - PASSENGERS DOORS
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-52-10-20-00017380.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
The aircraft has six plug-type doors that open outward and forward. There are three doors on each
side of the fuselage (one door in FWD, MID and AFT sections).
The doors are operated from inside or outside. Normal operation is manual with hydraulic damping
and a gust lock mechanism.
Each door has emergency features:
‐ An escape slide stowed in a container, attached to the inboard lower side of the door
‐ A damper actuator. In normal mode, the damper actuator limits the door travel. in emergency
mode, the damper actuator drives the automatic door opening
‐ A slide arming lever.
When the slide arming lever is in the ARMED position, the slide is connected to the floor brackets
on both sides of the door. When the door is open from inside, the slide automatically inflates and
deploys. If the inflation bottle fails to automatically discharge, a crew member can open its valve to
make it discharge. Opening the door from outside disarms the door and the escape slide.
Each passenger door has:
‐ Two mechanical locking indicators that confirm the locked or unlocked position of the door
‐ One warning light to show the ARMED or DISARMED indication of the escape slides
‐ One CABIN PRESSURE warning light that illuminates in the case of a residual pressure in the
cabin.
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-52-10-20-00017380.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
The aircraft has eight plug-type doors that open outward and forward. There are four doors on each
side of the fuselage (two doors in FWD section, one door in MID and AFT sections).
The doors are operated from inside or outside. Normal operation is manual with hydraulic damping
and a gust lock mechanism.
Each door has emergency features:
‐ An escape slide stowed in a container, attached to the inboard lower side of the door
‐ A damper actuator. In normal mode, the damper actuator limits the door travel. In emergency
mode, the damper actuator drives the automatic door opening
‐ A slide arming lever.
When the slide arming lever is in the ARMED position, the slide is connected to the floor brackets
on both sides of the door. When the door is opened from inside, the slide automatically inflates and
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-20 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
deploys. If the inflation bottle fails to automatically discharge, a crew member can open its valve to
make it perform. Opening the door from outside disarms the door and the escape slide.
Each passenger door has:
‐ Two mechanical locking indicators that confirm the locked or unlocked position of the door
‐ One warning light to show the ARMED or DISARMED indication of the escape slides
‐ One CABIN PRESSURE warning light that illuminates in the case of a residual pressure in the
cabin.
OUTSIDE
Ident.: DSC-52-10-20-00001069.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Each cabin door can be opened from the outside.

Opening instructions are posted next to the opening handle.
Note: Opening a cabin door from the outside disarms the automatic opening system.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-20 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
INSIDE
Ident.: DSC-52-10-20-00001071.0003001 / 28 APR 14
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-20 P 3/4

FCOM C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-20 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - EMERGENCY EXITS
OPERATING MANUAL
COCKPIT
Ident.: DSC-52-10-30-00017382.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The two sliding windows in the cockpit are flight crew emergency exits.
A small compartment, located above each window, contains an escape rope that reaches the
ground, when lowered through the cockpit window.
The cockpit windows can only be opened from inside.
Emergency cockpit evacuation is also possible through the cockpit door escape panel.
CABIN
Ident.: DSC-52-10-30-00017381.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
One plug-type emergency exit door is located on each side of the cabin.
They open outward and forward, and are each equipped with an escape slide. The escape slide is
stowed in a container which is attached to the lower part of the emergency exit door.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-30 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - EMERGENCY EXITS
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-30 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - CARGO DOORS
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-52-10-40-00017386.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has two cargo compartment doors and a bulk cargo compartment door  on the right
side of the fuselage, below the cabin floor.
FWD AND AFT CARGO DOORS

Ident.: DSC-52-10-40-00017385.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The FWD and AFT cargo doors open outward and upward. The doors are hydraulically operated by
the yellow hydraulic system. The door locking system is mechanical. When a door is open, the door
actuator is mechanically locked in its extended position.
If the electric pump of the yellow hydraulic system fails, the system can be powered by using a hand
pump, located on the hydraulic maintenance panel.
The FWD and AFT cargo doors open only from the outside.
A red light fitted in the locking handle’s compartment indicates a residual cabin pressure.
The door open indicates light confirms that the door is locked in the open position for a safe cargo
loading operation.
Ten flag indicators inform the operator that the door is fully locked. A pop-up flag indicator warns of
an open loop (the door is not fully locked).
Note: When the electric pump operates the FWD or AFT cargo door, no other yellow system
device remains operative. The leak measurement valves of yellow system close, and an
SFCC inhibition prevents any flap movement.
BULK CARGO DOOR

Ident.: DSC-52-10-40-00017384.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The bulk cargo door is a plug-type door that is mechanically locked and manually operated. The bulk
cargo door opens inward and upward.
The bulk cargo door can be opened either from inside or from the outside.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-40 P 1/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CARGO DOORS
Ident.: DSC-52-10-40-00017383.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-40 P 2/4

FCOM D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LOCATION OF THE SERVICE PANELS

Ident.: DSC-52-10-40-00020504.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-40 P 3/4

FCOM E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-40 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - AVIONICS COMPARTMENT ACCESS DOOR
OPERATING MANUAL
AVIONICS COMPARTMENT ACCESS DOOR

Ident.: DSC-52-10-50-00018091.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The avionics compartment access door enables an external access to the avionics compartment.
The door is a manually operated hinged door and opens inwards. This door is located on the lower
fuselage, forward of the nose landing gear bay. An avionics compartment access ladder  is
stowed inside the compartment, adjacent to this door which may either be operated from the interior
or exterior.
The avionics compartment is also accessible from the cockpit, via a hatch in the floor behind the
captain’s seat. A ladder is fixed in the avionics compartment for access from the cockpit.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-50 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - AVIONICS COMPARTMENT ACCESS DOOR
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-50 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - ESCAPE SLIDES/RAFTS
OPERATING MANUAL
CABIN DOOR SLIDES/RAFTS

Ident.: DSC-52-10-70-00001096.0001001 / 14 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL
SLIDE MODE
Automatic : Normally automatic inflation when slide is armed and door opens
operation
Manual operation : If the slide falls down from the door but does not inflate, inflation can
be started manually by pulling the handle which is attached at the girt
extension of the slide/raft.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-70 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
RAFT MODE
To disconnect the slide from the aircraft, pull the disconnect handle. The slide raft is moored to the
aircraft by means of the ditching line which has to be cut to completly free the slide/raft from the
aircraft.
EMERGENCY EXIT SLIDES

Ident.: DSC-52-10-70-00001104.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Operation is identical to passenger door slides/rafts operation. Only the slide mode is available.
ESCAPE SLIDE ARRANGEMENT

Ident.: DSC-52-10-70-00018095.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Each passenger door has a dual lane escape slide raft, and each emergency exit has a single lane
escape slide.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-70 P 2/4

FCOM ← A to C → 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ESCAPE SLIDE ARRANGEMENT

Ident.: DSC-52-10-70-00018095.0005001 / 21 MAR 16
Passenger doors are equipped with dual lane escape slide rafts.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-70 P 3/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-70 P 4/4

FCOM ←C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - DOORS AND SLIDES CONTROL SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-52-10-80-00018096.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The Doors and Slides Control System (DSCS) consists of:

‐ Proximity switches, installed on each door
‐ The Proximity Switch Control Unit (PSCU)
‐ A pressure switch (ΔP of the cabin)
‐ An autonomous standby power supply.
The Doors and Slide Control system performs the following functions:
‐ Door warning system: Indicates the state (LOCKED/UNLOCKED) of each door on the ECAM
‐ Escape slide warning system: Indicates the state (ARMED/DISARMED) of the slide, on the ECAM
and on the slide warning light. In addition to the white light, a warning horn  sounds to avoid an
inadvertent escape slide extension, during normal door opening
‐ Overpressure warning system: Indicates an excessive residual differential cabin pressure to the
passenger doors, the emergency exits, and the FWD and AFT cargo doors
‐ Electrical control of the FWD and AFT cargo doors.
When a door (CAB, CARGO, BULK) is not fully closed and locked, or a sensor is faulty, the DSCS
prevents aircraft pressurization with one engine running. In such a case, the DSCS signals the cabin
pressure system to keep the outflow valves open, and signals the zone controller to close the pack
flow control valves.
If one proximity switch fails, the faulty switch can be overridden by using the DOOR SW OVRD pb
 , as per the MMEL procedure.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-80 P 1/4

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ARCHITECTURE
Ident.: DSC-52-10-80-00018097.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
OVERHEAD MAINTENANCE PANEL 

Ident.: DSC-52-10-80-00018098.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) DOOR SW OVRD (guarded) switch :

ARM light : Comes on in white, when the pushbutton is pressed once. Initiates the
override procedure.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-80 P 2/4

FCOM B to C → 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
OVRD light : Comes on in blue, when the pushbutton is pressed once again, after the
affected door has been locked and checked locked.
The override procedure is successful.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-80 P 3/4

FCOM ←C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-10-80 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ECAM DOOR/OXY PAGE

Ident.: DSC-52-20-00018099.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) DOOR symbol

Green (symbol : The door is closed and locked.
outline)
Amber (filled : The door is not locked.
symbol)
(2) DOOR indication
It is amber, when the door is not locked.
It is white, when the information is not valid.
It is suppressed, when the door is closed.
(3) SLIDE indication
It is white, when the slide is armed.
It is in amber, when the slide is disarmed and the door is open.
Both are suppressed, when the slide is disarmed and the door is closed.

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW COCKPIT DOOR SECURITY SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
COCKPIT DOOR DESCRIPTION

Ident.: DSC-52-30-10-00017227.0009001 / 20 MAR 17
A forward-opening hinge door separates the cockpit from the passenger compartment. It has an
electric-locking latch, controlled by the flight crew. In normal conditions, when the door is closed, it
remains locked. When there is a request to enter the cockpit, the flight crew can authorize entry by
unlocking the door, that remains closed until it is pushed open.
When the flight crew does not respond to requests for entry, the door can also be unlocked by
the cabin crew, by entering a two to seven-digit code (programmed by the airline) on the keypad,
installed on the door post. The door is bulletproof and fully compliant with rapid decompression
requirements.
A mechanical override enables the flight crew to open the door from the cockpit side.
The evacuation and decompression panel enables the flight crew to evacuate the cockpit, in case of
an emergency, when the door is jammed or stuck.
This panel can only be removed from the cockpit side by kicking it open.
The panel also automatically falls open, in case of rapid cabin decompression (in case of rapid
decompression in the cockpit, the CDLS automatically unlocks the door).
In case of an electrical supply failure, the door is automatically unlocked, but remains closed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-10 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
A deadbolt  located near the center latch area of the cockpit door, enables to bolt the door from
the cockpit side, in the event that more than one locking latch strike fails, or in the case of a total
CDLS failure.
A Circuit Breaker (C/B) box, is installed on the left-hand side of the door frame.
This C/B box has three C/Bs. Each C/B is connected to one cockpit door electrical latch.
COCKPIT DOOR DESCRIPTION

Ident.: DSC-52-30-10-00017227.0010001 / 20 MAR 17
A forward-opening hinge door separates the cockpit from the passenger compartment. It has an
electric-locking latch, controlled by the flight crew. In normal conditions, when the door is closed, it
remains locked. When there is a request to enter the cockpit, the flight crew can authorize entry by
unlocking the door, that remains closed until it is pushed open.
When the flight crew does not respond to requests for entry, the door can also be unlocked by
the cabin crew, by entering a two to seven-digit code (programmed by the airline) on the keypad,
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-10 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
installed on the door post. The door is bulletproof and fully compliant with rapid decompression
requirements.
A mechanical override enables the flight crew to open the door from the cockpit side.
The evacuation and decompression panel enables the flight crew to evacuate the cockpit, in case of
an emergency, when the door is jammed or stuck.
This panel can only be removed from the cockpit side by kicking it open.
The panel also automatically falls open, in case of rapid cabin decompression (in case of rapid
decompression in the cockpit, the CDLS automatically unlocks the door).
In case of an electrical supply failure, the door is automatically unlocked, but remains closed.
A deadbolt  located near the center latch, enables to bolt the door from the cockpit side, in the
event that more than one locking latch strike fails, or in the case of a total CDLS failure.
A Circuit Breaker (C/B) box, is installed on the left-hand side of the door frame.
This C/B box has three C/Bs. Each C/B is connected to one cockpit door electrical latch.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-10 P 3/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
COCKPIT DOOR DAMPER

Ident.: DSC-52-30-10-00014315.0001001 / 11 MAY 12
Applicable to: ALL
The cockpit door has a noise damper installed on its top right corner, on the cockpit side.
The damper slows down the door during closing.
In the case of a damper blockage, to disengage the damper, the flight crew has to:
‐ rotate the red lever up
‐ pull the striker down until it aligns with the door edge, and
‐ rotate the red lever back down to lock the striker in the down position.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-10 P 4/4

FCOM B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340 COCKPIT DOOR SECURITY SYSTEM -
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL COCKPIT DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM (CDLS)
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-52-30-20-00019042.0005001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Cockpit Door Locking System (CDLS) provides a means of electrically locking and unlocking the
cockpit door. This system is mainly composed of:
‐ A keypad, located in the forward cabin, near the cockpit door,
‐ A toggle switch, located on the center pedestal's Cockpit Door panel,
‐ A control unit and its CKPT DOOR CONT normal panel, located on the overhead panel,
‐ A backup control unit, identical to the first one, and its CKPT DOOR CONT backup panel, located
on the overhead panel,
‐ An additional CKPT DOOR BKUP panel, which is composed of a LKG SYS switch and a
OPEN/FAULT control pushbutton,
‐ A buzzer.
The keypad enables the cabin crew to request access to the cockpit. There are two different access
request types: “Routine” and “Emergency” access request.
The toggle switch enables the flight crew to lock or unlock the cockpit door, following an access
request, thereby allowing or denying entry into the cockpit.
The cockpit door control unit is the system controller, in charge of:
‐ Locking or unlocking the door latches, upon flight crew action.
‐ Unlocking the door, in case of cockpit decompression (the door then opens towards the cockpit
under differential pressure).
‐ Indicating system failures of electrical latches and pressure sensors.
‐ Activating the access request buzzer and turning on the keypad LEDs.
The CDLS backup control unit is a backup for locking/unlocking the door by flight crew action, and
for unlocking the door in case of decompression. The backup control has to be used only when the
normal control unit has failed, or when the two pressure sensors have failed.
When operating the CDLS with the backup control unit, both the toggle switch and the keypad are
inoperative. In this condition:
‐ The cabin crew has to use the interphone to perform any cockpit access request, and
‐ The flight crew has to use the OPEN/FAULT CTL P/B located on the CKPT DOOR BKUP
overhead panel, to unlock the door when access to the cockpit is authorized.
‐ No emergency access from the cabin to the cockpit is available.
By using the CKPT DOOR BKUP LKG SYS selector, it is possible to operate the CDLS in normal
condition, in backup condition, or to deactivate the system to facilitate maintenance tasks and ground
operations.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-20 P 1/6

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
FLIGHT CREW
The buzzer sounds in the cockpit for 1 to 9 s to indicate that a routine access request has been
made, or sounds continuously if an emergency access procedure has been initiated.
CONTROLS
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-52-30-20-10-00000145.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
KEYPAD
The keypad is used by the cabin crew to request pilots to open the door.
(1) LOCKED/UNLOCKED DOOR INDICATOR

GREEN light ON : The door has been unlocked either by a flight crew action, or
automatically (during 5 s) when no flight crew action has been
performed during the delay following an emergency access
request. The door can be pushed open.
GREEN light flashes : An emergency request to enter the cockpit has been made; the
buzzer will sound continuously in the cockpit, but no action has
yet been taken by the flight crew.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-20 P 2/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
FLIGHT CREW
RED light ON : The flight crew has denied access, and the door remains
locked.
WHITE light ON  : The light comes on each time the cabin crew presses a key on
the keypad.
(2) DIGITAL KEYPAD
The keypad is used to sound the buzzer in the cockpit for one to nine seconds (3 s by
default), by entering a zero to seven-digit code, as programmed by the airline, followed by
the '#' key.
It is also used to enter the two to seven-digit emergency code, followed by the '#' key, when
the flight crew does not respond.
Note: During the test performed by the cockpit door control unit, the CDLS keypad
remains operational, and the CDLS operates as follows:
The control unit will store access codes that are entered, and the
LOCKED/UNLOCKED DOOR INDICATOR (RED/GREEN LEDs) of the keypad will
remain on, as long as the test is running:
‐ If the correct access code is entered on the keypad, the buzzer will not sound,
until the test is completed
‐ If the emergency access code is entered, the door will unlock. The cockpit
buzzer and the LOCKED/UNLOCKED DOOR INDICATOR will be inoperative.
Ident.: DSC-52-30-20-10-00000150.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
CENTRAL PEDESTAL COCKPIT DOOR PANEL

The secured cockpit door opening is controlled by a toggle switch, located on the central pedestal.
(1) COCKPIT DOOR sw

UNLOCK position : This position is used to enable the cabin crewmember to open
the door. The switch must be pulled and maintained in the unlock
position until the door is pushed open.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-20 P 3/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
FLIGHT CREW
NORM position : All latches are locked, and EMERGENCY access is possible for
the cabin crew.
LOCK position : Once the switch has been moved to this position, the door is
locked; emergency access, the buzzer, and the keypad are
inhibited for a preselected time (5 to 20 min).
Note: 1. If the LOCK position has not been used by the pilot, for at least 5 to 20 min, the
cabin crew is able to request emergency access to open the cockpit door.
2. The UNLOCK position overrides and resets any previous selection.
3. In case of an electrical supply failure, the cockpit door is automatically unlocked,
but remains closed.
(2) COCKPIT DOOR Fault Open
OPEN light ON : The door is not closed.
OPEN light flashes : The cabin crew has started an emergency access procedure. If
there is no reaction from the flight crew, the door will unlock at
the end of the adjustable time delay (15 to 120 s).
FAULT : This light comes on when a system failure has been identified
(Example: Latch, pressure sensors, control unit).
The inoperative item can be identified by checking the strike and
pressure sensor status lights on the CKPT DOOR CONT panel.
Ident.: DSC-52-30-20-10-00000155.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL

The CDLS consists of two separate but identical control units and, therefore, there are two CKPT
DOOR CONT panels (normal and backup). The normal control panel is located on the overhead
left-hand side, whereas the backup is located on the right-hand side.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-20 P 4/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
FLIGHT CREW
(1) Strikes' status lights

Off : The corresponding (upper, mid, or lower) locking latch is operative.
On : The corresponding (upper, mid, or lower) locking latch is faulty.
(2) Pressure sensor
Two redundant differential pressure sensors enable rapid pressure variation in the cockpit
to be detected, in order to command simultaneous opening of all latches when a defined
pressure drop is detected.
(3) Pressure sensor status lights
Off : The corresponding (1 or 2) pressure sensor is operative.
On : The corresponding (1 or 2) pressure sensor is faulty.
Note: These indicators enable the crew to identify the faulty item, when the CDLS Fault
indicator light is ON, (either for the normal or backup system).
Ident.: DSC-52-30-20-10-00019214.0007001 / 20 MAR 17
COCKPIT DOOR BACKUP

The Cockpit Door Backup control panel has a guarded, three-position switch, and a CTL
pushbutton with a dual visual indicator.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-20 P 5/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
FLIGHT CREW
(1) LKG SYS selector

NORM : The basic system has no failure; the normal control is operative.
BK UP : Normal control is deactivated, and Backup control is activated.
OFF : The Cockpit Door Locking System is deactivated. Both normal and backup
controls are inoperative. Therefore, the door is unlocked. It can be pushed
open from the cabin side.
(2) CTL guarded pushbutton, OPEN/FAULT indicator
OPEN P/B : Pressing this pushbutton unlocks the door.
Keep the pushbutton pressed, until the door is pushed open.
OPEN light ON : The door is not closed.
FAULT ON : This light comes on, when a backup system failure has been
identified. The inoperative item can be identified by checking the strike
and pressure sensor status lights on the CKPT DOOR CONT backup
panel.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-20 P 6/6

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340 COCKPIT DOOR SECURITY SYSTEM - COCKPIT
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL DOOR SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (CDSS)
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-52-30-30-00019217.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Cockpit Door Surveillance System (CDSS) consists of three video cameras. Video cameras
enable the flight crew to identify persons prior to authorizing their entry into the cockpit. A display
(LCD), located in the rear part of the cockpit, displays the various camera views. The display has
automatic brightness adjustment and is activated by the Cockpit Door Video pb.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-30 P 1/4

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
FLIGHT CREW
CONTROLS
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-52-30-30-10-00019218.0020001 / 20 MAR 17
CENTRAL PEDESTAL
(1) Video pb
Selects the various camera image displays:
Camera 1 image : Displayed by pressing the pushbutton when the screen is
on standby, or after Camera 2 and 3 images have been
displayed.
Automatically displayed, after an entry request is performed
on the keypad.
Camera 2 and 3 images : Displayed on a split screen, when the pushbutton is pressed
after Camera 1's image has been displayed.
Standby : If no action has been taken for 5 min, the screen goes blank
and remains on standby.
Note: An entry request, performed on the keypad within 30 s following an earlier entry
request, will not lead to the automatic selection of Camera 1, since the flight crew
is given authority to select any desired camera image via the cockpit door video
pushbutton. After these 30 s, the system reverts to its normal operation.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-30 P 2/4

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
FLIGHT CREW
Ident.: DSC-52-30-30-10-00000169.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
OVERHEAD PANEL
(1) Cockpit Door Video pushbutton

OFF: The Cockpit Door Surveillance System is manually de-energized.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-30 P 3/4

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
FLIGHT CREW
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-52-30-30 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW HOW TO
OPERATING MANUAL
HOW TO OPERATE THE COCKPIT DOOR

Ident.: DSC-52-40-00020452.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The secured cockpit door operation is controlled by a toggle sw that is located on the COCKPIT
DOOR panel (central pedestral).
DOOR OPENING FROM THE COCKPIT
To enable access to the cockpit, set and maintain the COCKPIT DOOR sw to the UNLOCK
position until the door is fully opened. When the door is fully opened, the COCKPIT DOOR sw can
be released to the NORM position.
DOOR CLOSING FROM THE COCKPIT
Close the door and check that the OPEN indicator goes off. If the COCKPIT DOOR sw is in the
NORM position, the door is locked and emergency access is possible from the cabin. When
the door is fully closed, if the cockpit door FAULT light is ON, Refer to PRO-ABN-DOOR [QRH]
COCKPIT DOOR FAULT
Note: If the OPEN indicator is ON when the door is closed, the door may be unlocked. Repeat
the above-mentioned opening/closing procedure.
When the COCKPIT DOOR sw is in the LOCK position the door is locked. In this position, the
emergency access, the buzzer, and the keypad are inhibited for a preselected time (5 to 20 min).
ROUTINE ACCESS TO THE COCKPIT FROM THE CABIN (I.E. NORMAL ACCESS)
To request access to the cockpit from the cabin, use the keypad to enter the code and validate
with the “#” key.
L2 The Operator defines this code (between 0 and 7 digits).
L1 The buzzer sounds in the cockpit for 1 to 9 s (3 s by default).
After identification of the person (using the Cockpit Door Surveillance System  ) that requests
access, set the COCKPIT DOOR sw to UNLOCK position to unlock the door. A steady green light
on the keypad comes on, that indicates that the door is unlocked.
If the flight crew refuses access to the cockpit by setting the COCKPIT DOOR sw to LOCK
position, a steady red light on the keypad comes on, that indicates that the door is locked. The
keypad and the buzzer are inhibited for a defined period of time.
If the flight crew does not respond, the door remains locked. If the flight crew does not take
any action after a routine cabin request, the cabin crew will be able to open the door with the
emergency access procedure.
EMERGENCY ACCESS FROM CABIN TO THE COCKPIT
To request emergency access to the cockpit, use the keypad to enter the emergency code and
validate with the “#” key.

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW HOW TO
OPERATING MANUAL
L2 The Operator defines this emergency code (between 2 and 7 digits).

L1 The buzzer continuously sounds in the cockpit and the OPEN light flashes on the COCKPIT
DOOR panel (central pedestal). In the cabin, the green light on the keypad flashes until the flight
crew uses the COCKPIT DOOR sw to either lock or unlock the cockpit door.
After identification of the person (via the Cockpit Door Surveillance system  ) that requests
access, use the COCKPIT DOOR sw to unlock the door.
If the flight crew refuses access by setting the COCKPIT DOOR sw to LOCK position, the keypad
and the buzzer are inhibited for a defined period of time.
If the flight crew does not respond, after a preselected time between 15 and 120 s, the door
automatically unlocks for 5 s and a steady green light on the keypad comes. The buzzer stops and
indicates that the door is unlocked.
EVACUATION THROUGH THE DECOMPRESSION AND EVACUATION PANEL
Pull the quick-release pins of the escape panel towards the center of the flap. Kick the escape
panel toward the cabin and evacuate the cockpit.
HOW TO OPERATE THE FWD AND AFT CARGO DOOR

Ident.: DSC-52-40-00020423.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
NORMAL OPERATION
OPENING
On the cargo door, push the handle flap inward to release the door handle from the catch
of the door structure. Then, pull the door handle away and upward from the LOCKED to the
UNLOCKED position.
Note: All indicator flags at the lower section of the door move out from the door contour.
These flags provide a visual indication that the cargo door is unlocked.
Check the differential pressure before the operation of the latching handle.
WARNING Before operating the latching handle, check the differential pressure. If the red
indicator light flashes, do not open the cargo door as an overpressure may exist
in the cargo hold.
To unlatch the cargo door, first press the pushbutton on the latching handle, then pull the handle
down to the UNLATCHED position.
Open the access door of the door service panel to get access to the selector valve lever. Set
the selector valve lever to the OPEN position and maintain the lever in this position until the
green indicator light comes on. The green indicator light indicates that the door is fully open and
locked.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW HOW TO
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: The yellow hydraulic system is pressurized (the YELLOW ELEC PUMP is energized).
The operation of the flight controls and PTU is inhibited.
When the cargo door is fully open, release the selector valve lever. When released, the lever
returns to the neutral (STOP) position and shuts down the electrical pump after 10 s.
CAUTION Check that the lever is in the neutral position and the pump operation has
stopped. Continuous operation of the electrical pump leads to overheat.
CLOSING
To close the cargo door, set the selector valve lever to the CLOSE position and maintain the
lever in this position until the green indicator light goes off. This indicates that the door is fully
closed and locked.
Note: At first the selector valve lever locks in an intermediate position, maintaining a preset
pressurization to prevent the door from dropping open.
When the door is fully closed, release the selector valve lever. The lever returns to the neutral
position and shuts down the yellow hydraulic electrical pump.
Note: Release the lever within 1 min after door closure.
On the cargo door, push the latching handle back into its cavity. Push the door locking handle
downward to the LOCKED position.
When the door is locked, the CARGO door indication on the ECAM goes off, and the handle flap
mechanism locks the operating handle.
Close the access door of the door service panel.
HOW TO OPERATE THE FWD AND AFT CARGO DOORS (AUXILIARY OPERATION)
Ident.: DSC-52-40-00020425.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
AUXILIARY OPERATION
In case of an electrical failure or if the yellow hydraulic electric pump fails, the operator can open
or close the forward and the aft cargo doors by using the hand pump which is accessible via the
ground service panel.
Note: Two persons are necessary for this operation.
MANUAL OPENING
To open the cargo door by using the hand pump, unlock the cargo door by using the operating
handle as for normal operation.
Open the yellow hydraulic ground service panel that is located in the belly fairing area. Ensure
that the selector valve lever is in the CLOSE position.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW HOW TO
OPERATING MANUAL
Open the access door of the door service panel. Set the selector valve lever to the OPEN
position and maintain the lever in this position during the operation of the hand pump.
Operate the hand pump until the cargo door is in the fully open position.
When the cargo door is fully open the green light on the door service panel comes on, or the
operation of the hand pump suddenly becomes difficult.
Release the selector valve lever of the door service panel. Then, set the selector valve lever (of
the ground service panel) to the OPEN position.
MANUAL CLOSING
To close the cargo door, set the selector valve lever (on the door service panel) to the CLOSE
position and maintain the lever in this position.
Operate the hand pump until the cargo door is in the fully closed position.
When the cargo door is fully closed, release the lever of the manual selector valve of the door
service panel.
Lock the cargo door by using the operating handle as for normal operation.
Close the access door of the door service panel and of the ground service panel.
HOW TO LEAVE THE AIRCRAFT VIA THE ACCESS DOOR IN THE AVIONICS BAY
Ident.: DSC-52-40-00020453.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
In order to open the floor hatch to get access to the avionics bay, move entirely forward the captain
seat. Then, descend into the avionics bay and take a position on the right side of the access door
that is located in the avionics bay.
Note: Do not try to open the access door while standing on it.
When inside the avionics bay, open the floor panel (1) which covers the avionics bay access door
handle (2), located at the aft, center part of the access door (coin may be needed to open the lock).
In order to open the access door (3), lift the handle (2) and pull the door completely into the bay until
it is latched in its upper stop (LH).
Then, remove the strap which fixes the ladder assembly against motion. Lift the lever (4), located on
the right side aft of the lower rung of the aft ladder element, to unlock the ladder assembly and swing
it simultaneously towards the opening.
Release the lower locking device on the right inner side of the first ladder element (5) by pulling the
orange handle forward (indicated on a placard next to the locking device). Then lower the element
until it latches.
Repeat the above steps with the second ladder element (locking device (6) is at the left inner side).
If the ladder does not touch the ground yet, the last element is lowered by pulling forward its orange
handle at the lower end on the left outer side.
If the ladder touches the ground leave the aircraft via the extended ladder.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW HOW TO
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
DOORS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW HOW TO
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COCKPIT WINDOWS
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-56-10 General
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-56-20 Fixed Windows

Fixed Windows.........................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-56-30 Sliding Windows

Sliding Windows.......................................................................................................................................................A
Description............................................................................................................................................................... A

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-56-10-00000109.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The cockpit has fixed and sliding windows.

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FIXED WINDOWS
OPERATING MANUAL
FIXED WINDOWS
Ident.: DSC-56-20-00000116.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
There are four fixed windows :

‐ two windshields
‐ two fixed side windows

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FIXED WINDOWS
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW SLIDING WINDOWS
OPERATING MANUAL
SLIDING WINDOWS
Ident.: DSC-56-30-00000122.0001001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
The flight crew can use the sliding window as emergency exits. Therefore they are not permitted to
stow any object so that it protrudes into the window area from the side console.
Each sliding window includes a panel which as an anti-icing and defogging system, and the opening
and closing mechanism.
OPENING MECHANISM
Fully press the operating lever to disengage the locking pins from their latches.
Rotate aft the operating lever to free the window panel from its fixed structure.
At the end of the operating lever travel, pull backwards to slide the window panel aft.
Move control lever forward lock the window.
CLOSING MECHANISM
Move control lever aft unlock the window.
Push operating lever forward until the panel is in position opposite its fixed frame.
Rotate the operating lever forward to move the panel into its frame and engage the locking pins in
their latches.

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW SLIDING WINDOWS
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-56-40-00013842.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
COCKPIT WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS DESCRIPTION

All cockpit windows are fail-safe design.
The windows are made of:
‐ A non structural ply, the Outer ply (1), which is only a protective layer
‐ Two structural plies, the Middle ply (2) and the Inner ply (3)
Each structural ply is able to sustain individually the pressurization loads
‐ A heating film (4) to defog and/or de-ice the windshield/window
‐ Two interlayers (5).
Typical Structure Of A Cockpit Window (Cut View)
For information on cockpit window damage procedure, description and evaluation method, Refer
to FCTM/PR-AEP-MISC Cockpit Windshield/Window Cracked.

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-70-05 Overview
Overview.................................................................................................................................................................. A
DSC-70-10 System Description

DSC-70-10-10 Engine
Engine...................................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-70-20 FADEC
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Schematic.................................................................................................................................................................B
Functions..................................................................................................................................................................C
DSC-70-30 Thrust Control System (CFM, GE, TRENT-7000)

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-70-30-30 Thrust Levers

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Manual Mode........................................................................................................................................................... B
Thrust Bump............................................................................................................................................................ C
Engagement-Disengagement.................................................................................................................................. D
Activation-Deactivation.............................................................................................................................................E
DSC-70-30-40 Thrust Rating Limit

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Automatic Mode....................................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-70-40 Fuel System

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-70-40-20 Fuel Pump Unit / Main Engine Pump

Fuel Pump Unit........................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-70-40-30 Shutoff Valves

Shutoff Valves..........................................................................................................................................................A

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

DSC-70-40-40 Hydromechanical Unit / Fuel Metering Unit
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Fuel Flow................................................................................................................................................................. B
Overspeed Protection.............................................................................................................................................. C
Idle Control.............................................................................................................................................................. D
Fuel Hydraulic Signals.............................................................................................................................................E
DSC-70-40-50 IDG Oil Cooling System

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-70-50 Oil System

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-70-60 Airbleed System

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Cooling..................................................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-70-70 Thrust Reverser System

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Actuation Logic........................................................................................................................................................ B
Protection................................................................................................................................................................. C
Schematic................................................................................................................................................................ D
DSC-70-80 Ignition and Starting

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Architecture.............................................................................................................................................................. B
DSC-70-80-20 Ignition System

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Ignition for Starting.................................................................................................................................................. B
Continuous Ignition.................................................................................................................................................. C
DSC-70-80-30 Engine Starting System

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Automatic Starting....................................................................................................................................................B
Automatic Starting Sequence..................................................................................................................................C
Manual Starting........................................................................................................................................................D
Engine Ventilation (Dry Cranking)........................................................................................................................... E

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

DSC-70-80-40 Alternate Start/Ignition Information
Alternate Start/lgnition Information.......................................................................................................................... A

DSC-70-90-10 Overhead Panel
ENG MAN START Panel........................................................................................................................................ A
DSC-70-90-20 Pedestal
ENG START Selector and ENG MASTER Levers................................................................................................. A
Thrust Levers........................................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-70-90-30 Maintenance Panel

ENG FADEC GND PWR Panel.............................................................................................................................. A
DSC-70-90-40 Engine Display

Engine/Warning Display...........................................................................................................................................A
ENG SD Page......................................................................................................................................................... B

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW OVERVIEW
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERVIEW
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-70-05-10-00018999.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
The aircraft has two General Electric CF6-80E1 engines that supply power to the aircraft.
Ident.: DSC-70-05-10-00019000.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
The engines are turbofan engines that have:

‐ A high bypass ratio,
‐ A Full Authority Digital Engine Control (FADEC),
‐ A fuel system,
‐ An oil system,
‐ An air system,
‐ A thrust reverser system,
‐ An ignition system and a start system.

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW OVERVIEW
OPERATING MANUAL
Overview

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION - ENGINE
OPERATING MANUAL
ENGINE
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-70-10-10-10-00019001.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
The engine has:

‐ Two compressor turbine assemblies:
‐ The Low Pressure (LP) compressor turbine assembly,
‐ The High Pressure (HP) compressor turbine assembly.
L2 Each turbine operates its associated compressor via a shaft.
L1 ‐ One accessory gearbox,
‐ One combustion chamber.
The engine operates as follows:
1. The LP compressor compresses the air
2. Then, the air is divided into two flows:
‐ Most of the air flows out of the core engine, and provides most of the engine thrust,
‐ The remaining air enters the core engine.
3. The HP compressor compresses the air that enters the core engine.
4. The fuel is added to and mixed with the compressed air of the core engine. The mixture is ignited
in the combustion chamber.
5. The gas that results from combustion drives the HP and the LP turbines.
The rotation speed of the fan provides the N1 engine parameter.
The rotation speed of the HP rotor provides the N2 engine parameter.
The N1 and N2 engine parameters appear on the Engine/Warning Display (E/WD).
L2 The N1 and N2 engine parameters are current rotation speeds displayed in percentage.
L1 The FADEC uses:
‐ The N1 engine parameter to compute the applicable engine thrust,

‐ The N1 and N2 engine parameters for engine control and monitoring.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-10-10 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-70-10-10-10-00019003.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Ident.: DSC-70-10-10-10-00019004.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
LP COMPRESSOR TURBINE ASSEMBLY

The LP compressor turbine assembly has:
‐ One LP compressor,
L2 ‐ One LP shaft,
L1 ‐ One LP turbine.
L2 The LP shaft connects the LP compressor to the LP turbine.
L3 The LP compressor has a fan and 4 stages, and the LP turbine has 5 stages.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-10-10 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-70-10-10-10-00019006.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
HP COMPRESSOR TURBINE ASSEMBLY

The HP compressor turbine assembly has:
‐ One HP compressor,
L2 ‐ One HP shaft,
L1 ‐ One HP turbine.
L2 The HP shaft connects the HP compressor to the HP turbine.
L3 The HP compressor has 14 stages, and the HP turbine has two stages.
Ident.: DSC-70-10-10-10-00019007.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
COMBUSTION CHAMBER
The combustion chamber burns a mixture of fuel and HP air.
The FADEC controls the fuel/air mixture in accordance with the position of the thrust lever and the
aircraft operating conditions.
L3 The combustion chamber is an annular assembly with fuel nozzles and two igniters. The
combustion chamber is between the HP compressor and the HP turbine.
Ident.: DSC-70-10-10-10-00019008.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
ACCESSORY GEARBOX
The accessory gearbox drives various accessories with mechanical power via the HP shaft for the
operation of the engine and the aircraft systems.
L2 The accessory gearbox of each engine operates:
‐ The oil feed pump that provides the oil system with oil.
‐ The main engine fuel pump that provides the combustion chamber with fuel.
‐ The engine-driven hydraulic pumps that pressurize the GREEN, the BLUE and the YELLOW
hydraulic systems.
‐ The engine-driven generators that are the primary source of electrical power.
‐ The FADEC alternator that provides the FADEC with electrical power.
‐ The pneumatic starter that enables the engine start.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-10-10 P 3/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-10-10 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FADEC
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-70-20-00020632.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Each powerplant has a FADEC (Full Authority Digital Engine Control) system.
FADEC is a digital control system that performs complete engine management.
FADEC has two-channel redundancy, with one channel active and one standby.
If one channel fails, the other automatically takes control.
The system has a magnetic alternator for an internal power source.
FADEC is mounted on the fan case.
The Engine Interface Unit (EIVMU/EIU) transmits the data it uses for engine management to the
FADEC.

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FADEC
OPERATING MANUAL
SCHEMATIC
Ident.: DSC-70-20-00020633.0002001 / 17 MAR 17

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FADEC
OPERATING MANUAL
Applicable to: ALL

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FADEC
OPERATING MANUAL
FUNCTIONS
Ident.: DSC-70-20-00020634.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The FADEC system performs the following functions:

Control of gas generation
‐ Control of fuel flow
‐ Acceleration and deceleration schedules
‐ Variable bleed valve and variable stator vane schedules
‐ Control of turbine clearance
‐ Idle setting
Protection against engine exceeding limits
‐ Protection against N1 and N2 overspeed
‐ Monitoring of EGT during engine start
Power management
‐ Automatic control of engine thrust rating
‐ Computation of thrust parameter limits
‐ Manual management of power, based on thrust lever position
‐ Automatic power management (A/THR demand)
Automatic engine starting sequence
‐ Control of the:
• Start valve
• HP fuel valve
• Fuel flow
• Ignition
‐ Monitoring of N1, N2, FF and EGT
‐ Initiation of abort and recycle (on ground only)
Manual engine starting sequence
‐ Passive monitoring of the engine
‐ Active protection (on ground only) against high EGT and for starter reengagement speed
‐ Control of the:
• Start valve
• HP fuel valve
• Ignition

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FADEC
OPERATING MANUAL
Thrust reverser control

‐ Actuation of the blocker cowls
‐ Engine setting during reverser operation
Transmission of engine parameters and engine monitoring information to cockpit indicators
‐ The primary engine parameters
‐ The starting system status
‐ The thrust reverser system status
‐ The FADEC system status
‐ Secondary engine parameters (oil temperature, nacelle temperature, oil filter clog and fuel filter
clogging)
Fuel used Computation
Fuel flow integration
Management of engine heat
Control of the core compartment cooling valve
Management of IDG heat
Control of the IDG air/oil heat exchanger air valve
Failure detection, isolation and recording

FCOM ←C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FADEC
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW THRUST CONTROL SYSTEM (CFM, GE, TRENT-7000) - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-70-30-10-00020655.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
A FADEC dedicated to each engine controls the thrust.

The pilot uses the thrust levers to set the thrust in manual mode, and the FMGS sets the thrust in
automatic mode.
The FADEC prevents the thrust from exceeding the limit for the thrust lever position in both manual
and automatic modes.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-30-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW THRUST CONTROL SYSTEM (CFM, GE, TRENT-7000) - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-30-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW THRUST CONTROL SYSTEM (CFM, GE, TRENT-7000) - THRUST LEVERS
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-70-30-30-00020636.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The thrust levers can only be moved manually.

The range of movement is divided into 3 operating segments.
The sector has 4 positions defined by detents or stops.
Thrust lever position is transmitted to the FADEC which computes and displays the thrust rating limit
and the N1 TLA.
MANUAL MODE
Ident.: DSC-70-30-30-00004787.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The engines are in the manual mode provided the A/THR function is:
‐ not armed or
‐ armed and not active (thrust lever not in the A/THR operating range and no alpha floor).
In these conditions, each engine is controlled by the position of its thrust lever.
The pilot controls the thrust by moving the thrust lever from IDLE to TOGA positions. Each position of
the thrust lever within these limits corresponds to an N1.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-30-30 P 1/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
When the thrust lever is in a detent, the corresponding N1 is equal to the N1 rating limit computed by
the FADEC for this engine.
When the thrust lever is in the FLX-MCT detent :

‐ On the ground :
The engine runs at the flex takeoff thrust rating if the MCDU has selected a flex takeoff
temperature that is higher than the current total air temperature (TAT). Otherwise the engine
produces maximum continuous thrust (MCT).
Note: A change of FLEX TEMP during the takeoff has no effect on the thrust.
‐ After take-off :
The pilot can change from FLX to MCT by moving the thrust lever to TOGA or CL, then back to
MCT. After that, he cannot use the FLX rating.
The pilot can always get MAX TO thrust by pushing the thrust lever all the way forward.
Note: Setting the thrust lever out of FLX MCT detent without reaching TOGA or CL detent has no
effect.
THRUST BUMP
Ident.: DSC-70-30-30-00020643.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
‐ The thrust bump can be used to obtain an additional thrust capability during takeoff.
‐ Maximum thrust increase is obtained with the TLA at TOGA position.
‐ Thrust power is increased by up to 2.5 % (corresponding to an N1 increase up to 1.7 %).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-30-30 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ It is activated by two guarded pushbuttons, that are located on each thrust lever.
‐ It remains active, in case of one engine failure.
ENGAGEMENT-DISENGAGEMENT
Ident.: DSC-70-30-30-00020790.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
• The thrust bump is engaged by the FADEC, when the following conditions are met:
‐ The engines are running (N2 > 50 %)
‐ TRA is in the forward thrust region
‐ One of the two thrust bump pushbuttons has been pressed.
‐ The A/C has been on ground for more than 30 s.
• Disengagement is effective:
‐ On ground, by reducing the thrust levers to, or below, MCT
‐ On ground, by pressing one of the two bump pushbuttons, if the thrust levers are not at above
MCT
‐ At engine shutdown.
ACTIVATION-DEACTIVATION
Ident.: DSC-70-30-30-00020791.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
• The thrust bump is activated, when the following condition is met:

‐ FLEX takeoff or derated takeoff have not been selected.
• Deactivation occurs:
‐ After takeoff, when the thrust lever is at, or below, CLB.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-30-30 P 3/4

FCOM ← C to E → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: ‐ A “B” will appear in green on the right side of the N1 indication, when the bump has been
engaged.
‐ The thrust bump is not available, in case of a go-around or touch-and-go.
‐ On ground, once selected, the bump function is engaged for takeoff, when the thrust
levers are above MCT. The FADEC will deselect the bump after takeoff, when the thrust
lever is at, or below, CLB.
‐ In case of EIVMU failure, after bump engagement, bump condition is maintained in the
FADEC.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-30-30 P 4/4

FCOM ←E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340 THRUST CONTROL SYSTEM (CFM, GE,
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL TRENT-7000) - THRUST RATING LIMIT
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-70-30-40-00004788.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The FADEC computes the thrust rating limit for each thrust lever position, as shown below. If the
thrust lever is set in a detent, the FADEC selects the rating limit corresponding to this detent.
If the thrust lever is set between two detents, the FADEC selects the rating limit corresponding to the
higher detent.
AUTOMATIC MODE
Ident.: DSC-70-30-40-00020649.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
In the autothrust mode (A/THR function active), the FMGC computes the thrust, which is limited to
the value corresponding to the thrust lever position (unless the alpha-floor mode is activated).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-30-40 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340 THRUST CONTROL SYSTEM (CFM, GE,
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL TRENT-7000) - THRUST RATING LIMIT
INDICATIONS ON FMA
The FADECs monitor the positions of the thrust levers, and trigger appropriate indications on the
FMA. Refer to DSC-22_30-100 Autothrust Annunciations (FMA Column 1) - Second Line.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-30-40 P 2/2

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-70-40-10-00020631.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The fuel system supplies fuel to the combustion chamber at the required flow rate, pressure, and
temperature.
The fuel flows from the tank, via the fuel pump unit and the fuel/oil heat exchanger, to the
Hydromechanical Unit (HMU) and to the fuel nozzles.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-40-10 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-40-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP UNIT / MAIN ENGINE PUMP
OPERATING MANUAL
FUEL PUMP UNIT

Ident.: DSC-70-40-20-00001136.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The HP compressor shaft drives the HP fuel pump assembly. Fuel flows through the LP pump, a
filter (debris screen), and the HP pump (gear pump), then through the fuel/oil heat exchanger and the
main filter. Fuel then divides into two filtered flows, one for the servo-fuel heater and servo-valves of
the HMU, and one for the HMU's metering valve.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-40-20 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP UNIT / MAIN ENGINE PUMP
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-40-20 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FUEL SYSTEM - SHUTOFF VALVES
OPERATING MANUAL
SHUTOFF VALVES
Ident.: DSC-70-40-30-00020640.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Setting the ENG MASTER switch to OFF directly commands the closing of the LP and HP fuel
shutoff valves for that engine’s fuel system.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-40-30 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FUEL SYSTEM - SHUTOFF VALVES
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-40-30 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FUEL SYSTEM - HYDROMECHANICAL UNIT / FUEL METERING UNIT
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-70-40-40-00020641.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The HMU is controlled by the FADEC, and performs :

‐ Control of the fuel flow to the engine combustion chamber through the Fuel Metering Valve (FMV)
‐ Overspeed protection for N2 by opening the fuel bypass valve
‐ Control of the fuel hydraulic signals to actuators.
FUEL FLOW
Ident.: DSC-70-40-40-00001139.0004001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
L3 The Fuel Metering Valve (FMV) transforms FADEC orders through a torque motor and servovalve
into fuel flow to the engine fuel nozzles.
The FMV resolver generates a feedback signal proportional to the FMV position.
The bypass valve maintains a constant pressure drop across the FMV to ensure that the metered
fuel flow is proportional to the FMV position.
L1 The FADEC computes the fuel flow that will maintain the target N1.
As the FADEC maintains this N1, it allows N2 to vary while remaining between N2 minimum and N2
maximum. The FADEC also controls the engine parameters to :
‐ Limit acceleration and deceleration ;
‐ Avoid engine stall or flameout ;
‐ Limit max N1 and N2 ;
‐ Maintain the air bleed pressure requirement.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-40-40 P 1/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The FADEC computes the N2 correction according to the bleed configuration.
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
Ident.: DSC-70-40-40-00020651.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Independent of the FADEC, the overspeed governor limits the N2 by opening the fuel bypass valve,
in the event of a malfunction that could lead to an overspeed condition.
IDLE CONTROL
Ident.: DSC-70-40-40-00001144.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The FADEC has the following three idle modes :

Modulated idle
‐ Is regulated according to :
• Bleed system demand
• Oil temperature
• Mach number.
‐ Is selected :
• In flight, when the flaps are retracted and the gear is up.
• On ground, provided reverse is not selected.
Approach idle
‐ Is regulated according to aircraft altitude, regardless of bleed system demand.
‐ Selected in flight, when the FLAPS are extended to FLAP 2, FLAP 3, or FULL, or when the
landing gear is down.
‐ Allows the engine to rapidly accelerate from idle to go-around thrust.
Reverse idle
‐ Selected on ground, when reverse idle thrust is selected.
‐ Slightly higher than forward idle thrust.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-40-40 P 2/4

FCOM ← B to D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FUEL HYDRAULIC SIGNALS

Ident.: DSC-70-40-40-00001145.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
L3 Fuel hydraulic signals go to :
‐ Low Pressure Turbine Clearance Control (LPTCC) valves.
Refer to DSC-70-60 Cooling
‐ High Pressure Turbine Clearance Control (HPTCC) valves.
Refer to DSC-70-60 Cooling
‐ Variable Stator Vanes (VSVs)
The VSVs system positions the compressor variable vanes.
The FADEC maintains optimum compressor efficiency at a steady state and an adequate stall
margin for transient engine operation.
VSVs are fully closed at low engine power, and are fully open at high thrust.
‐ Variable Bleed Valves (VBVs)

The FADEC controls the VBVs, upstream of the HP compressor. Their setting depends on
compressor inlet temperature and on N2. It varies between full open (start, low thrust, and during
fast deceleration) and full closed (high thrust) positions.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-40-40 P 3/4

FCOM E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-40-40 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FUEL SYSTEM - IDG OIL COOLING SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-70-40-50-00001146.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
IDG oil cooling is ensured by the IDG fuel/oil heat exchanger using fuel flow from the HMU.
At low fuel flows the IDG oil is cooled with fan discharge air thru an air/oil cooler.
The air is extracted from the fan by opening the air/oil cooler valve controlled by the FADEC.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-40-50 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FUEL SYSTEM - IDG OIL COOLING SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-40-50 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW OIL SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-70-50-10-00020653.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
The oil system lubricates the engine components.

It contains the :
‐ Oil tank
‐ Lube and scavenge pump modules
‐ Fuel/oil and/or air/oil heat exchanger
‐ Filters, pressure relief and bypass valves.

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW OIL SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-70-50-10-00020654.0002001 / 17 MAR 17

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW AIRBLEED SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-70-60-00020664.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The air bleed system is used for :

‐ The pneumatic system (Refer to DSC-36-10-10 General).
‐ Cooling the engine compartment and the turbine.
‐ Cooling the IDG oil.

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW AIRBLEED SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
COOLING
Ident.: DSC-70-60-00001153.0007001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
HP TURBINE CLEARANCE CONTROL (HPTCC) SYSTEM

The HPTCC system is controlled by the FADEC, through the HMU, and controls the high pressure
turbine clearance. The FADEC modulates the fan air flow for the high pressure turbine case
cooling.
It provides optimization of high pressure turbine performance and EGT reduction.
LP TURBINE CLEARANCE CONTROL (LPTCC) SYSTEM
The LPTCC system is controlled by the FADEC, through the HMU, and controls low pressure
turbine clearance.
The FADEC modulates the fan bleed air flow for the low pressure turbine case cooling.
CORE COMPARTMENT COOLING (CCC) SYSTEM
The CCC system is controlled by the FADEC. The core compartment is cooled and ventilated by
fan air thru the CCC valve pneumatically actuated.
The FADEC controls the valve to a low flow position during cruise at normal cruise power settings.
BORE COMPARTMENT COOLING (BCC) SYSTEM
The BCC system is controlled by the FADEC. The bore compartment is cooled and ventilated by
fan air thru the three BCC solenoid valves.
FADEC reduces the cooling during cruise.

FCOM B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW THRUST REVERSER SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-70-70-00020761.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Reverse thrust is obtained by deflecting the fan airstream. This is done when the translating cowls
are fully-deployed backward. This action therefore enables the pivoting blocker doors to divert the fan
flow forward through the cascades.

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The thrust reverser system is independently controlled for each engine by the associated FADEC.
This system is controlled and monitored by each FADEC channel. The translating cowls are
pneumatically actuated. The thrust reverser system for each engine includes all of the following:
‐ Two translating cowls, each activated by three ballscrews operated by a single pneumatic motor
actuator
‐ An air supply valve that automatically selects one of the air pneumatic source depending on
delivered pressure
‐ A pressure regulator and shutoff valve to regulate downstream pressure to 90 PSI maximum
‐ A directional control valve that actuates the pneumatic motor in the deployed/stowed position
‐ Two stow switches (one per cowl) and two deploy switches (one per cowl) to monitor if the
translating cowls are deployed or stowed
‐ One thrust reverser brake that is spring loaded in the lock position. During engine reverse thrust
operation, a solenoid enables the spring to be unloaded.
ACTUATION LOGIC
Ident.: DSC-70-70-00020764.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Deployment requires :
‐ One FADEC channel that operates with its associated throttle reverse signal
‐ Aircraft on ground signal from at least one LGCIU
‐ TLA reverse signal from the flight control primary computer 1 or 3 (PRIM 1 or PRIM 3).
Before the transit completion of the blocker doors, the FADEC sets reverse idle thrust.
PROTECTION
Ident.: DSC-70-70-00020765.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
AUTO RESTOW FUNCTION AND IDLE PROTECTION

The FADEC will automatically command the reverser to stow if at least one door is unstowed and
reverse thrust is not selected while engine is running.
The FADEC will automatically select idle thrust if the reverse thrust is not selected and one
translating cowl is unstowed by more than 30 % or both cowls are unstowed by more than 15 %.

FCOM ← A to C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SCHEMATIC
Ident.: DSC-70-70-00020663.0001001 / 17 MAR 17

FCOM D→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Applicable to: ALL

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW IGNITION AND STARTING - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-70-80-10-00020602.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The FADEC controls and monitors the ignition and starting system, according to the:
‐ ENG START selector position
‐ ENG MASTER switch position
‐ ENG MAN START pushbutton position
‐ Flight/ground aircraft condition.
In normal operation, the FADEC receives its inputs from the EIVMU/EIU.
In the event of an EIVMU/EIU signal loss, all the functions, except manual start and wet crank, will
remain available by using both a backup signal from the engine master switch, and the alternate
start/ignition signal.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-80-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW IGNITION AND STARTING - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
ARCHITECTURE
Ident.: DSC-70-80-10-00020603.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-80-10 P 2/2

FCOM B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW IGNITION AND STARTING - IGNITION SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-70-80-20-00020604.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The ignition system ensures:

‐ Engine start on ground (automatic and manual engine starts)
‐ Engine relight in flight
‐ Flameout prevention.
It consists of two identical independent circuits for each engine, normally controlled by the FADEC’s
channel A, with channel B on standby. Each FADEC channel can control both igniters.
IGNITION FOR STARTING

Ident.: DSC-70-80-20-00020605.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
ON GROUND
During a first automatic start attempt only one igniter is supplied. The FADEC automatically
alternates the igniters and/or channels used in successive start sequences.
The ignition comes on automatically when N2 reaches 10 %.
The ignition is automatically cut off when N2 reaches 54 %.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-80-20 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW IGNITION AND STARTING - IGNITION SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
If the automatic start fails the FADEC energizes both igniters at the same time during the second
attempt at an engine start.
During a manual start both igniters are supplied, when the ENG MASTER sw is ON. Both igniters
cut off when N2 reaches 54 %.
IN FLIGHT
In case of start attempt in flight, when the ENG MASTER sw is ON, both igniters are supplied.
CONTINUOUS IGNITION
Ident.: DSC-70-80-20-00020606.0004001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Continuous ignition is either selected manually or automatically to protect engine combustion.

MANUAL SELECTION
In flight, continuous ignition is selected, when the ENG START selector is on IGN/START,
provided the assigned engine is running.
On ground, after starting, since ignition is automatically cut off, to select continuous ignition, turn
the ENG START selector to NORM, then back to IGN/START.
AUTOMATIC SELECTION
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-80-20 P 2/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW IGNITION AND STARTING - ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-70-80-30-00001175.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The engine starting system consists of an air turbine starter and a start valve.
The start valve admits air supplied by the pneumatic system to operate the starter.
The FADEC electrically controls the start valve. On ground, in the event of an electrical control
failure, the start valve can be manually operated by a handle.
AUTOMATIC STARTING
Ident.: DSC-70-80-30-00020722.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
This sequence is under the FADEC’s full authority, which controls the:
‐ Start valve
‐ Igniter(s)
‐ Fuel HP valves.
It provides:
‐ Detection of hot start, hung start, stall or no light up, and protection for starter reengagement
speed and time
‐ FAULT announcement with specific ECAM message
‐ Start abort on ground (high pressure valve closure, start valve closure, and ignition stopped), and
automatic engine crank after start abort and control of any additional start attempts.
In flight, the FADEC identifies the windmilling or starter-assisted airstart conditions, according to
engine parameters and the flight conditions.
This sequence may be interrupted by selection of the engine master switch to OFF.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-80-30 P 1/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AUTOMATIC STARTING SEQUENCE

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-70-80-30-A-00020622.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
SEQUENCE OF THE AUTOMATIC START
Ident.: DSC-70-80-30-A-00020623.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
INITIAL CONFIGURATION OF THE CONTROLS

The initial configuration prior an automatic engine start is the following:
‐ The ENG MASTER switch is set to OFF
‐ The ENG START selector is set to NORM
‐ The ENG MAN START pb-sw is set to OFF.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-80-30 P 2/4

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-70-80-30-A-00020624.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
FIRST STEP
The flight crew must set the ENG START selector to IGN/START, leading to the following:
‐ The ENG SD page appears on the SD
‐ All engine parameters are available
‐ All pack valves automatically close.
After 30 s, if the flight crew does not set the ENG MASTER switch to ON (Refer to DSC-70-80-30
Second Step), the pack valves automatically open again and in case of first engine start the ECAM
ENG page will automatically disappear.
Ident.: DSC-70-80-30-A-00020625.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
SECOND STEP
The flight crew must set the ENG MASTER switch to ON, and the following steps occur:
‐ The LP fuel valve opens
‐ The engine start valve opens
‐ When N2 ≥ 10 %, the ignition starts
‐ When N2 ≥ 15 %, the HP fuel valve opens
‐ When N2 ≥ 50 %, the engine start valve closes
‐ When N2 ≥ 54 %, the ignition stops.
Ident.: DSC-70-80-30-A-00020626.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
THIRD STEP
The automatic engine start is finished.
The flight crew must set the ENG START selector to NORM.
On ground the WHEEL SD page replaces the ENG SD page.
In flight the CRUISE SD page replaces the ENG SD page.
If ENG START selector is not switched to NORM, the ENG page is automatically replaced by the
WHEEL or CRUISE SD page 15 s after all engines are running.
Ident.: DSC-70-80-30-A-00020627.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
INTERRUPTION OF THE AUTOMATIC START

When required by ECAM and after confirmation, the flight crew must set the ENG MASTER lever
to OFF.
If the flight crew sets the ENG MASTER lever to OFF, the FADEC automatically:
‐ Closes the LP and the HP fuel shutoff valves
‐ Stops to energize the ignitor
‐ Closes the engine start valve.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-80-30 P 3/4

FCOM ←C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MANUAL STARTING
Ident.: DSC-70-80-30-00020738.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
If an automatic start is not successful, the flight crew can perform a manual start.
In the manual start sequence, the FADEC has limited control. As a result, the flight crew must
monitor engine acceleration.
To perform a manual start, the flight crew must:
‐ Set the ENG START selector to IGN/START
‐ Set the ENG MAN START pb-sw to ON
‐ Set the ENG MASTER switch to ON.
The FADEC:
‐ Opens the engine start valve when the flight crew:
• Sets the ENG START selector to IGN/START
• Sets the ENG MAN START pb-sw to ON
‐ Opens the HP shutoff valve, and operates both igniters when the flight crew sets the ENG
MASTER switch to ON
‐ Closes the engine start valve, and cuts off the ignition when N2 reaches 54 %.
For more information about the manual start sequence, Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Manual
Engine Start - General.
The FADEC provides a passive survey of the engine during the starting sequence.
On the ground, it will automatically abort the starting sequence in case of starter reengagement
speed exceedance.
In flight, the FADEC always commands a starter assisted airstart.
ENGINE VENTILATION (DRY CRANKING)

Ident.: DSC-70-80-30-00020737.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
A dry cranking cycle enables the engine to be ventilated to remove fuel vapors after an unsuccessfull
start attempt on the ground.
Cranking can be manually selected by setting the ENG START selector to CRANK and the MAN
START pushbutton to ON (ENG MASTER switch off). It is stopped by setting the MAN START
pushbutton to off.
CAUTION Selecting the ENG START selector to NORM would not stop the cranking.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-80-30 P 4/4

FCOM D to E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW IGNITION AND STARTING - ALTERNATE START/IGNITION INFORMATION
OPERATING MANUAL
ALTERNATE START/LGNITION INFORMATION

Ident.: DSC-70-80-40-00020630.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
In case of EIVMU/EIU failure, the FADEC uses a backup signal from the ENG MASTER switch and
the alternate start/ignition signal to control:
‐ An automatic start,
‐ A dry crank, or
‐ Continuous ignition
Manual starting is no longer available.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-80-40 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW IGNITION AND STARTING - ALTERNATE START/IGNITION INFORMATION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-80-40 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CONTROLS AND INDICATORS - OVERHEAD PANEL
OPERATING MANUAL
ENG MAN START PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-70-90-10-20-00019013.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
ENG MAN START Panel
Ident.: DSC-70-90-10-20-00019014.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
ENG MAN START pb-sw

L12
ON : ‐ Initiates the manual start sequence of the associated engine, when the
ENG START selector is set to IGN/START, or
‐ Initiates the wet crank process of the associated engine, when the ENG
START selector is set to CRANK and the ENG MASTER lever is set to
ON, or
‐ Initiates the dry crank process of the associated engine, when the ENG
OFF.
Off : ‐ Aborts the manual start sequence of the associated engine, when the
ENG START selector is set to IGN/START and the ENG MASTER lever
is set to OFF, or
‐ Stops the dry crank process of the associated engine, when the ENG
OFF.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CONTROLS AND INDICATORS - OVERHEAD PANEL
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CONTROLS AND INDICATORS - PEDESTAL
OPERATING MANUAL
ENG START SELECTOR AND ENG MASTER LEVERS

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-70-90-20-30-00019017.0001001 / 20 MAY 16
ENG START Selector and ENG MASTER Levers
Ident.: DSC-70-90-20-30-00019018.0001001 / 20 MAY 16
ENG START SELECTOR

NORM : Normal mode of operation.
IGN/START : Use the IGN/START position to:
‐ Initiate the automatic or manual start sequences of the associated
engine, when the ENG MASTER lever is set to OFF, or
‐ Initiate the ignitors in flight as required.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-20 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
L13
CRANK : Use the CRANK position to:

‐ Initiate the dry crank process of the associated engine, when the ENG
MASTER lever and the ENG MAN START pb-sw are set to OFF.
‐ Initiates the wet crank process of the associated engine for maintenance
purpose, when the ENG MASTER lever, and the ENG MAN START
pb-sw are set to OFF.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-20-30-00019019.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
ENG MASTER LEVER

Also called ENG 1(2) MASTER switch.
L13
ON : The FADEC:
‐ Provides the associated engine with continuous ignition, when both
engines are running and the ENG START selector is set to IGN/START,
or
‐ Initiates the wet crank process of the associated engine for maintenance
purpose, when the ENG START selector is set to CRANK and the ENG
MAN START pb-sw is set to ON, or
‐ Initiates the automatic start sequence of the associated engine, when
the ENG START selector is set to IGN/START, or
‐ Initiates the manual start sequence of the associated engine, when the
ENG START selector is set to IGN/START and the ENG MAN START
pb-sw is set to ON.
Off : The FADEC:

‐ Shuts down the associated engine, or
‐ Aborts the start sequence of the associated engine.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-20-30-00019020.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
ENG MASTER LIGHT

FIRE light : A fire is detected in the corresponding engine.
FAULT light : ‐ The position of the HP fuel shutoff valve is abnormal, or
‐ The automatic start sequence of the associated engine aborts, or
‐ There is a malfunction of the thrust control.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-20 P 2/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
THRUST LEVERS
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-70-90-20-40-00019021.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Thrust Levers
Ident.: DSC-70-90-20-40-00019022.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
THRUST LEVERS
The flight crew uses the thrust levers in order to:
‐ Adjust the thrust, or
‐ Select a thrust stop or detent.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-20 P 3/4

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The flight crew can move each thrust lever individually.

L2 The position of the thrust levers appears on the E/WD, via a blue circle on the thrust gauge.
L1 The flight crew can move each thrust lever forward the Idle (0) stop, when the associated thrust
reverser lever is set to the stowed detent.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-20-40-00019023.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
THRUST DETENTS AND STOPS

There are one stop and three detents, for the thrust levers:
‐ The Idle (0) stop
‐ The Climb (CL) detent
‐ The Maximum Continuous Thrust (MCT)/Flexible Take Off (FLX) detent
‐ The Takeoff (TO)/Go-Around (GA) detent.
There are two stops and one detent, for the thrust reverser levers:
‐ The stowed stop
‐ The idle reverser (IDLE REV) detent
‐ The maximum reverser (MAX REV) stop.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-20-40-00019024.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
THRUST REVERSER LEVERS

The flight crew uses the thrust reverser levers in order to:
‐ Control the deployment and the stowage of the associated reversers
‐ Adjust the associated reverse thrust.
The flight crew can move the thrust reverser lever backward the stowed detent (to the IDLE REV
detent or MAX REV stop), when the associated thrust lever is set to the Idle (0) stop.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-20-40-00019025.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
A/THR INSTINCTIVE DISCONNECT pb

Pressing the A/THR INSTINCTIVE DISCONNECT pb disconnects the A/THR.
L2 For more information about the A/THR INSTINCTIVE DISCONNECT pb, Refer to DSC-22_30-90
A/THR Disconnection - General.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-20 P 4/4

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CONTROLS AND INDICATORS - MAINTENANCE PANEL
OPERATING MANUAL
ENG FADEC GND PWR PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-70-90-30-10-00019011.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
ENG FADEC GND PWR Panel
Ident.: DSC-70-90-30-10-00019012.0001001 / 14 FEB 17
ENG FADEC GND PWR pb

Off : The electrical network of the aircraft or the FADEC alternator automatically
supplies the FADEC.
ON : On ground, when pressed the electrical network of the aircraft supplies the
FADEC for 5 min, when:
‐ The ENG FIRE pb-sw is not pressed
‐ The FADEC alternator does not supply the FADEC.
The ON light comes on 2 s after the ENG FADEC GND PWR pb is
pushed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-30 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CONTROLS AND INDICATORS - MAINTENANCE PANEL
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-30 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CONTROLS AND INDICATORS - ENGINE DISPLAY
OPERATING MANUAL
ENGINE/WARNING DISPLAY
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018732.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Engine/Warning Display
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018744.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
THRUST RATING MODE AND THRUST LIMIT VALUE

Indicates the thrust limit value and the associated thrust rating mode based on:
‐ The position of the thrust levers,
‐ Aircraft on ground or in flight,
‐ The engine status, i.e. running or not running,
‐ The data entered in the T.O and CLB panels of the FMS ACTIVE/PERF page.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-40 P 1/12

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018747.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Thrust Rating Mode and Thrust Limit Value
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018750.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
THRUST RATING MODE

The thrust rating modes are:
TOGA : Takeoff or go-around (TOGA) thrust rating mode is selected.
MCT : Maximum Continuous Thrust (MCT) rating mode is selected.
CLB : Climb (CLB) thrust rating mode is selected.
FLX : Flexible (FLX) takeoff thrust rating mode is selected.
DCLB1(2) : Derated Climb  (DCLB) thrust rating mode is selected.
There are 2 levels of derated climb: DCLB1 and DCLB2.
D04 : Derated Takeoff  thrust rating mode is selected.
There are several levels of derated takeoff: D04, D08, D12, D16, D20, ...
L2 The thrust rating mode disappears when the thrust reversers are selected.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018756.0001001 / 28 FEB 17
THRUST LIMIT VALUE

N1 value : Indicates the N1 limit value associated with the thrust rating mode.
L2 The thrust limit value disappears when the thrust reversers are selected.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018761.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
FLEX TEMPERATURE
Cyan : Indicates the flexible temperature that the flight crew entered in the T.O panel
of the FMS PERF page, when the FLX rating mode is selected.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-40 P 2/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018763.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
IDLE INDICATION
Both engines are at idle speed, and the aircraft is in flight.
L2 Pulses during 10 s, and then remains steady.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018765.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
AVAIL INDICATION 
The engine is started, and at or above idle.
L2 On ground, appears steady during 10 s after a successful start.
In flight, pulses during 1 min after a successful relight.
The AVAIL indication disappears when the flight crew moves the thrust lever forward the idle
detent.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018766.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
REV INDICATION
REV in green : On ground, the thrust reverser system is fully deployed.
L12
REV in amber : The thrust reverser system is unlocked.

In flight, the REV indication pulses during 9 s and then remains steady.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018769.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
EGT INDICATOR
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018771.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
CURRENT EGT
L12
Green : The current EGT is in normal range.

The scale goes from 0 °C to 1 200 °C.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-40 P 3/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Amber : The current EGT exceeds the EGT limit.

Red : The EGT is above the EGT red limit.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018773.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
EGT LIMIT
The amber line indicates the maximum EGT (i.e. the EGT limit).
L2 The maximum EGT is:
‐ 750 °C, during the engine start sequence on ground, or
‐ 940 °C, in all other cases.
The EGT limit does not appear:
‐ When a takeoff or a go-around mode is selected, or
‐ When the thrust reversers are selected, or
‐ If the alpha floor protection is activated.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018775.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
EGT EXCEEDANCE
The EGT exceedance is the highest value that the EGT reached.
The EGT exceedance appears when:
‐ The current EGT exceeds the EGT red limit, or
‐ The EGT exceeded the EGT red limit.
L2 The red mark no longer appears at the next engine start sequence on ground, or after a
maintenance action.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018776.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
EGT RED LINE

The EGT red line appears between the EGT red limit and the end of the scale.
L2 The EGT red limit is 975 °C.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-40 P 4/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018792.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
N1 INDICATOR
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018795.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
CURRENT N1
Green : The current N1 is in normal range.
Amber : The current N1 exceeds the N1 limit.
L12
Red : The current N1 exceeds the N1 red limit.

N1 red limit is 115.5 %.
L12
Dashed : The accuracy of the N1 measurement is degraded.

Two amber dashes appear over the last digit.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018796.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
N1 TREND
The green triangle indicates the direction of the N1 trend, when the A/THR mode is active.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018797.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
N1 COMMAND
Indicates the N1 target, when the A/THR mode is active.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018798.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
TRANSIENT N1
The four green arcs indicate the difference between the N1 command and the current N1, when
the A/THR is active.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-40 P 5/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018799.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
THRUST LEVER POSITION

The blue circle indicates the position of the thrust lever.
In manual mode, the blue circle corresponds to the N1 value reached after the stabilization of
the engine parameters.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018800.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
N1 LIMIT
The amber mark indicates the N1 limit.
L2 This corresponds to the maximum N1 value when the thrust levers are in TO/GA detent or in the
MAX REV position.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018802.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
N1 EXCEEDANCE
The N1 exceedance is the highest value that the N1 reached.
The N1 exceedance appears when the current N1 exceeds the N1 red limit.
The N1 exceedance remains even if the N1 value decreases below the N1 red limit.
L2 The red mark no longer appears at the next engine start sequence on ground, or after a
maintenance action.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018804.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
N1 RED LINE
The N1 red line appears between the N1 red limit and the end of the scale.
L2 The N1 red limit is 115.5 %.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018805.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
N2
In a grey box : The engine start sequence or the crank process is in progress.
Green : N2 is in normal range.
L12
Red : N2 exceeds the N2 red limit.

N2 red limit is 113 %.
A red cross appears.
The red cross no longer appears at the next engine start sequence on ground,
or after a maintenance action.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-40 P 6/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
L12
Dashes : The accuracy of the N2 measurement is degraded.

Two amber dashes appear over the last digit.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00018829.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
THRUST BUMP INDICATION 

Green : Indicates that the thrust bump is engaged.
Amber : When on the ground, indicates that the thrust bump is selected but not
engaged.
Cyan : When on the ground, indicates that the thrust bump is selected.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-50-00019589.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
MEMO DISPLAY
IGNITION : This message is displayed in green, either when selected automatically by
the FADEC or manually by the crew.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-40 P 7/12

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ENG SD PAGE
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-60-00018831.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
ENG SD page
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-60-00018852.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
FUEL USED INDICATION

L12
Green : Indicates the fuel used by each engine.

This value automatically resets on ground, at the next engine start.
Appears in multiples of 10 kg (20 lb).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-40 P 8/12

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
L12
Dashed : The value accuracy is degraded.

Two amber dashes appear over all five digits.
This occurs when the Fuel Flow is not valid in flight, for more than 1 min.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-60-00018853.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
FUEL FILTER CLOG INDICATION

Indicates that the pressure loss across the fuel filter is excessive.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-60-00018854.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
OIL QUANTITY
L12
Green : The oil quantity is in normal range.

The scale goes from 0 to 30 QT.
L12
Pulses green : The needle and the oil quantity value pulse green.
The advisory limit is 2 QT.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-60-00018855.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
OIL PRESSURE
L12
Green : The oil pressure is in normal range.

The scale goes from 0 to 100 PSI.
L12
Red : The oil pressure is in the red range.

The red range is between 0 and 10 PSI.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-60-00018856.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
OIL TEMPERATURE
Green : The oil temperature is in normal range.
Pulses green : The oil temperature is above 160 °C for less than 15 min.
Amber/red : The oil temperature is above 160 °C for more than 15 min, or above 175 °C.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-60-00018857.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
OIL FILTER CLOG INDICATION

Indicates that the pressure loss across the oil filter is excessive.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-40 P 9/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-60-00018858.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
N1, N2 VIBRATIONS
Green : The vibration of the LP (HP) rotor is in normal range.
Pulses green : The level of LP (HP) rotor vibration is excessive.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-60-00018860.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
STARTING SEQUENCE INDICATION

During the engine start sequence, the starting sequence indication appears on the ENG SD page.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-60-00018861.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
IGNITION INDICATION
: The igniter A(B) is used for the engine start sequence.
: Both igniters A and B are used for the engine start sequence or continuous
ignition.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-60-00018862.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
START VALVE
: The engine start valve is fully closed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-40 P 10/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
: The engine start valve is fully open.
: The engine start valve failed in the closed position.
: The engine start valve failed in the open position.
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-60-00018864.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
STARTER INLET PRESSURE

Green : The starter inlet pressure is normal.
Amber : The starter inlet pressure is either:
‐ Abnormally high, or
‐ Abnormally low (below 21 PSI, when N2 is above 10 % and the starter
valve is not closed).
Ident.: DSC-70-90-40-60-00018866.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
NACELLE TEMPERATURE INDICATION

Green : The nacelle temperature is normal.
L12
Pulses green : The nacelle temperature goes above the advisory limit, that correspond to the
white dash.
The advisory limit is 260 °C.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-40 P 11/12

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ENGINES
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-70-90-40 P 12/12

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY

A330 FCOM 07feb18 GENDSC TOMEIII

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

A330 FCOM 07feb18 GENDSC TOMEIII

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A330 FCOM 07feb18 GENDSC TOMEIII

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A330/A340

REFERENCE: JAI A330/A340 FLEET FCOM ISSUE DATE: 07 FEB 18

DSC-32-10 Gears and Doors

DSC-32-10-20 Landing Gear System Interface

DSC-32-10-30 Controls and Indicators

DSC-32-20 Nose Wheel Steering

DSC-32-20-20 Controls and Indicators

DSC-32-30 Brakes and Antiskid

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-PLP-TOC P 1/2

Continued from the previous page

DSC-32-40 Tire Pressure Indicating System

DSC-32-40-20 Controls and Indicators

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-PLP-TOC P 2/2

The landing gear consists of :

MAIN LANDING GEAR (MLG)

NOSE LANDING GEAR (NLG)

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-10 P 1/6

LANDING GEAR EXTENSION AND RETRACTION EQUIPMENT

MAIN LANDING GEAR

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-10 P 2/6

Ident.: DSC-32-10-10-A-00018892.0001001 / 21 MAR 16

NOSE LANDING GEAR

LANDING GEARS AND DOORS OPERATION

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-10 P 3/6

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-10 P 4/6

LANDING GEAR INDICATION AND WARNING ARCHITECTURE

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-10 P 5/6

Ident.: DSC-32-10-10-B-00018890.0001001 / 21 MAR 16

LANDING GEAR GRAVITY EXTENSION

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-10 P 6/6

LANDING GEAR CONTROL INTERFACE UNIT (LGCIU)

LANDING GEAR - AIRCRAFT SYSTEM INTERFACE

A semicolon (;) separates different signals send to the same system.

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-20 P 1/4

SYSTEM LGCIU 1 LGCIU 2

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-20 P 2/4

Continued from the previous page

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-20 P 3/4

Intentionally left blank

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-20 P 4/4

LANDING GEAR INDICATOR PANEL

A340 Landing Gear Indicator Panel

A330 Landing Gear Indicator Panel

Connected to LGCIU 1 which receives signals from proximity sensors.

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-30 P 1/6

LANDING GEAR SELECTOR LEVER

(1) L/G LEVER

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-30 P 2/6

DOWN : Landing gear extension is selected.

LANDING GEAR GRAVITY EXTENSION

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-30 P 3/6

The wheel page is automatically displayed:

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-30 P 4/6

(1) Landing Gear Position Indication

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-30 P 5/6

(2) Landing Gear Door Position Indication

(3) UPLOCK Indication

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-32-10-30 P 6/6